Part A. PRELIMINARY EXAMINATIONS
Part B. TRIPOS EXAMINATIONS
The Ordinances contained in this chapter are Ordinances of the General Board
1. The Faculty Boards or other bodies responsible for the teaching for Honours Examinations shall be authorized to hold examinations preliminary to the Tripos with which they are concerned, or to a Part or Section of it, for the purpose of testing the progress of honours students, and their fitness for honours work. The Preliminary Examinations shall not be deemed Honours Examinations of the University.
2. Subject to the powers of the General Board and the Board of Examinations, the Faculty Boards and comparable authorities shall have power to determine the standard, scope, management, and conduct of the Preliminary Examinations with which they are concerned, and shall make special regulations for those examinations, subject to the approval of the General Board. Not later than the end of the Easter Term each year a Notice shall be published giving details of any amendments of the special regulations which have been made by the authorities concerned, to have effect for the examinations to be held in the following year; after the publication of that Notice, no further amendments shall be made of the special regulations for any Preliminary Examination save in exceptional circumstances and by special permission of the General Board. A Faculty Board or other body shall have power to make supplementary regulations defining all or any of the subjects of the examinations with which they are concerned and to amend or withdraw such regulations as they think fit, provided that due notice is given of any change.
3. The variable subjects for all the Easter Term Preliminary Examinations shall be published by the Faculty Board or other body concerned in the Easter Term next before that in which the examination is held; provided that the Board or other body concerned shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination is adversely affected.
4. Failure to take, or to pass, a Preliminary Examination shall not debar a student from proceeding to the corresponding Tripos Examination.
5. No student may take a Preliminary Examination unless he or she has kept one term.
6. The Faculty Boards or other bodies concerned shall nominate such number of Examiners and Assessors as they think fit for each Preliminary Examination, except in so far as the regulations for an examination provide for papers to be the responsibility of the Examiners for a particular Tripos examination.
7. The names of candidates who pass a Preliminary Examination, other than the Preliminary Examinations for Parts Ia and II of the Classical Tripos, for Parts I and II of the Education Tripos, for Part I of the Historical Tripos, and for the Linguistics Tripos, shall be arranged in three classes, and the Examiners, if they think fit, may divide any class; the names in each class or division of a class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. The names of candidates who pass the Preliminary Examination for either Part of the Classical Tripos, for either Part of the Education Tripos, and for Part I of the Historical Tripos, shall be arranged in alphabetical order in one class. The general regulations regarding the publication and correction of class-lists shall apply to these examinations also.
8. Except so far as regards the nomination of Examiners the powers and duties assigned to Faculty Boards in these regulations shall be performed with respect to any Preliminary Examination pertaining to the Natural Sciences Tripos by the Committee of Management for the Natural Sciences Tripos.
1. There shall be a Preliminary Examination for Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos.
2. The papers shall be as follows:
|
Paper 1. |
England before the Norman Conquest. |
|
Paper 2. |
Scandinavian history in the Viking Age. |
|
Paper 3. |
The Brittonic-speaking peoples from the fourth century to the twelfth. |
|
Paper 4. |
The Gaelic-speaking peoples from the fourth century to the twelfth. |
|
Paper 5. |
Old English language and literature. |
|
Paper 6. |
Old Norse language and literature. |
|
Paper 7. |
Medieval Welsh language and literature. |
|
Paper 8. |
Medieval Irish language and literature. |
|
Paper 9. |
Insular Latin language and literature. |
|
Paper 10. |
Palaeography. |
3. A candidate shall offer any four papers.
1. There shall be a Preliminary Examination for Part II of the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos.
2. The subjects of examination shall be as follows:
Chinese with Japanese
Japanese with Chinese
Each candidate shall offer one subject.
3. There shall be separate examinations for each subject, as specified below:
4. No candidate shall offer a paper he or she has previously offered in any Honours Examination.
5. The Examiners shall be the Examiners for Part Ia and Part Ib of the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos.
1. There shall be Preliminary Examinations for Part Ia, and for Part II of the Classical Tripos.
2. The examination shall consist of:
(a) Two written papers, each of three hours:
|
Paper 1. |
Latin texts |
|
Paper 2. |
Latin questions |
(b) A portfolio of two essays each of no more than 4,000 words in length, including notes but excluding bibliography, and on a topic approved by the Faculty Board of Classics. Candidates should submit the titles of their essays through their Directors of Studies to the Academic Secretary of the Faculty in time to be considered by the third Monday of Full Easter Term. The essays shall be typewritten, in English, and shall be submitted through the candidate's Director of Studies to the Academic Secretary, in accordance with detailed arrangements approved by the Board, so as to arrive not later than the seventh Tuesday of the Full Easter Term in which the examination takes place. Candidates will be required to declare that the essays are their own work and that they do not contain material already used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose. Where appropriate full and proper acknowledgement must be given to the work of others.
3. In the class-list a mark of distinction may be attached to the name of any candidate whose work in the examination shows special merit.
4. The papers for this examination shall be taken from among the papers for Part II of the Classical Tripos, and the Examiners shall be the Examiners for that examination. Every candidate shall offer two papers, of which not more than one may be taken from the Schedule of Optional Papers.
This paper will be divided into two sections. Section (a) will contain passages in Latin for translation into English from texts prescribed from time to time by the Faculty Board. Section (b) will contain passages for critical discussion taken from the prescribed texts.
This paper will be divided into two sections. Section (a) will contain passages of Latin for unseen translation. Section (b) will contain exercises on the Latin language.
1. There shall be a Preliminary Examination for Part I of the Education Tripos.
2. The Examination shall comprise two sections as set out below. Each candidate shall offer the examination requirements set out in Section I and the examination requirements for a single subject area as set out in Section II. At the discretion of the Examiners the examination may include an oral examination on the course-work submitted under Section I.
Section I. Education studies
Section I consists of two written papers, one of three hours’ duration and one of two hours’ duration, and the submission of course-work, as prescribed by the Faculty Board of Education not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term preceding the examination.
|
Paper 1 |
Foundation course in the disciplines of education |
|
Paper 2 |
Language, communication, and literacy (also serves as Paper 9 of Part I of the Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos) |
|
Course-work |
Section II. Subject studies
Candidates may offer papers from only one subject area. Where stated, some papers are examined by means other than a single written paper. For papers offered by the Faculty of Education, the Faculty Board of Education shall specify arrangements for the submission of course-work, the sitting of practical examinations, or performances or workshops not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term preceding the examination. Some subject areas may restrict the combinations of papers that may be offered.
All candidates shall offer:
All candidates shall offer:
All candidates shall offer:
All candidates shall offer:
All candidates shall offer:
All candidates shall offer:
All candidates shall offer the following options:
|
Paper Ed.Pre.Ma1 |
Vectors and matrices (including questions taken from Paper 1 from Part Ia of the Mathematical Tripos) |
|
Paper Ed.Pre.Ma2 |
Probability (including questions taken from Paper 2 from Part Ia of the Mathematical Tripos) |
|
Paper Ed.Pre.Ma |
Numbers and sets (including questions taken from Paper 4 from Part Ia of the Mathematical Tripos) |
All candidates shall offer:
All candidates shall offer two of the following papers from Part Ia of the Music Tripos:
|
Paper 1 |
Harmony and counterpoint I |
|
Paper 2 |
Harmony and counterpoint II |
|
Paper 3 |
Historical subjects |
|
Paper 4 |
Historical and cultural studies |
|
Paper 5 |
Analysis |
All candidates shall offer:
All candidates shall offer:
Where, under the regulations for the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos, a paper may be offered in a form of assessment other than a written paper, the paper offered shall be submitted under conditions specified in the regulations for that Tripos.
3. There shall be a Preliminary Examination for Part II of the Education Tripos.
4. The Examination shall comprise four sections, as set out below. Candidates shall offer:
Section I. Education studies
Section I consists of two written papers, each of three hours’ duration.
|
Paper 1 |
Disciplines of education I |
|
Paper 2 |
Disciplines of education II |
Section II. Globalization, modernity, and education
Section II consists of one written paper of three hours’ duration.
|
Paper 3 |
Globalization, modernity, and education |
Section III. Special subjects in education
Candidates may offer one special subject in education, which shall count as one paper. The special subjects, and the examination requirements for each special subject, shall be announced by the Faculty Board from time to time, providing that due care is taken to give sufficient notice to all candidates.
Section IV. Subject studies
Candidates may offer two or three papers from only one subject area specified in Schedule 1 to the Education Tripos.2 Where stated, some papers are examined by means other than a single written paper. Some subject areas may restrict the combinations of papers that may be offered.
5. For either Preliminary Examination, no candidate shall offer any paper, dissertation, or other exercise that he or she has previously offered in any University examination.
6. A candidate who intends to submit a dissertation under Regulation 4 shall submit the proposed topic to the Secretary of the Faculty Board through her or his Director of Studies, by a date announced by the Faculty Board not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term preceding the examination. The Secretary shall communicate the approval or rejection of the proposed topic to the candidate no later than the beginning of the Lent Term preceding the examination.
The submitted dissertation shall be of not less than 8,000 words and not more than 10,000 words, inclusive of notes and appendices. Dissertations shall be submitted by candidates through the Undergraduate Office to the Secretary of the Faculty Board by a date specified by the Faculty Board not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term preceding the examination. Each dissertation shall be in typescript, unless previous permission has been obtained from the Faculty Board to present it in manuscript; it shall bear the candidate’s examination number and shall be accompanied by a brief synopsis.
Candidates will be required to declare that the dissertation is their own work and that it does not contain material already used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose. At the discretion of the Examiners, a candidate may be examined viva voce on her or his dissertation.
1. There shall be a Preliminary Examination for Part II of the English Tripos.
2. The examination shall consist of Papers 1–15 of Part II of the English Tripos. In order to be classed a candidate shall offer (a) Papers 1 and 2 and (b) one paper chosen from Papers 3–15; provided that a candidate who has not previously obtained honours in Part I of the English Tripos may, with the leave of the Faculty Board, offer not more than one paper from Part I, as follows:
3. The Examiners shall be the Examiners for Parts I and II of the Tripos.
1. There shall be a Preliminary Examination for Part II of the Geographical Tripos.
2. The papers for this examination shall be taken from among the papers for Part Ib of the Geographical Tripos and the Examiners shall be the Examiners for that examination.
3. Each candidate shall
1. There shall be Preliminary Examinations for Part I and for Part II of the Historical Tripos.
2. The examination shall consist of nineteen papers as follows:
|
Section A |
|
|
Paper 1. |
Historical argument and practice |
|
Section B British Political and Constitutional History |
|
|
Paper 2. |
British political and constitutional history, 380–1100 |
|
Paper 3. |
British political and constitutional history, 1050–1509 |
|
Paper 4. |
British political and constitutional history, 1485–1750 |
|
Paper 5. |
British political and constitutional history, 1700–1914 |
|
Paper 6. |
British political and constitutional history, since 1867 |
|
Section C British Economic and Social History |
|
|
Paper 7. |
British economic and social history, 380–1100 |
|
Paper 8. |
British economic and social history, 1050–c. 1500 |
|
Paper 9. |
British economic and social history, c. 1500–1750 |
|
Paper 10. |
British economic and social history, 1700–1914 |
|
Paper 11. |
British economic and social history, since c. 1870 |
|
Section D European History |
|
|
Paper 12. |
European history, 776 bc–ad 69 |
|
Paper 13. |
European history, 31 bc–ad 900 |
|
Paper 14. |
European history, 900–c. 1215 |
|
Paper 15. |
European history, 1200–1520 |
|
Paper 16. |
European history, 1450–1760 |
|
Paper 17. |
European history, 1715–1890 |
|
Paper 18. |
European history, since 1890 |
|
Section E Extra-European History |
|
|
Paper 19. |
Extra-European history, from 1400 |
3. In order to be included in the list of successful candidates, a candidate shall offer Paper 1 and two papers from Sections B–E. Only one paper may be offered from each section.
4. The examination shall consist of Papers 3–30 of Part II of the Historical Tripos. In order to be classed a candidate shall offer either three or four papers, provided that no candidate shall offer a paper which he or she would not be permitted to offer as a candidate for the Tripos. A candidate who offers four papers shall be classed on the basis of the best three of those papers. The Examiners shall be the Examiners for Part II of the Tripos.
This paper aims to provide an opportunity for candidates to reflect on broad issues of historical argument and practice. The paper is a means of enabling candidates to raise and discuss fundamental questions which relate their specialist knowledge to more general themes of historical inquiry and explanation. The paper will offer a choice of questions, from which candidates will be required to answer one.
The scope of Papers 2–18 shall be that of the corresponding papers in Part I of the Tripos. The scope of Paper 19 shall be that of Papers 21 and 23 in Part I.
Three questions must be answered but no question shall be specified as compulsory, except that in Papers 17 (European history, 1715–1890) and 18 (European history, since 1890) candidates will be required to answer at least one question from each of sections A and B.
1. There shall be a Preliminary Examination for the Linguistics Tripos (Old Regulations).
2. The examination shall consist of the following papers:
|
Paper 1. |
General linguistics (Paper Li. 1 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 2. |
Language variation (Paper Li. 2 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 3. |
Phonetics (Paper 3 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
|
Paper 4. |
Syntax (Paper 4 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
|
Paper 5. |
Semantics and pragmatics (Paper 5 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
|
Paper 6. |
Phonology and morphology (Paper 6 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
|
Paper 7. |
Historical linguistics (Paper 7 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
|
Paper 8. |
The structure of English (Paper 8 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
|
Paper 9. |
Foundations of speech communication (Paper 9 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
3. Each candidate shall offer either Paper 1 or Paper 2, and three other papers; provided that
1. There shall be a Preliminary Examination for Part II of the Natural Sciences Tripos. The subjects of the examination shall be as follows:
|
Chemistry |
History and Philosophy of Science |
|
Experimental and Theoretical Physics |
Materials Science and Metallurgy |
|
Geological Sciences |
Psychology |
2. Each candidate for the examination shall offer one of these subjects and shall satisfy the requirements set out in the regulations below. No candidate may offer a paper which they have previously offered in Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos.
3. The examination in Chemistry shall consist of the examination requirements for the subjects Chemistry A and Chemistry B in Part Ib of the Tripos. The Examiners in Chemistry A and Chemistry B in Part Ib shall be the Examiners in Chemistry in the Preliminary Examination.
4. The examination in Experimental and Theoretical Physics shall consist of:
The Examiners in the subjects Physics A and Physics B and Mathematics in Part Ib shall, as appropriate, be the Examiners in Experimental and Theoretical Physics in the Preliminary Examination.
5. The examination in Geological Sciences shall consist of the examination requirements for two subjects selected from Geological Sciences A, Geological Sciences B, and Mineral Sciences in Part Ib of the Tripos. The Examiners in the subjects, Geological Sciences A, Geological Sciences B, and Mineral Sciences in Part Ib shall, as appropriate, be the Examiners in Geological Sciences in the Preliminary Examination.
6. The examination in History and Philosophy of Science shall consist of:
Classical traditions in the sciences
Natural philosophies: Renaissance to Enlightenment
Science, industry, and Empire
Metaphysics, epistemology, and the sciences
Science and technology studies
History and philosophy of mind
Medicine from antiquity to the Enlightenment
Modern medicine and biomedical sciences
Images of the sciences
Science and technology from the First World War
Not more than one topic may be chosen from any one field.
The Examiners in History and Philosophy of Science in Part Ib shall be the Examiners in History and Philosophy of Science in the Preliminary Examination.
7. The examination in Materials Science and Metallurgy shall consist of the examination requirements for Materials Science and Metallurgy in Part Ib of the Tripos and two subjects selected from Chemistry A, Mathematics, Mineral Sciences, and Physics in Part Ib of the Tripos. The Examiners in Materials Science and Metallurgy in Part Ib shall be the Examiners in Materials Science and Metallurgy in the Preliminary Examination.
8. The examination in Psychology shall consist of the examination requirements for Experimental Psychology in Part Ib of the Tripos. The Examiners in Experimental Psychology in Part Ib shall be the Examiners in Psychology in the Preliminary Examination.
9. For each subject there shall be published a separate class-list, which shall be signed by the Examiners in that subject. In each list the names of the successful candidates shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions.
1. The Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos shall consist of two Parts. A separate class-list shall be published for each Part.
2. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part I:
3. A student who has obtained honours in an Honours Examination may be a candidate for honours in Part II in the year after or next but one after so obtaining honours, provided that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.3
4. No student shall be a candidate for both Parts, or for either Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
5. No student who has been a candidate for either Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
6. The Faculty Board of English may from time to make make supplementary regulations defining all or any of the subjects set out in the following regulations, and may modify, alter, or withdraw such supplementary regulations as they think fit, due care being taken that sufficient notice is given of any change.
7. The Faculty Board of English shall give notice before the end of the Easter Term in every academical year of the variable subjects for the examinations to be held in the academical year next but one following; provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination is adversely affected.
8. The Faculty Board of English shall nominate such number of Examiners as they may deem sufficient for each Part of the Tripos, and shall have the power to nominate Assessors for any papers.
9. The questions proposed by each Examiner and Assessor shall be submitted for approval to the whole body of Examiners.
10. The answers to each question shall be read by at least two Examiners or Assessors.
11. In the class-list for each Part of the Tripos, the names of the candidates who obtain honours shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. A mark of distinction shall be affixed to the names of those candidates placed in the first class whose work either in a part or in the whole of the examination is of special merit.
12. The papers in Part I shall be as follows:
|
Paper 1. |
England before the Norman Conquest. |
|
Paper 2. |
Scandinavian history in the Viking Age.4 |
|
Paper 3. |
The Brittonic-speaking peoples from the fourth century to the twelfth. |
|
Paper 4. |
The Gaelic-speaking peoples from the fourth century to the twelfth. |
|
Paper 5. |
Old English language and literature (also serves as Paper 15 of Part II of the English Tripos).4 |
|
Paper 6. |
Old Norse language and literature (also serves as Paper 12 of Part I and Paper 17 of Part II of the English Tripos).4 |
|
Paper 7. |
Medieval Welsh language and literature (also serves as Paper 13 of Part I and Paper 18a of Part II of the English Tripos).4 |
|
Paper 8. |
Medieval Irish language and literature (also serves as Paper 19a of Part II of the English Tripos).4 |
|
Paper 9. |
Insular Latin language and literature (also serves as Paper 11 of Part I and Paper 16 of Part II of the English Tripos). |
|
Paper 10. |
Palaeography and codicology. |
|
Paper 11. |
Early medieval literature and its contexts (Paper 10 of Part I of the English Tripos). |
|
Paper 12. |
French literature, thought, and history, before 1300 (Paper Fr. 3 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 13. |
Medieval Latin literature, from 650 to 1300 (Paper ML 2 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos).5 |
|
Paper 14. |
Europe in the first millennium ad I (Paper A25 of Parts IIa and IIb of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos). |
|
Paper 15. |
Europe in the first millennium ad II (Paper A26 of Parts IIa and IIb of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos). |
13. A candidate for Part I shall offer six of the papers specified in Regulation 12, provided that
14. The papers in Part II shall be as follows:
|
Paper 1. |
A subject in Anglo-Saxon history specified by the Faculty Board of English. |
|
Paper 2. |
A subject in Scandinavian history of the Viking Age specified by the Faculty Board of English. |
|
Paper 3. |
A subject in Celtic history specified by the Faculty Board of English. |
|
Paper 4. |
A subject in Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic history specified by the Faculty Board of English. |
|
Paper 5. |
A subject in Old English literature specified by the Faculty Board of English. |
|
Paper 6. |
Advanced medieval Scandinavian language and literature. |
|
Paper 7. |
Advanced medieval Welsh language and literature (also serves as Paper 18b of Part II of the English Tripos).4 |
|
Paper 8. |
Advanced medieval Irish language and literature (also serves as Paper 19b of Part II of the English Tripos).4 |
|
Paper 9. |
A subject in Insular Latin literature specified by the Faculty Board of English. |
|
Paper 10. |
Textual criticism. |
|
Paper 11. |
Germanic philology (also serves as Paper 23 of the Linguistics Tripos).4 |
|
Paper 12. |
Celtic philology (also serves as Paper 20 of the Linguistics Tripos).4 |
|
Paper 13. |
Medieval English literature, 1066–1500 (Paper 4 of Part II of the English Tripos). |
|
Paper 14. |
A subject in medieval European history (a paper on a subject announced for a paper of Part II of the Historical Tripos which in any year has been approved for the purpose of this regulation by the Faculty Board of English). |
|
Paper 15. |
Historical linguistics (Paper 7 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
|
Paper 16. |
Europe in the first millennium ad I (Paper A25 of Parts IIa and IIb of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos). |
|
Paper 17. |
Europe in the first millennium ad II (Paper A26 of Parts IIa and IIb of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos). |
15. Except as provided in Regulation 16, a candidate for Part II shall offer
16. A candidate for Part II may offer in place of one of the papers required under Regulation 15(a) one paper chosen from among Papers 1–10 of Part I, provided that
17. (a) A candidate for Part I who wishes to offer a dissertation under Regulation 13(c), or a candidate for Part II who is required to offer a dissertation under Regulation 15(b), shall submit an application, including the title of the proposed dissertation, a brief account of its scope, and a statement of the scheme of papers to be offered in the examination. Applications shall be submitted to the Head of the Department, so as to arrive not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
(b) Each candidate must obtain the approval of the proposed title by the Faculty Board not later than the last day of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination. When the Faculty Board have approved a title, no change shall be made to it or to the candidate's scheme of papers, without the further approval of the Faculty Board.
(c) A Part I dissertation shall be of not fewer than 7,000 and not more than 10,000 words in length, and a Part II dissertation shall be of not fewer than 9,000 and not more than 12,000 words in length, including appendices but excluding bibliography. Candidates will be required to declare that the dissertation is their own work and that it does not contain material already used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose. Every dissertation shall be typewritten.
(d) A dissertation shall be submitted to the Head of the Department, so as to arrive not later than the first day of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held.
(e) The Examiners shall have power to examine a candidate viva voce on his or her dissertation and on the general field of knowledge within which it falls.
An introduction to the history and civilization of England from the age of the Anglo-Saxon settlements to the Norman Conquest. Candidates will be required to use primary sources in the original languages or in translation.
An introduction to the history and culture of Denmark, Norway, and Sweden in the Viking Age, including the westward expansion to the North Atlantic and the eastward expansion to Russia and Ukraine. Candidates will be required to use primary sources in the original languages or in translation.
An introduction to the history and culture of the Brittonic-speaking peoples from the collapse of the Roman Empire to the Anglo-Norman invasions. Candidates will be required to use primary sources in the original languages or in translation.
An introduction to the history and culture of the Gaelic-speaking peoples from the fourth century to the twelfth. Candidates will be required to use primary sources in the original languages or in translation.
An introduction to the language and literary characteristics of Old English prose and poetry. There will be set texts in the original language; candidates will be required to translate passages from the set texts and an unseen passage of Old English, and to write essays on selected topics.
An introduction to the language and literary characteristics of Old Norse prose and poetry. There will be set texts in the original language; candidates will be required to translate passages from the set texts and an unseen passage of Old Norse, and to write essays on selected topics.
An introduction to the language and literature of Wales from the beginnings to the end of the Middle Ages. There will be set texts in the original language; candidates will be required to translate, and to comment on the linguistic characteristics of, passages from the set texts, to translate an unseen passage of Middle Welsh, and to write essays on selected topics.
An introduction to the language and literature of early medieval Ireland, in particular until the end of the tenth century. There will be set texts in the original language; candidates will be required to translate, and to comment on the linguistic characteristics of, passages from the set texts, to translate an unseen passage of Old Irish, and to write essays on selected topics.
An introduction to the Latin literature of England and the Celtic-speaking countries from the fourth century to the twelfth. An advanced knowledge of Latin is not expected when preparation is begun, although some knowledge of the language is desirable. There will be set texts in the original language; candidates will be required to show detailed knowledge of these and to write essays on selected topics.
An introduction to the manuscript as a physical object and the history of scripts used in the manuscript sources studied in Papers 1–9. Candidates will be required to answer compulsory practical questions, and to write essays on selected topics.
An advanced topic in the history and civilization of England from the age of the Anglo-Saxon settlements to the Norman Conquest. Candidates will be required to use primary sources in the original languages or in translation.
An advanced topic in the history and culture of Denmark, Norway, and Sweden in the Viking Age, including the westward expansion to the North Atlantic and the eastward expansion to Russia and Ukraine. Candidates will be required to use primary sources in the original languages or in translation.
An advanced topic in the history and culture of the Celtic-speaking peoples from the fourth century to the twelfth. Candidates will be required to use primary sources in the original languages or in translation.
An advanced topic in the history and culture of Anglo-Saxon England, medieval Scandinavia, and the medieval Celtic-speaking peoples. Candidates will be required to use primary sources in the original languages or in translation.
The work of an author or a group of authors, or a group of texts, or a literary topic or genre within the field of Old English literature, will be prescribed for special study. Candidates will be required to use primary sources in the original language.
Scandinavian languages and literatures from the medieval period are studied. There will be set texts in the original language. Candidates will be required to translate and comment on extracts from these set texts and to translate unseen passages, and also to write essays on selected topics in medieval Scandinavian literature.
Welsh language and literature from the beginnings to the end of the Middle Ages are studied. There will be set texts in Old and Middle Welsh. Candidates will be required to translate and comment on extracts from these set texts and to translate unseen passages from Middle Welsh. There will be a further group of set texts, in medieval Breton and Cornish. Candidates will be required to translate and comment on extracts from these set texts. They will also be required to write essays on selected topics in medieval Welsh, Breton, and Cornish language and literature.
Irish language and literature from the beginnings to the end of the Middle Ages are studied. There will be set texts in the original language. Candidates will be required to translate extracts from these set texts and to translate unseen passages, and also to write essays on selected topics in medieval Irish language and literature.
The work of an author or a group of authors, or a group of texts, or a literary topic or genre within the field of Insular Latin literature, will be prescribed for special study. Candidates will be required to use primary sources in the original language.
An introduction to the processes by which extant sources written in the languages studied for Papers 5–9 have been transmitted, and of the scholarly methods by which these sources are converted into a usable form. The various editorial and diplomatic approaches and techniques are studied. Candidates will be required to answer a compulsory practical question and to write essays on selected topics.
The history and grammar of the Germanic languages will be studied in relation to one another and to their Indo-European background. Candidates will be required to comment on passages and to write essays on selected topics.
The history and grammar of the Celtic languages will be studied in relation to one another and to their Indo-European background. Candidates will be required to comment on passages and to write essays on selected topics.
1. The Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos shall consist of three Parts, Part I, Part IIa, and Part IIb. In Part IIa and Part IIb there shall be an examination in each of the following three subjects: Archaeology (including Assyriology and Egyptology), Biological Anthropology, Social Anthropology. For Part I there shall be a single class-list; for Part IIa and Part IIb there shall be a separate class-list for each of the three subjects of the examination.
2. The Faculty Board of Archaeology and Anthropology shall nominate such number of Examiners to conduct the examination for Part I of the Tripos, and a Senior Examiner and such number of Examiners to conduct the examination in each subject for Part IIa and Part IIb, as they shall deem sufficient. The Faculty Board shall have power to nominate such number of Assessors as they shall deem sufficient to assist the Examiners for each Part. If required to do so, Assessors shall set papers in the subject or subjects assigned to them, shall mark the answers of the candidates in those papers, shall assess dissertations, and shall advise the Examiners on the performance of candidates in the examination. Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
3. The Faculty Board may from time to time make supplementary regulations defining all or any of the subjects and specified texts of examination and may modify, alter, or withdraw such supplementary regulations as they think fit, due care being taken that sufficient notice is given of any change.
4. Before the end of the Easter Term each year the Faculty Board shall give notice of the variable subjects for the examinations to be held in the academical year next following; provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination is adversely affected. The Board shall have power when they give notice of variable subjects to announce any consequential restriction on the combination of papers that a candidate may choose to offer.
5. The questions proposed by each Examiner and Assessor shall be submitted for approval to the whole body of Examiners for Part I or to the Examiners in the particular subject for Part IIa or Part IIb.
6. The answers to each question shall be read by at least two Examiners or Assessors.
7. Separate meetings shall be held of all the Examiners for Part I and of the three bodies of Examiners for Part IIa and Part IIb, at which the respective class-lists shall be drawn up. In each class- list the names of the candidates who deserve honours shall be placed in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order. For special excellence a mark of distinction may be awarded. The class-lists for Part IIa and Part IIb shall indicate whether a candidate has offered in the examination the Assyriology and/or Egyptology option.
8. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for any Part and also for another Honours Examination in the same term.
9. No student who has been a candidate for any Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
10. A candidate shall not offer in any Part of the Tripos a paper that he or she has previously offered in another University examination.
11. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part I:
12. The scheme of examination for Part I shall be as follows:
|
Paper 1. |
The development of human society (also serves as Papers E. 5 and N. 4 of the Oriental Studies Tripos and as Paper 4 of Part I of the Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos). |
|
Paper 2. |
Humans in biological perspective (also serves as Paper 5 of Part I of the Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos). |
|
Paper 3. |
Human societies: the comparative perspective (also serves as Papers E. 6 and N. 5 of the Oriental Studies Tripos and as Paper 6 of Part I of the Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos). |
|
Paper 4A. |
Being human: an interdisciplinary approach. |
|
Paper 4B. |
Modern societies (Paper 2 of Part I of the Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos). |
|
Paper 4C. |
The analysis of modern politics I (Paper 1 of Part I of the Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos). |
|
Paper 4D. |
Society, interaction, and the individual (Paper 3 of Part I of the Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos). |
|
Paper 5. |
Introduction to the cultures of Egypt and Mesopotamia. |
|
Paper 6. |
Akkadian I (also serves as Paper X.1 of Part Ia of the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos). |
|
Paper 7. |
Egyptian language I (also serves as Paper X.2 of Part Ia of the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos). |
A candidate for Part I shall offer one of the following:
13. A student who has obtained honours in Part I of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos or in another Honours Examination may be a candidate for honours in Part IIa in the year next after so obtaining honours.
14. (a) A student who has obtained honours in any Honours Examination other than Part I of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part IIb in the year next after so obtaining honours, provided that
(b) No student shall be a candidate for Part IIb in Archaeology unless the Head of the Department of Archaeology is satisfied that the student has, since matriculation, undertaken at least six weeks of archaeological excavation or fieldwork6 on a project or projects (or in the case of candidates for Assyriology or Egyptology on a study visit to Egypt or the Middle East and/or study in a museum) approved by the Head of the Department, provided that the Head of the Department shall have power to grant exemption from this requirement to a candidate who has obtained an equivalent amount of appropriate experience in some other way. Before the division of the Lent Term each year the Head of the Department shall draw up a list of those candidates who have satisfied this requirement or have been granted exemption from it, and shall communicate this information to the Registrary.
15. The scheme of examination for Part IIa and Part IIb shall be as follows:
|
A1. |
Archaeological thought I. |
|
A2. |
Archaeology in action I (also serves as Paper O12 of Part II of the Classical Tripos). |
|
A3. |
Archaeological thought II. |
|
A4. |
Archaeology in action II. |
|
A10. |
Archaeological practice. |
|
Special areas |
|
|
A5. |
The archaeology of early human development.7 |
|
A6. |
The archaeology of modern human origins and the Upper Palaeolithic of western Europe.7 |
|
A7. |
The Upper Paleolithic from the Alps to the Americas.7 |
|
A8. |
Later European prehistory. |
|
A9. |
Special topics in European prehistory. |
|
A13. |
Aegean prehistory (Paper D1 of Part II of the Classical Tripos). |
|
A14. |
A topic within classical archaeology and/or art (Paper D2 of Part II of the Classical Tripos). |
|
A15. |
A topic within classical archaeology and/or art (Paper D3 of Part II of the Classical Tripos). |
|
A16. |
A topic within classical archaeology and/or art (Paper D4 of Part II of the Classical Tripos). |
|
A17. |
The historical archaeology of Ancient Egypt I.7 |
|
A18. |
The historical archaeology of Ancient Egypt II.7 |
|
A19. |
Ancient Egyptian religion I.7 |
|
A20. |
Ancient Egyptian religion II.7 |
|
A21. |
Mesopotamian culture I: literature.7 |
|
A22. |
Mesopotamian culture II: religion and science.7 |
|
A23. |
Mesopotamian archaeology I: prehistory and early states.7 |
|
A24. |
Mesopotamian archaeology II: states to empires.7 |
|
A25. |
Europe in the first millennium ad I: Anglo-Saxon archaeology (also serves as Paper 14 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos). |
|
A26. |
Europe in the first millennium ad II: Scandinavian archaeology (also serves as Paper 15 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos). |
|
A27. |
Europe in the first millennium ad II: Migration period archaeology8 |
|
A28. |
The archaeology of medieval Britain. |
|
A29. |
Ancient India I: Prehistory of India.7 |
|
A30. |
Ancient India I: The Indus civilization and beyond.7 |
|
A31. |
Ancient India II: Early historic cities of India.7 |
|
A32. |
Ancient India II: Art and architecture of ancient India.7 |
|
A33. |
Ancient South America.7 |
|
A34. |
The archaeology of Mesoamerica and North America.7 |
|
A36. |
The late prehistoric and historical archaeology of sub-Saharan Africa. |
|
A37. |
Introduction to scientific approaches in archaeology. |
|
A38. |
Archaeological science. |
|
M1. |
Akkadian language II (also serves as Paper X.6 of Part Ib of the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos). |
|
M2. |
Akkadian language III. |
|
M3. |
Sumerian. |
|
M4. |
Mesopotamian history I: states and structures.7 |
|
M5. |
Mesopotamian history II: empires and systems.7 |
|
E1. |
Egyptian language II (also serves as Paper X.7 of Part Ib of the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos). |
|
E2. |
Egyptian language III. |
The Faculty Board shall announce before the end of the Easter Term the papers that will be available in the examinations to be held in the next academical year.
|
BA1. |
Foundations in biological anthropology: the human animal |
|
BA2. |
Foundations in biological anthropology: the human journey |
|
BA3. |
Foundations in biological anthropology: the human life span |
|
BA4. |
Theory and practice in anthropology |
|
BA5–16. |
Not more than twelve papers, each on a special subject in biological anthropology prescribed by the Faculty Board. In announcing the special subjects available the Faculty Board shall also announce the form of the examination which shall be either a written examination of two hours’ duration or the submission of an essay or other exercise in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 19 and which may also include practical work to be submitted in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 18. |
|
S1. |
Foundations of social anthropology I. |
|
S2. |
Foundations of social anthropology II.9 |
|
S3. |
Theory, methods, and enquiry in social anthropology. |
|
S4. |
Thought, belief, and ethics. |
|
S5. |
Political economy and social transformations. |
|
S6. |
Ethnographic areas. |
|
S7–11. |
Not more than five papers, each on a special subject in social anthropology prescribed by the Faculty Board. |
16. Subject to the provisions of Regulation 10, candidates for Part IIa shall offer papers and other exercises as follows:
Option 2 (Assyriology)
Option 3 (Egyptology)
Option 4 (Assyriology and Egyptology)
|
|
Historical Tripos, Part I |
|
|
|
Paper 21. |
Empires and world history from the fifteenth century to the First World War. |
|
|
Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos, Part II a |
|
|
|
Paper Pol. 3. |
The analysis of modern politics II. |
|
|
Paper Psy. 1. |
Social psychology. |
|
|
Paper Soc. 1. |
Social theory. |
|
|
Paper Soc. 2. |
Contemporary societies and global transformations. |
17. Subject to the provisions of Regulation 10, candidates for Part IIb shall offer papers and other exercises as follows:
provided that a candidate may not offer (i) Paper A22 unless he or she has previously taken either Paper A21 or Papers A23 or A24, and (ii) Paper A38 unless he or she has previously taken Paper A37.
Option 2 (Assyriology)
Option 3 (Egyptology)
Option 4 (Assyriology and Egyptology)
18. Candidates for Part IIa and Part IIb in Archaeology (and where appropriate in Biological Anthropology) shall present for the inspection of the Examiners, by a date which the Head of the relevant Department shall announce not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term, records of such practical work done during the courses leading to the examination as shall be determined from time to time by the Faculty Board. The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department with assessments of candidates’ practical work, and shall take these assessments into account in assigning marks for the examination.
19. The arrangements for the submission of essays or other exercises by candidates for Part IIa and Part IIb in Biological Anthropology who choose a paper from Papers BA5–16 for which the Faculty Board have announced that the examination shall be by one of these alternative means shall be as follows:
Essays shall not exceed 4,000 words in length, excluding footnotes, figures, tables, appendices, and bibliography. Candidates shall be required to state in the bibliography the sources that they have used and to declare that the essay represents their own work unaided except as may be specified in the declaration. Detailed instructions about other exercises shall be issued by the Head of the Department of Biological Anthropology together with the announcements of variable subjects by the Faculty Board. Each essay or other exercise shall be typewritten, unless a candidate has obtained previous permission from the Faculty Board to present it in manuscript; essays or other exercises shall be submitted to the Head of the Department so as to arrive not later than the third Monday of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held. A candidate who submits an essay or other exercise after that date may be penalized.
20. (a) A candidate for Part IIb who wishes to offer a dissertation under Regulation 17 shall submit an application, including the title of the proposed dissertation, a brief account of its scope, and a statement of the scheme of papers to be offered in the examination. A candidate who so wishes may request permission to include a film or filmed material, amounting to not more than twenty minutes in length, as a component part of the dissertation. Applications shall be submitted to the Head of the relevant Department so as to arrive not later than the last day of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examinaiton.
(b) Each candidate must obtain the approval of the Faculty Board for the proposed title not later than the division of the Lent Term. When the Faculty Board have approved a title, no change shall be made to it, or to the candidate's scheme of papers, without the further approval of the Faculty Board.
(c) A dissertation shall be of not more than 10,000 words in length, excluding footnotes, figures, tables, appendices, and bibliography. Each dissertation shall be typewritten, unless a candidate has obtained previous permission from the Faculty Board to present it in manuscript.
(d) A dissertation shall be submitted to the Senior Examiner in the relevant Department not later than the following dates:
A dissertation shall be accompanied by (i) a brief synopsis on a separate sheet of paper of the contents of the dissertation, and (ii) a certificate signed by the candidate that it is his or her own original work, and that it does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose.
21. At the discretion of the Examiners, a candidate for Part IIb may be examined viva voce.
This paper serves as an introduction to the collection, analysis, and interpretation of archaeological data, and focuses on major issues in the development of human societies. Examples are drawn from the entire span of the human career, from the initial evolution of hominid behaviour patterns to the emergence of historically documented states and empires. Issues are explored in terms of the principal archaeological methods and theories which contribute to our current understanding of past societies.
This paper provides an introduction to biological anthropology. The syllabus covers the genetic basis of life; evolutionary theory; primate biology, ecology, and behaviour; human evolution; human diversity, geographical patterns of variation and its genetic basis; human ecology, including disease, nutrition, energetics, and behaviour; problems in gene-environment interactions and behavioural genetics. Two special subjects will be prescribed from time to time by the Faculty Board.
This paper provides an introduction to the aims, scope, and methods of social anthropology. It covers the whole range of human societies, past and present, with a view to understanding them both individually in depth and within a broad comparative perspective. It approaches social life from a number of different angles, focusing on the ideas that people hold, their forms of organization, the way they interact, and the things they produce.
This paper combines approaches from archaeology, biological anthropology, and social anthropology to study the human condition. Questions addressed will concern: the origins and evolution of human society; symbols, communication, and culture; problems of human ecology and adaptation. Special topics may include sex and gender; sociality and social inequality; art and material culture; technology; language; health and illness; nutrition and development.
The origins and institutional features of modern societies. Social change and global interconnections in the modern world. Selected aspects of modern societies including work, stratification, and inequality; gender and sexual divisions; race and ethnicity; political organization and the modern state; culture and mass communication; deviance and social control.
This paper introduces the cultures of Egypt and Mesopotamia and is taught through lectures in each subject area and comparative seminars. The paper is in two parts: section A consists of five comparative questions; section B consists of ten subject specific questions, five related to Egypt and five to Mesopotamia. Students are required to answer one question from each section and a third question from either section.
This paper consists of passages for transliteration from cuneiform and translation from Akkadian taken from the texts read in class and specified from time to time in the Reporter, a passage for translation from English into transliterated Akkadian, and questions on grammar.
This paper covers the study of hieroglyphic texts in Middle Egyptian, the classic form of the language. Students will be expected to transliterate and translate into English passages from the specified texts, and comment where appropriate. They will also be given a passage from an unspecified text for transliteration and translation into English.
Why study archaeology, when did people start studying archaeology, and what role does archaeology play in contemporary society? Answers to such questions are discussed in the course for this paper, which reviews the history of archaeological thought. The main issues in archaeology, as they have been seen since the early nineteenth century, are covered, with emphasis placed on the rise of a scientific archaeology in the mid-twentieth century and reactions to it.
The course for this paper shows how the sciences and the humanities are integrated in the practice of archaeology over a broad range of topics concerned with the nature of past societies. The interdisciplinary character of archaeology is explored through consideration of a range of thematic issues, such as material culture; the study of landscapes and settlements; the establishment and study of temporal sequences, and archaeological field methods.
The course for this paper provides an opportunity to extend the depth and range of theoretical issues introduced in Paper A1. In terms of depth, there is fuller coverage of modes of explanation and interpretation in archaeology and discussion of how they are situated within wider debates in the sciences and the humanities. In terms of range, the scope of archaeological awareness is extended to global issues, drawing on a variety of themes in world archaeology.
This paper expands on the range of themes covered in Paper A2, exploring ways in which a wide range of scientific approaches and techniques can be integrated with humanistic and social science perspectives in studying and interpreting the nature of past societies. The interdisciplinary character of archaeology is explored through consideration of a range of thematic issues, such as human impact on the environment; the study of households and communities; the archaeology of death and the body; the archaeology of ‘art’; categorization and style; symbols and power; production and exchange, and contemporary notions of heritage.
The course for this paper provides an introduction to the practical methods and approaches used by archaeologists to create and analyse archaeological data. It covers the ways in which archaeological theories are applied in practice, through data recovery, analysis, and interpretation. Much of the instruction is provided through hands-on practicals, field trips, and fieldwork.
These papers are paired. Courses are taught over a two-year cycle and are examined in alternate years, so that in any particular year one paper of each pair will be set, corresponding to the subject that has been taught in that year.
This course surveys the development of human societies from their primate origins 2–3 million years ago to the emergence of food production in the early postglacial period. The scope of the course is world-wide; it puts special emphasis on the processes of population dispersal (of both the earliest hominids and biologically modern humans) and the processes of technological and social adaptation to the changing environmental conditions of the Pleistocene period. Special emphasis is placed on the patterns of human social and cognitive development, and on the inevitably close inter-relationships between the parallel processes of biological and cultural evolution throughout the course of human development. One of Papers A5 and A6 is taught in alternate years. Paper A7 is also taught in alternate years.
This course presents a broad general introduction to later European prehistory from the beginning of the Holocene through the earliest historical societies. Coverage includes the Mesolithic, the Neolithic, the Copper and Bronze Ages, and the Iron Age.
This course presents advanced discussion of special topics in European prehistory. Each year’s topics are drawn from a rotating list of regional, thematic, and/or theoretical subjects relevant to Later European Prehistory (Mesolithic through Iron Age). It is normally expected that students will have taken or be taking Paper A8 (Later European prehistory) currently.
Within Classical archaeology, four different papers are available. Paper A13 (Aegean prehistory) deals with the origins of settled village farming communities, through the emergence of complex societies in the Early Bronze Age and the palatial systems of Minoan Crete and the Mycenean mainland. Until further notice, the subject prescribed for Paper A14 will be ‘Mediterranean landscapes (Italy, 800 bc – ad 500)’ covering regional studies from Greece and Italy using approaches from landscape archaeology, including spatial archaeology, visibility, landscapes of power, sacred landscapes, modes of representation, and commemoration through landscape. Until further notice the subject prescribed for Paper A15 will be ‘The classical body: the archaeology and legacy of an ideal’. The paper investigates the intellectual, stylistic, and social origins of bodily beauty as framed and represented in Classical (Greco-Roman) art. Paper A16 (The archaeology of Roman urbanism) investigates Roman urbanism through the analysis of archaeological and written evidence, considering how the study of urban sites reveals the workings of the Roman empire.
The course reviews the historical archaeology of ancient Egypt from its origins to the Roman conquest and integrates archaeological, textual, and artistic evidence. Emphasis is placed on examining the nature of society, urbanism, kingship and political power, ideology, and interactions between Egypt and its neighbours. The course is taught over a two-year cycle: A17 covers the unification of Egypt to the end of the Second Intermediate Period (c. 3000–1550 bc); A18 covers the New Kingdom and up to the Roman conquest (c. 1550–30 bc).
This course examines archaeological, textual, and artistic evidence for ancient Egyptian religious practices and beliefs. The course is taught over a two-year cycle: A19 covers the period from the unification of Egypt to the end of the Second Intermediate Period (c. 3000–1550 bc); A20 covers the New Kingdom and up to the Roman conquest (c. 1550–30 bc).
This paper will cover both Sumerian and Akkadian literary texts in translation, and thus be open to candidates not studying either language. It will cover myths and epics, including Gilgamesh and the Epic of Creation, as well as political and ‘Wisdom’ literature.
This paper will deal with literacy and numeracy in ancient Mesopotamia; science and scholarship, including divination; religious beliefs as expressed in both the textual and the archaeological sources. Knowledge of the languages will not be required.
This course covers the archaeology of modern Iraq and Syria. Subjects addressed include the development of agriculture and urbanism, the relationship of the environment to the rise of complex society, the interplay of textual and archaeological data, propaganda and the presentation of kingship and power, symbolism in art and architecture, and the archaeological evidence for religious ritual. The course covers the archaeology of Mesopotamia in two periods (6000–2000 bc and 2000–539 bc), is taught over a two-year cycle and examined in Papers A23 and A24 in alternate years.
This course surveys the period which saw the rise, development, and fall of the Roman Empire, and the emergence of the early medieval states which were the foundation of modern Europe; it relates mainly to the northern and western parts of Europe (including Scandinavia), and where relevant it extends also into North Africa. The course includes two papers which are both normally taught every year.
This course covers the archaeology of post-conquest Britain, approximately ad 1050 to 1500. This was the period when the ‘historic’ landscape of Britain took on its pre-industrial form, and the history of landscape and villages, castles, towns, and the church is still visible in the material remains of this period. Since East Anglia is particularly rich in such evidence, lectures are complemented by field trips or museum sessions for almost every topic.
This course surveys the archaeology and art of ancient India extending from the prehistoric periods up to the fifth century ad. In one year the main emphasis is on the earlier prehistoric periods (up to the emergence of agriculture), together with a survey of the principal excavated historical sites (c. 600 bc to c. ad 400). In the other year the emphasis is placed on the later prehistoric and proto-historic periods, and on the major features of Indian art, architecture, inscriptions, and coins. The course also surveys the geographical and environmental features of ancient India, and the history of archaeological research in the subcontinent. Four modules are taught over a two-year cycle, two being available each year: Prehistory of India; The Indus civilization and beyond; Early historic cities of India; Art and architecture of ancient India.
The course covers major developments in the region, from the peopling of the New World and the origins of agriculture to the rise of complex societies that culminated in the late pre-Hispanic empires (Inka and Aztec). Emphasis is placed on theoretical approaches to understanding the long-term development of social inequality and the rise of complex societies, and attention is given to the interactions of human populations with their environments. Two modules (Ancient South America, and Archaeology of Mesoamerica and North America) are taught over a two-year cycle and are examined in alternate years.
The course provides a broad overview of the prehistory of the African continent from the earliest times, together with the historical archaeology of sub-Saharan Africa. Emphasis is placed upon the study of Post-Pleistocene times and upon the relationship between archaeology and other sources of information about the African past. The subject is viewed from an essentially African perspective, although due attention is paid to external connections. Students are encouraged to view African prehistory as an essential and central part of human development.
The courses for these papers allow students to explore a range of scientific approaches in archaeology in depth. Consideration is given to the geo-archaeological context of our evidence, and the dynamics of preservation and transformation of archaeological materials. From this foundation students can select from a range of bio-archaeological and environmental options, e.g. in archaeobotany or zoo-archaeology, backed up by laboratory practicals. These papers can be taken with, and are designed to complement, any of the papers on special areas, for those candidates who wish to put a greater emphasis on scientific method in the course as a whole.
This paper is for candidates in their second year of study of Akkadian, and will test candidates’ knowledge of the Old Babylonian and Standard Babylonian dialects of Akkadian as used in literary and historical texts. They will be required to transliterate from cuneiform and translate passages from both seen and unseen texts. Comment may be required on points of grammar and/or content.
This paper is for candidates in their third year of study of Akkadian. It will include transliteration and translation from unseen texts and from a range of Akkadian texts studied during the year including letters and legal documents, some in Assyrian dialect. Comment may be required on points of grammar and/or content.
This paper is only offered to candidates taking Paper M2 in Part IIb. It will consist of passages from Sumerian texts studied during the year for transliteration and translation, together with questions on Sumerian grammar.
These papers are taught through the same lecture course as Mesopotamian archaeology (Papers M4/5 are the same as Papers A23/24), in the same two-year cycle. In year I the course covers the early history of Sumer and Akkad, through the Old Babylonian period in Mesopotamia and Syria. In year II it covers the ‘Amarna Period’ or later 2nd millennium bc, and the Assyrian and Babylonian empires down to the fall of Babylon to Cyrus in 539 bc. A balance is maintained between the narrative of political events and social and economic history.
This paper contains passages from specified and unspecified texts for transliteration and translation into English. The passages are taken from Middle Egyptian texts.
This paper contains passages from specified and unspecified texts for transliteration and translation into English. The passages are taken from Old and Middle and Late Egyptian texts.
This paper examines the human species in a broad comparative perspective, with two themes. The first is the extent to which humans share their biology and behaviour with other animals, especially primates. The second perspective is concerned with comparisons between humans and the rest of the biological world in terms of similarities, differences, and uniqueness. Material will be drawn from genetics, morphology, and behaviour.
This paper will look at the evolution of the human species, from its origins among the great apes, to the evolution of modern humans, and the diversity that has taken place in the course of the last 10,000 years, leading to the processes of modernization. Material will be drawn from the fossil record, archaeology, genetics, and human population biology and ecology.
This paper looks at human biology and behaviour from the perspective of development and ontogeny. From conception to death, humans undergo a process of development that is shaped by both genes and environment. The patterns of such development can be framed in terms of life history theory, the role of nutrition, and the interactions between demography and threats to life such as disease, and the way in which reproduction is integrated into the lifespan.
This paper explores current developments in the discipline, and how advances in theory and method in anthropology and related disciplines are having an impact on anthropology and the understanding of the human species and its diversity. Emphasis is on the understanding of analytical methods and assessment of hypotheses to tackle problems in biological anthropology.
The aim of these papers is to examine in detail particular subjects in biological anthropology and related disciplines. Topics for special subjects will be announced by the Faculty Board, and details of the syllabus will be provided in the course handbook.
Kinship and economics have been linked in the major theories of production, reproduction, and exchange. The course for this paper considers the conditions under which kinship becomes an organizing template for economic relations, and its bearing on group dynamics and gender relations. New patterns of marriage, conjugality, sexuality, and procreation throw into relief the continuing relevance of classic kinship theory. Under the rubric of economics, the course treats the nature and interaction of different systems of production, distribution, and exchange, and historical processes of economic transformation; it reviews different ways of conceptualizing the economy, the works of major theorists, and key contemporary debates in economic anthropology.
The course for this paper brings together politics and religion. Under politics, it deals with theories of the state; inequality; war and violence; law and dispute-settlement; political action, strategy, and tactics; ‘fourth-world’ political action and resistance; social movements; the role of ideology and theories of governance. Under religion, the course deals with the major anthropological theories of religion and their relation to systems of knowledge and ideology. Specific fields covered include ritual and sacrifice; spirit possession and shamanism; forms of traditional knowledge and classification; world religions; the transformation of religion in the contemporary world. Emphasis will be given to the many links between politics and religion.
This course provides a grounding in sociological theories and discusses their relation to more recent anthropological theory and methods. Topics to be discussed include: eighteenth and nineteenth century social theory; Marx, Durkheim, Simmel, Weber, Mauss; functionalism, structural-functionalism; structuralism; cultural materialism and neo-Marxism; interpretative anthropology, semiology, and symbolic anthropology. These theories are seen in the context of anthropological field research and the various types of anthropological writing.
The courses for this paper will normally cover anthropological perspectives on mind, thought, and belief. Particular concerns may be expected to include the anthropology of cognition, knowledge, and belief systems, and the anthropological study of ethics and moral economy.
The courses for this paper will normally cover anthropological perspectives on political economy and processes of social transformation. Particular concerns may be expected to include anthropological contributions to the study of value, property, and domination, and the growth and legacy of modern social forms including capitalism and socialism.
Candidates will be required to offer one ethnographic area from a choice of three, which will be specified by the Faculty Board each year and will be taken from the following list: Europe, Latin America, Inner Asia, South Asia, Southeast Asia, the Pacific, Southern Africa.
Up to five papers will be available each year. These are currently drawn from the following list:
This course is concerned with illness and healing in comparative perspective. It discusses ideas of health and illness, causation and healing, how they are constructed and how they change. A wide range of societies provides the examples of different approaches, from urban and industrialized contexts to relatively isolated, self-sufficient settings. Alternative systems of medicine and local regional systems, as well as the impact of western biomedicine on local regional systems, are considered in relation to medical pluralism and contexts of practice. Attention is also given to the cultural understanding of the body in illness, and to the management of childbirth and reproduction in different societies. Teaching for the course is by lecture and seminar.
While a primary objective of this paper is to examine the processes of city transformation in recent times, attention is also paid to pre-twentieth century and non-European cities. Processes of urbanization bring out the political, economic, and cultural complexities of city social organization. Images of the city are approached through examining utopian thought and experimentation, social engineering, urban planning, and forms of architecture. The city as a symbolic form and as a centre of power is addressed through studies of urban rituals, processions, commemorations, buildings, and through consideration of the relationships between space, the body, and gender. The paper also includes an examination of the ways in which the city has been theorized, and the problems of reconciling the distinctive method of fieldwork-based anthropology when applied to the large-scale organizational complexity of urban life.
This paper is concerned with three distinct but interlinked aspects of human experience where questions of power, representation, and corporeality intersect. Questions of gender, body, and sexuality have been at the centre of much critical work in the social sciences and humanities over the past twenty years, and this paper aims to introduce students to some of the most important lines of argument and debate, focusing particularly upon the perspectives brought by anthropology to these questions, as well as exploring a series of substantive issues. Themes to be addressed include: biological and cultural approaches to gender, body, and sexuality; gender orders and power relations; the construction of masculinities and femininities; questions of gender, sexuality, and colonial, national, and state processes; sexual divisions and the allocation of resources; sexuality, embodiment, and performance; the politics of reproduction; feminism and anthropology.
The professionalization of anthropology as a social science resulted among other things in the definition of the discipline through a specific kind of empirical research (fieldwork) and a specific narrative form (ethnography). There are of course other professionals who address issues central to anthropological concerns: other social scientists, philosophers, historians, novelists, and poets – many of whom borrow from anthropological works and whose works are borrowed as well. This paper seeks to broaden the basis on which anthropological texts may be analysed as well as to broaden critical awareness of anthropological inquiry beyond textual form. Both the bases on which anthropological knowledge came to be defined and the grounds on which these bases may be re-evaluated critically are presented, including an examination of the professionalization of anthropology, and the intellectual traditions influential in this process; the theoretical question of ‘representation’, and how ‘others’ represent themselves to themselves. In collaboration with the Faculty of English, the paper addresses aspects of literary theory through the consideration of specific texts and literary techniques, poetics, the use of ‘multimedia’, and what one may learn from the parallel examinations of anthropological and non-anthropological texts.
This paper draws attention to the aesthetic and performative aspects of human communication. It provides an introduction to the main perspectives anthropologists have brought to an understanding of the visual and performing arts. While the paper provides a broad cross-cultural overview of distinctive artistic practices and productions, each year a section of the course focuses in some detail on a particular cultural area. Where appropriate the course will draw on the extensive collections of the Museum of Archaeology and Anthropology and the video library held within the Department of Social Anthropology. Topics for study are drawn from the following areas: theories of non-western art and aesthetics; social and technical aspects of artistic production and consumption; the use of different media in anthropological analysis; the poetics and politics of representation; museology; masking and body decoration; the anthropology of dance; aspects of ethnomusicology; and analyses of film and advertising.
This paper covers social, economic, and political aspects of ‘development’, with particular reference to the experience of the poorer countries since World War II and to the theories and practical involvement of anthropologists. Case studies of development projects of rural and urban areas are analysed, with particular attention being paid to indigenous knowledge, and the participation of local people in projects which transform their lives. Other themes include socialist development, the demise of ‘peasant economy’, and the emergence of new social movements in Third World cities. Anthropological approaches to the study of policy, planning, and development organizations are also considered and throughout the course students are encouraged to maintain a critical stance towards the very concept of ‘development’.
The paper aims to examine the societies of the former Soviet Union and Eastern and Central Europe as they are currently undergoing transformation. Virtually all of them have abandoned socialism for different political and economic paths. The aim of this paper is to understand (a) what actually existing socialism was, (b) the causes and consequences of its collapse, and (c) what heritage or residue of socialism remains in the post-socialist societies. We examine the processes of transformation, in political, economic, social, and cultural terms. The paper focuses particularly on ways in which we can analyse the experience of sudden change, the associated phenomena labelled as ‘development’ or ‘regression’, emerging social and familial forms, new attitudes to history and memory, and changes in ‘high’ and popular culture, ideology, and values.
The aim of this paper is to offer a critical introduction to the literature on nationalism, race, and ethnicity both in and outside anthropology, and to explore the ideas advanced in that literature in relation to material drawn from specific historical and cultural contexts. This includes the intellectual history of the concepts of, respectively, nation and race, to be examined through the main relevant theoretical literature. Historical, anthropological, and sociological approaches are covered. Specific case material, drawn from a range of geographical and historical contexts, will address issues such as the politics of identity in Britain; thinking about conflict in Northern Ireland; ‘tribalism’ and the culture of post-colonial states in sub-Saharan Africa; communal identities and violence in South Asia; religion and communal mobilization; Diaspora communities and transnationalism; gendering the nation. The examples vary from time to time.
Focusing on a wide range of regional case studies, this paper explores the emergence of colonial politics, cultures, and imperial systems of power as objects of anthropological analysis, and considers the ways in which both the making and unmaking of Western as well as non-Western imperial systems have had ramifications for the societies and cultures studied by anthropologists. A variety of theoretical and interpretive approaches will be discussed, but the main emphasis will be on ethnographic accounts, and on the anthropological implications of historical studies. A wide range of examples may be covered, including social, cultural, and political transformations arising from Western colonial conquest and rule in Asia, Africa, and the Americas, and aspects of empire as conceptualized and experienced under Chinese, Ottoman, and/or Russian/Soviet rule.
Legal frameworks have re-emerged, in the contemporary period, as ways to justify social and political action. The language of ‘the law’ pervades a multiplicity of arenas, both local and global, implicating experience, personhood, and subjectivity. The aim of this paper is to show the way the law is used as a vehicle to structure relations, whether between states, between colonized and colonizer, or between special interest groups (as in the case of new technologies). Legal systems acquire a social and cultural character of their own, appearing to be departments of modern life and thus potential ethnographic objects. If such systems represent themselves as normative and rational, from an anthropological view they are contextualized by other phenomena. The course explores what it means to study legal systems, and in doing so opens up questions about organizing concepts (such as ‘rights’) of major contemporary importance.
The aim of this paper is to offer a critical exploration of recent developments and debates in the anthropology of science in a wide range of social and regional settings, as well as across diverse traditions of thought. The course explores what it means to study societal, institutional, and epistemic conditions of science and scientific knowledge production through a comparative frame. From an anthropological view the critical study of ‘cross-cultural science’ as ethnographic object puts into political relief the way that encounters between ‘parallel worlds’, ‘purity’, ‘hybridity’, ‘reliability’, ‘evidence’, ‘verification’, and so on are justified as particular social forms and moral action claims.
1. The Architecture Tripos shall consist of three Parts: Part Ia, Part Ib, and Part II. A separate class-list shall be published for each Part.
2. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part Ia:
3. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part Ib:
4. A student who has obtained honours in Part Ib of the Architecture Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part II in the year after or next but one after so obtaining honours, provided that
5. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for any Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term; and no student who has been a candidate for honours in any Part shall again be a candidate for honours in the same Part.
6. Subject to the provisions of Regulation 5, a student who is not eligible to be a candidate for honours shall be entitled to take the examination for any Part of the Architecture Tripos as a candidate not for honours for the purpose of qualifying for exemption from professional examinations, provided that he or she has obtained honours in another Honours Examination and, if a candidate for Part Ib or Part II, has satisfied the requirements of these regulations in so far as they relate to studio-work.
7. To conduct the examination in each Part the Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners as they shall deem sufficient. The Board shall have power to nominate Assessors to the Examiners for any of the papers. The Assessors shall be responsible for setting the questions in the subject or subjects assigned to them and for advising the Examiners on the candidates’ performance in those questions.
8. In each Part the names of the candidates who obtain honours shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. A mark of distinction may be affixed to the names of those candidates placed in the first class whose work either in a part or in the whole of the examination is of special merit. In the class-lists for Part Ia and Part Ib, a mark s shall be attached to the names of those candidates who have satisfied the Examiners in studio-work.
9. The names of candidates who, having presented themselves under the provisions of Regulation 6, attain the honours standard shall be published in a list headed ‘The following who are not candidates for honours have attained the honours standard’.
10. The Faculty Board shall have power to make supplementary regulations defining all or any of the subjects set out in the following regulations as they think fit.
11. Public notice of subjects, special periods, and books prescribed under the following regulations or under any supplementary regulations shall be given by the Faculty Board (a) for Part Ia and for Part Ib of the Tripos, not later than the Easter Term next preceding the examination to which they apply, and (b) for Part II of the Tripos, not later than the Easter Term next but one preceding the examination to which they apply; provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination is adversely affected.
12. The examination for Part Ia of the Architecture Tripos shall consist of three sections:
Section A. Five papers as follows:
|
Paper 1. |
An introduction to architectural history. |
|
Paper 2. |
An introduction to architectural theory. |
|
Paper 3. |
Fundamental principles of construction. |
|
Paper 4. |
Fundamental principles of structural design. |
|
Paper 5. |
Fundamental principles of environmental design. |
Section B. Studio-work.
Section C. Course-work.
13. A candidate for Part Ia shall be required:
The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department with assessments of all the course-work carried out by candidates of which records have been presented under (c).
14. The examination for Part Ib of the Architecture Tripos shall consist of three sections:
|
Section A. |
(i) |
Two introductory papers (Papers 1 and 2) on historical and theoretical topics concerning architecture and its setting, for one of which the candidate must offer a portfolio of three essays. |
|
(ii) |
Three introductory papers (Papers 3–5) on technical topics concerning the theory and practice of construction and of structural and environmental design. |
|
|
Section B. |
Studio-work. |
|
|
Section C. |
Course-work. |
|
15. A candidate for Part Ib shall be required:
All the essays must be on subjects falling within the scope of that paper and must conform to the rubric of that paper. Detailed instructions will be issued by the Department, by the division of the Michaelmas Term preceding the examination, regarding the coverage of prescribed texts and topics and any other requirements for the portfolio as a whole. Candidates will be required to declare that the essays are their own work. The essays shall consist of work done for supervisions and shall be in English and submitted with supervisors’ comments but without revision of any kind by the candidate. They shall be submitted by the candidate to the Secretary of the Faculty Board, in accordance with detailed arrangements approved by the Board, so as to arrive not later than the first Friday of the Full Easter Term in which the examination takes place. Candidates may be called for viva voce examination in connection with their portfolios.
The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department with assessments of all the course-work carried out by candidates of which records have been presented under (c).
16. The examination for Part II of the Architecture Tripos shall consist of four sections:
|
Section A. |
(i) |
One paper on the theoretical and historical aspects of architecture and urbanism (Paper 1). |
|
|
(ii) |
Three papers (Papers 2–4) on the technical aspects of the theory and practice of construction and of structural and environmental design. |
|
Section B. |
Studio-work. |
|
|
Section C. |
Course-work. |
|
|
Section D. |
A thesis, or an alternative exercise approved by the Faculty Board, on a subject approved by the Faculty Board. |
|
17. A candidate for Part II shall be required:
The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department with assessments of all the course-work carried out by candidates of which records have been presented under (c).
18. (a) Not later than 1 June each year the Faculty Board shall publish by Notice in the Department of Architecture a list of subject areas for the thesis or other exercise required for Section D in the examination to be held in the following academical year. In publishing the list the Faculty Board shall specify what types of exercise (if any) are permitted as alternatives to a thesis.
(b) Each candidate shall submit the proposed subject of his or her thesis or other exercise to the Secretary of the Faculty Board not later than the end of the third quarter of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination. A candidate may propose either (i) a subject that falls within one of the subject areas in the list published by the Faculty Board under sub-paragraph (a) above, or (ii) a subject of the candidate's own choice.
(c) Each candidate shall obtain the approval of the proposed subject by the Faculty Board not later than the last day of the Michaelmas Term.
(d) The Secretary of the Faculty Board shall notify the Examiners of candidates’ subjects; the Examiners shall have power to impose restrictions on the questions that a candidate may offer in Paper 1, and shall inform candidates of any such restrictions not later than the end of the first quarter of the Easter Term.
19. A thesis presented under Regulation 17(d) shall be of not less than 7,000 words and not more than 9,000 words in length, including notes, appendices, and bibliography; an alternative exercise shall be of comparable substance. Each thesis shall be printed or typewritten, and shall be submitted through the candidate's Tutor to the Head of the Department of Architecture so as to arrive not later than the first day of Full Easter Term. Each candidate will be required to sign a declaration that the thesis is his or her own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration, and that it does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose.
20. In each Part the Examiners may impose such oral and practical tests as they think fit, and in drawing up the class-list they shall take into account the candidates’ performance in all such tests, and in the studio-work and course-work, as well as in the written papers and theses or alternative exercises, together with the assessment of course-work presented by the Head of the Department. A candidate for Part II may be examined viva voce, at the discretion of the Examiners, on the subject of his or her thesis or alternative exercise.
The paper deals with a selective introduction to the history of architecture and the city in Western Europe from classical antiquity to the start of the twentieth century.
The paper deals with an introduction to theoretical writings on architecture and the role of the architect from the middle of the nineteenth century to the present related to the architectural practices of the time.
The paper may include questions on the development of construction methods, the elementary principles of construction of small buildings, and the basic properties of construction materials.
The paper may include questions on the elementary principles of structural design of buildings, on simple statics, stress analysis, and strength of structural materials.
The paper may include questions on the elementary principles of environmental control in buildings and servicing of buildings.
Periods from the architectural history of Europe and North America will be specified from time to time by the Faculty Board of Architecture and History of Art. The paper may include questions on individual architects and their works, particular building types, gardens and landscape, town planning and urban development.
This paper may include questions on
This paper may include questions on the principles governing the use of constructional elements in complex building types, properties of materials, dimensional co-ordination, analysis of simple methods of enveloping space.
This paper may include questions on the structural aspects of architectural design, the behaviour of structural elements under load, the use of load-bearing brickwork, steel, and reinforced concrete, systems of roof spanning and their calculation, the mathematical and graphical determination of simple structural systems.
This paper may include questions on the principles of environmental control and functional design, the practical applications of the principles of thermal response, of acoustics, and of lighting in buildings, micro-climate, planning and designing for user needs.
The paper will be divided into a number of sections corresponding to the topics or periods in the theory and history of architecture and urbanism announced by the Faculty Board under the provisions of Regulation 18(a). Under the provisions of Regulation 18(b) the Faculty Board shall have power to debar a candidate from attempting a specified section or sections.
1. The Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos shall consist of three Parts: Part Ia, Part Ib, and Part II.
2. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part Ia:
3. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part Ib:18
4. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part II:18
5. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for any Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
6. No student who has been a candidate for any Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part. No candidate shall offer a paper he or she has previously offered in any other Honours Examination.
7. The Faculty Board shall have the power to issue from time to time supplementary regulations defining or limiting all or any of the subjects of the examination, and to modify, alter or withdraw such supplementary regulations, provided that due care is taken to give sufficient notice of any change.
8. The Faculty Board shall have the power to prescribe, not later than the end of the Easter Term in the year next but one before the examination to which they apply, a number of additional papers to be offered to candidates in each subject of both Part Ib and Part II of the examination, providing that (i) the Faculty Board are not required to offer additional papers in Part Ib and (ii) at least two papers shall be prescribed in each subject in Part II. When giving notice of the additional papers, the Faculty Board shall prescribe the mode of examination for each paper and any restrictions on the combination of papers that any candidate may offer. The Faculty Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for so doing and if they are satisfied that no student’s preparation for the examination is adversely affected.
9. There shall be a separate body of Examiners for each Part. The Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners for each Part as they may deem sufficient. For each body of Examiners, the Faculty Board shall also have power to nominate one or more Assessors to assist the Examiners.
10. The Examiners shall set, and shall be responsible for marking, all written papers except papers from another Tripos, and shall also mark dissertations submitted under Regulations 22 and 23. If required to do so, Assessors shall propose questions in the subject or subjects assigned to them, shall review the answers of candidates to those questions, and shall report as required to the Examiners. An Assessor may be summoned, for the purpose of consultation and advice, to meetings of the relevant body of Examiners, but shall not be entitled to vote.
11. The subject matter for each oral examination shall be approved by the body of Examiners for the corresponding Part. Two Examiners or Assessors shall conduct the oral examination of each candidate.
12. The Examiners shall have regard to the style and method of candidates’ answers and shall give credit for excellence in these respects. They shall give due credit for the performance of candidates in the oral examinations. The Examiners shall be empowered to examine any candidate viva voce.
13. The names of those candidates who deserve honours in each Part shall be placed in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. Each class-list shall also indicate the subject or subjects which each candidate has offered in the examination. A mark of distinction may be awarded for special excellence.
14. The subjects of examination in Part Ia shall be as follows:
East Asian Studies
Middle Eastern Studies
Middle Eastern Studies with a Modern Language
Each candidate shall offer one subject.
15. The papers for the examination in Part Ia shall be as follows:
|
EAS.1 |
Introduction to East Asian history |
|
C.1 C.2 C.3 |
Modern Chinese translation and writing 1 Modern Chinese texts 1 Literary Chinese 1 |
|
J.1 J.2 J.3 |
Modern Japanese 1 Japanese grammar and translation Modern Japanese texts 1 |
|
MES.1 MES.2 MES.3 MES.4 MES.5 MES.6 MES.7 |
Arabic language A Arabic language B (one and a half hour written examination) Persian language Hebrew language A Hebrew language B Introduction to the history and culture of the Middle East Introduction to the contemporary Middle East |
|
X.1 |
Akkadian I (Paper 6 of Part I of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos) |
|
X.2 |
Egyptian language I (Paper 7 of Part I of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos) |
Unless otherwise specified, all papers consist of a three-hour written examination.
16. There shall be separate examinations for each subject, as specified below:
17. The subjects of examination in Part Ib shall be as follows:
East Asian Studies
Middle Eastern Studies
Middle Eastern Studies with a Modern Language
Each candidate shall offer one subject.
18. The papers for the examination in Part Ib shall be as follows:
|
AMES.1 |
Cinema East |
|
C.4 C.5 C.6 C.7 C.8 |
Modern Chinese translation and writing 2 Modern Chinese texts 2 Literary Chinese 2 History of dynastic China Globalization in China, 1850 to the present (an essay of 8,000 words, to be submitted not later than the first day of Full Easter Term) |
|
J.4 J.5 J.6 J.7 J.8 J.9 J.10 |
Modern Japanese 2 Modern Japanese texts 2 Japanese history Literary Japanese Japanese literary modernity Japanese society Japanese politics (also serves as Paper Pol. 10 of the Social and Political Sciences Tripos) |
|
MES.11 MES.12 MES.13 MES.14 MES.15 MES.16 MES.17 MES.18 MES.19 MES.20 |
Intermediate Arabic Intermediate Persian Intermediate Hebrew Literary Arabic Literary Persian Hebrew literature The formation of Islam Topics in Hebrew studies The formation of the modern Middle East Contemporary Middle Eastern politics and society |
|
X.3 X.4
X.5 |
General linguistics (Paper Li. 1 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) Life, thought, and worship of modern Judaism (Paper B14 of the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos) Introduction to Islam (Paper B15 of the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos) |
|
X.6 |
Akkadian language II (Paper M1 of Parts IIa and IIb of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos)19 |
|
X.7 |
Egyptian language II (Paper E1 of Parts IIa and IIb of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos)20 |
Unless otherwise specified, all papers consist of a three-hour written examination.
19. There shall be separate examinations for each subject, as specified below:
20. The subjects of examination in Part II shall be as follows:
Chinese
Chinese with Japanese
Japanese
Japanese with Chinese
Middle Eastern Studies
Middle Eastern Studies with a Modern Language
Each candidate shall offer one subject.
21. The papers for the examination in Part II shall be as follows:
|
C.11 |
Modern Chinese translation and writing 3 |
|
C.12 |
Modern Chinese texts 3 |
|
C.13 |
Literary Chinese 3 |
|
J.11 |
Modern Japanese 3 |
|
J.12 |
Modern Japanese texts 3 |
|
MES.31 |
Advanced Arabic |
|
MES.32 |
Advanced Persian |
|
MES.33 |
Advanced Hebrew |
|
MES.34 |
Themes in Arabic literature |
|
MES.35 |
Themes in Persian literature |
|
MES.36 |
Themes in Hebrew literature |
Unless otherwise specified, all papers consist of a three-hour written examination.
22. There shall be separate examinations for each subject, as specified below:
23. Any candidate submitting a dissertation under Regulation 22 shall be required to have spent a period of at least eight months, since matriculation, in a country or countries deemed appropriate by the Faculty Board and under conditions approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board,22 providing that the Faculty Board may waive this requirement under exceptional circumstances.
A candidate who is required to submit a dissertation under Regulation 22 shall submit the proposed title, together with a statement of the papers to be offered in the examination, to the Secretary of the Faculty Board so as to arrive not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination. Each candidate must obtain the approval of the proposed title by the Faculty Board not later than the end of that term. A dissertation, which shall be of not more than 12,000 words in length (inclusive of notes and appendices), should show evidence of reading, judgement, and power of exposition, but not necessarily evidence of original research, and must give full references to the sources used. One electronic and two paper copies of each dissertation, marked with the candidate’s examination number, shall be submitted in a format specified by the Faculty Board from time to time to the Secretary of the Faculty Board so as to arrive not later than the third day of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held.
Each candidate will be required to sign a declaration that the dissertation is his or her own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration, and that it does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose. Each copy of the dissertation shall be accompanied by a summary of not more than 300 words in English, except that a candidate offering a dissertation under Regulation 22(a) (Chinese) shall furnish instead a summary in Chinese of not less than 600 characters. The maximum marks allocated to the dissertation shall be one quarter of the maximum marks for the examination as a whole.
24. The Faculty Board shall have power to grant permission to a candidate for any Part of the Tripos to offer in the examination a subject or language other than those specified in Regulations 14, 17, and 20, provided that the Board are satisfied:
Applications for such permission shall be made through the candidate’s Tutor to the Secretary of the Faculty Board at the earliest possible date and in no circumstances later than the following dates:
the division of the Easter Term in the year next preceding the examination, for a candidate taking Part Ia or Part Ib;
the division of the Easter Term in the year next but one preceding the examination, for a candidate taking Part II.
For subjects offered under this regulation the Faculty Board shall have power to determine the papers to be set, in general conformity with the provisions of Regulations 16, 19, and 22.
25. Not later than the division of Full Michaelmas Term each year the Secretary of the Faculty Board shall inform the Registrary of any subjects for which permission has been granted under Regulation 24, together with the names of the candidates to whom such permission has been granted.
26. The examinations for the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos shall be offered for the first time
for Part Ia in 2009,
for Part Ib in 2010,
for Part II in 2012.
The course covers the history of East Asia thematically from the earliest times to the present, focusing on China, Japan, and Korea. Students will read literature, historical monographs, and primary sources to familiarize themselves with various types of historical evidence.
An introduction to the basic elements of Chinese grammar. Students learn to use Chinese over a range of everyday situations, write basic Chinese and translate English into Chinese at simple sentence level.
An introduction to the translation of text passages from modern Chinese, in both simplified and complex characters, into English.
An introduction to the literary Chinese language. The course introduces students to basic vocabulary, syntax, and grammar of the classical period. Excursions are made into the etymology of graphs, the origins of common proverbs and set phrases as well as the intellectual world behind the selected text passages.
The course aims to teach students modern Japanese with primary emphasis on reading and writing. The textbook used for this purpose is Bowring and Laurie, Introduction to Modern Japanese. In the Michaelmas and Lent Terms students undergo an intensive study of the grammar of modern Japanese. In the Easter Term the course focuses on the development of students’ listening and speaking skills.
This paper is taught in conjunction with J.1 in the Michaelmas and Lent Terms and separately in the Easter Term. It also draws upon skills learned in tackling the texts in J.3, both in terms of ability to construe Japanese texts and in terms of understanding of grammatical patterns.
The reading of one or two short stories in order to put into practice the skills and knowledge learned in the Michaelmas and Lent Terms.
These two papers are taught as a single course. The textbook is Al-Kitaab fii Ta’allum al-’Arabiyya Part I. The aim is to equip students to read, write, and hold conversations in simple Arabic. All the basic grammar is covered.
This paper introduces students to Persian grammar and the written and oral use of the language (listening and comprehension practice in the language laboratory). Reading classes expose students to the language in action and to a variety of usages of the grammatical rules.
Students are introduced to the language of the Hebrew Bible.
Students acquire competence in spoken and written Modern Hebrew.
This paper provides an introduction to the history of the Middle East and the political, religious, cultural, and linguistic developments of the different regions and periods. It aims to familiarize the student with the sources of information available and with the main themes that will arise in studying Middle Eastern societies in subsequent years of the Tripos. The course consists of lectures and student presentations.
This paper provides an introductory survey of the political, religious, and social organization of contemporary Middle Eastern societies.
This course introduces students to the diverse film traditions of East Asia, the Middle East, and South Asia, each of which has played a major part in the cultural experience of domestic audiences over the past century. Cinema is at the same time the most transnational of cultural products, and understanding the flow of film genres, stars, and consumption in these respective regions provides an important key to understanding intra-regional cultural dynamics, and their historical and social referents.
This course aims to develop the students’ ability to translate English texts into Chinese and to write Chinese compositions of various styles, such as letters, messages, notices, narration.
This course enables students to read modern Chinese writings, both literary and non-literary. Information about authors, the background, and the linguistic and stylistic features of the texts is provided as appropriate. The purpose is to give students experience of intensive and extensive reading. Students read unabridged texts from beginning to end, thus increasing their vocabulary and familiarity with modern written Chinese and advancing their understanding of aspects of Chinese historical and cultural experience in 20th-century and contemporary China.
An introduction to selected works of poetry, prose, and fiction in literary Chinese. The course draws on texts ranging from early medieval to late imperial times. Students are introduced to the basic features of grammar and genre and the intellectual and historical background of the readings in question.
The history of dynastic China from the Qin through Qing periods. The course, consisting of lectures and essay seminars, introduces students to the formative political, social, economic, religious, and cultural features that defined the Chinese empire.
The history of globalization in China from the Taiping Rebellion in the mid nineteenth century until today. For the century after 1850, it will examine the rise of the large vibrant port cities that resulted from the rapid expansion of foreign trade and became centres of social, political, and cultural change. It will also analyse Chinese migration, the emergence of Chinese forms of modernity, the rise of resistance movements to Western financial imperialism, and the effects of revolution and warfare. China’s current phase of globalization will be placed against the background of this earlier phase of globalization.
The main aims of this course are that students: (a) acquire the ability to understand intermediate written and spoken Japanese; (b) acquire the ability to express themselves in Japanese in a limited range of topics; (c) increase competence in written skills.
Reading selected twentieth-century Japanese texts, with attention to style and content, the aim being to gain proficiency in reading, pronouncing, translating, and interpreting modern prose of various types.
Topics in the history of Japan from the Heian period to the present day; normally with a focus on the 19th and 20th centuries. Students will become familiar with traditional Japanese culture and political history, but also chart and understand how Japan has changed over the last several centuries to become the economic powerhouse in Asia that it is today. In order to analyse Japan’s current relations with its Asian counterparts, we also examine Japan’s shifting self-image and foreign relations over the centuries, with particular focus on China.
An introduction to the grammar of classical Japanese, followed by readings of simple prose and poetry. Some essay work on aspects of classical literature is also required.
An introduction to modern and contemporary Japanese fiction. The course covers a number of topics, including the aesthetics and politics of literary modernity, colonial writing, the development of women’s fiction, or Japanese postmodernity, while studying in some detail works of representative writers from the late Meiji era to recent decades.
An introduction to Japanese society, its current phenomena and their historical and cultural background. Starting from our own images and influential descriptions of Japanese society, this course will investigate family, demography, education, work, and leisure, as well as life stages and different aspects of daily (and nightly) life of the various social groups.
An introduction to post-1945 Japanese politics examining Japan’s political parties and institutions from a comparative perspective. In considering the distinctiveness of the Japanese political system, it addresses a number of central issues including Japan’s economic growth, central-local government relations, the legal system, and the politics of defence and foreign policy. The paper pays particular attention to the nature of domestic political change since the mid 1990s as well as the economic and security policy challenges for a country that is increasingly active both globally and regionally.
The aim of this paper is to consolidate students’ understanding of Arabic grammar, expand their vocabulary, and develop their speaking and listening skills. Al-Kitaab Part 2 is completed and other materials are used as well.
This paper consists of language work, building on the grammar, instruction in composition (letter writing, essays), and in the students’ oral/conversational skills. In addition, the students read a variety of texts in modern Persian as language exercises, for translation and vocabulary build-up.
This paper enables students to improve their grasp of Hebrew and to develop competence in the critical reading of Hebrew texts. There will be two sections containing questions on classical Hebrew and Modern Hebrew respectively. Candidates taking the Modern Hebrew option will have an oral as part of their paper.
This paper introduces students to a variety of Arabic literary texts, to enhance their understanding of textual analysis and linguistic structures.
This paper provides an introduction to Persian literary texts, using a selection of readings from early to modern prose writers and poets. The objective is both to introduce major classical Persian authors and to see the written language in action as a vehicle for literary expression.
Students have the opportunity to study texts and authors chosen from within a wide range of Hebrew literature.
A thematic survey of Islamic history in the first four centuries dealing with key aspects of the religious (including introductions to the Qur’an, Hadith, and Islamic law), political, social, and cultural evolution of classical Muslim societies.
This paper enables students to study special topics in Hebrew language, literature, history, and culture.
This paper examines in some detail key moments in the formation of the modern Middle East, across regions and addressing various themes, with an emphasis on developing an understanding of periods of transition and conflict that have shaped and defined modern societies in the region since the 19th century. Although it will focus on the Ottoman empire, it will also consider the experiences of neighbouring regions such as Iran and Morocco.
This paper examines in some detail the political and social dynamics of the contemporary Middle East, focusing on particular regions or themes.
This course enables students (a) to use an extensive range of Chinese vocabulary, idioms, and expressions in translation into Chinese and in Chinese essay writing, (b) to produce appropriate degrees of formality in translating and writing, and (c) to write in Chinese on various topics and in different styles.
The course continues the work done in the acquisition of the modern Chinese language in previous years. Students will be presented with various types of texts, ranging from modern and contemporary fiction, newspapers, and articles on contemporary China, to scholarly writings and government documents.
This course introduces advanced selections of poetry, prose, and fiction in literary Chinese. The course draws on texts ranging from early medieval to late imperial times. Students will be introduced to features of grammar and genre as well as the intellectual and historical background of the readings in question.
The main aims of the course are that students: (a) acquire the ability to understand advanced written and spoken Japanese; (b) acquire the ability to discuss, in Japanese, a wide range of topics; (c) increase competence in written skills.
This course consists of reading texts in advanced modern Japanese with much attention given not only to grammar and syntax but also to context. Supplementary reading will also be expected.
This paper aims to develop students’ reading, writing, speaking, and listening skills. Students are introduced to a range of academic and literary texts in order to develop their ability to follow complex discussions and improve their understanding of linguistic structures. Classes run completely in Arabic.
This paper aims to develop students’ reading, writing, speaking, and listening skills. The students will write essays and prepare presentations in Persian.
This paper enables students to develop their skills in writing and translating Hebrew and in critically assessing passages of Hebrew literature. There will be two sections containing questions on classical Hebrew and Modern Hebrew respectively. Candidates taking the Modern Hebrew option will have an oral as part of their paper.
This paper provides a survey of modern Arabic literature, with special emphasis on text-based analysis. Themes covered include: the city; the nation; women; memory; exile and return; and inter-cultural encounters.
This paper uses a selection of both classical and contemporary Persian poetry and prose, to study the treatment of particular themes and rhetorical techniques.
This paper focuses on themes of interest and importance in both classical Hebrew and Modern Hebrew literature.
The Faculty Board shall also announce each year additional papers which shall be available for examination: these will include papers offered by the Faculty drawn from the following list and papers offered by other Faculties.
The papers available will be drawn from the following lists:
A seminar-based course that extends the comparative approach adopted in EAS.1. It concentrates on thematic and policy issues relevant to understanding Japan, the Korean peninsula, China (broadly defined), and also Southeast Asia. The course runs over two terms and draws explicitly on social science methodology in addressing how best to conceptualize ‘East Asia’ as a region. Topics addressed will vary from year to year, depending on the research interests of the teaching officers involved, but are likely to include the following: comparative models of economic development in East Asia and the role of ‘plan-rational’ policy-making; the role of the nation-state and competing models of historical identity; multilateralism, the emergence of trans-national actors and economic integration in East Asia; political legitimacy, contrasting models of authoritarian rule, and democratization as a political movement; the Cold War as a historical phenomenon; demographic change; regional security; energy and environmental policy and technological change.
This course involves the intensive study of texts that are specifically linked to the special subject that the student has chosen.
While never constant and always debated, in the course of Chinese history certain fundamental approaches emerged toward government, organizing society, prosecuting warfare, communicating, pursuing personal profit, and thinking about the supernatural. This lecture course will examine these approaches, discuss their historical development, and analyse how they still impact on China today. Topics may include the role of Confucianism in traditional China and its revival today, Chinese attitudes towards human and natural environments, aesthetics and the arts, religious practices, popular mobilizations against authority, attitudes toward poverty, wealth, redistribution and consumption, the organization of commerce, and governmentality.
This is an advanced, seminar-based, course with alternate modules on early and medieval China and late imperial China. The paper engages students in an in-depth study of the central socio-religious, philosophical, and socio-economic paradigms that shaped early and dynastic Chinese society. Students are asked to work with key primary sources of the period concerned and examine related secondary scholarship. The paper seeks to identify the origins of ideas, social practices, and institutions that have permeated traditional Chinese society and have shaped the Chinese tradition up to the present day. Thematic rubrics explored in this paper may vary and cover topics such as cosmology and correlative thought, the Confucian classics, the Buddhist and the Daoist traditions, sacrificial religion, food culture, ritual and law, perceptions of the body and medicine, writing and print culture, agriculture and mercantile culture, urban and local culture.
The course aims to introduce undergraduates to the field of modern Chinese literature as it evolved through the 20th century and up to the present. Literature, whether popular or elite, has had a vital place in modern experience. In the first term students become familiar with some of the major canonical writers and issues. Teaching in the second term is organized around a particular topic: possible examples are post-Mao and contemporary fiction; writing from Taiwan; fiction and film in Republican popular culture; Chinese modernism.
The Taiping Rebellion, the Sino-Japanese War of 1894–95, the Allied Invasion of 1900, the warlord wars of the 1910 and 1920s, the War of Resistance against Japan from 1931 to 1945, the Chinese-Communist Civil War of 1945 to 1946, and the Korean War from 1950 to 1953 all have impacted on China’s historical development in modern times. This course will examine these wars themselves, but will focus on their cultural, social, and political effects. It will also analyse their impact on dominant ideas Chinese have about themselves, their relations with other countries, and their position in the world.
This course is designed to acquaint students with the nature and workings of the Chinese language and to help them establish a linguistic framework for the description and analysis of Chinese. It will enable students to understand and explain typological and syntactic differences between Chinese and English on the basis of linguistic theories, and to introduce them to some contentious issues in the study of the Chinese language.
This course offers advanced lectures and seminars focused on social, cultural, political, and economic developments in contemporary Chinese society.
This course involves the intensive study of texts that are specifically linked to the special subject that the student has chosen.
This course requires knowledge of classical Japanese. It will consist of classes and seminars focusing on the interplay between Buddhism, Confucianism, and indigenous religious traditions.
This seminar-style course will explore a range of topics in the sociology, history, and cultural representation of Japan’s minority communities. Particular attention will be paid to Burakumin and Zainichi Korean communities, and to the forms of cultural expression developed by their writers. The seminars will be supplemented by screening and study of both documentary and narrative films. The course may include an optional component covering readings in Japanese.
This course will focus on the cultures of print in the Tokugawa period, with special reference to the novels, almanacs, conduct books, maps, and local histories in the University Library. Students will gain familiarity with raw texts and their calligraphic forms and will study the production and consumption of commercial print in the Tokugawa period.
This course will be run in seminar style with weekly discussions and student presentations. Topics will vary depending on the year but may include: propaganda and social mobilization, Sino-Japanese relations, post-War Japanese political and social development, food and culture, as well as comedy and Japan’s relations within East Asia. The focus will be on primary text readings in English and Japanese.
This is an advanced seminar-based course focusing on Japan’s 20th-century international relations. The precise focus will vary from year to year, but in each instance the emphasis will be on situating the study of Japan within the disciplinary context of International Relations and Diplomatic History, and will involve working with both secondary and primary source material. The course will consider aspects of Japan’s key bilateral relations in East Asia and globally, as well as a number of important thematic issues, including, but not necessarily limited to regional security, alliance relations, political economy, resource and trade policy, and debates over national identity.
This is an advanced seminar-based course focusing on contemporary Japanese society. The focus will vary from year to year, such as questions of learning and education, family, time, space, gender or the like, investigating these topics from a wide range of angles. In each instance the emphasis will be on situating the study of Japan within the disciplinary context of Social Anthropology and Sociology. The course is aimed at deepening students’ understanding of (selected aspects of) Japanese society as well as developing research and writing skills. It will involve working with both secondary and primary source material.
This course will cover the basic grammar of modern written Korean with a view to developing reading fluency. Students will mainly be reading materials in hangul script, but some texts in mixed script (with Chinese characters) will also be used.
This paper examines in some detail aspects of the history of Middle East, either in a particular region and period, or addressing particular themes, with an emphasis on developing an understanding of the evolution of Middle East history and the periods of transition that have shaped and defined the pre-modern societies in the region.
This paper examines in some detail the history of the modern Middle East since the 19th century, focusing on particular regions or themes.
This paper provides a focused analysis of a particular subject relating to the pre-modern Middle East.
This paper provides a focused analysis of a particular subject relating to the contemporary Middle East.
This paper offers the opportunity for students of the Semitic languages to contextualize their language work within the larger field of comparative Semitic linguistics.
1. The Chemical Engineering Tripos shall consist of three Parts, Part I, Part IIa, and Part IIb. There shall be a separate class-list for each Part.
2. A student who has obtained honours in
may be a candidate for honours in Part I of the Chemical Engineering Tripos in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that nine complete terms have not passed after the student's first term of residence.
3. The Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology Syndicate may in special circumstances, which they shall themselves determine, give leave to a student who has obtained honours in any Honours Examination to be a candidate for honours in Part I of the Chemical Engineering Tripos in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that the student has kept four terms and that nine complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
4. A student who has obtained honours in Part I of the Chemical Engineering Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part IIa in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.18
5. A candidate who, under arrangements approved by the Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology Syndicate, has spent not less than three terms studying at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology and has been certified by the President of the Institute after consultation with the Chairman of Examiners for Part I of the Chemical Engineering Tripos to have studied diligently during that period, shall be deemed thereby to have obtained honours in that Part of the Tripos. A list containing the names of persons so qualified shall be certified by the Chairman of the Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology Syndicate and published in the Reporter.
6. The Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology Syndicate may in special circumstances, which they shall themselves determine, give leave to a student who has obtained honours in any Honours Examination to be a candidate for honours in Part IIa of the Chemical Engineering Tripos in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that the student has kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
7. A student who has obtained honours in Part IIa of the Chemical Engineering Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part IIb in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she has not proceeded to the B.A. Degree, and provided also that fifteen complete terms have not passed after the student's first term of residence.
8. No student shall be a candidate for any Part and also for another Honours Examination in the same term.
9. No student who has been a candidate for any Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
10. The Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology Syndicate shall nominate such number of Examiners as they think sufficient for each Part of the Tripos, and shall also have power to nominate one or more Assessors for each Part. If required to do so, Assessors shall propose questions in the papers or parts of papers assigned to them by the Examiners, shall mark the answers of the candidates in those papers or parts of papers, and shall advise the Examiners on the performance of candidates in the examination. Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
11. In each Part of the Tripos, the questions proposed by each Examiner or Assessor shall be submitted for approval to the whole body of Examiners for that Part. The answers to each question shall, as far as possible, be examined by two at least of the Examiners or Assessors.
12. In each Part the names of the candidates who obtain honours shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second class shall be divided into two divisions. The names of those in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. For special excellence in Part IIa or Part IIb a mark of distinction may be awarded.
13. The Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology Syndicate shall have power to publish supplementary regulations defining the scope and character of each of the examination papers and to amend such supplementary regulations from time to time as they may think fit. Any alteration of supplementary regulations shall be published before the division of the Easter Term in the academical year before that in which it is to have effect.
14. (a) The examination for Part I shall consist of four written papers, each of which shall be of three hours’ duration. A candidate for Part I shall offer Papers 1, 2, and 3, and either Paper 4(1) or Paper 4(2) as detailed in the supplementary regulations.
(b) The Examiners for Part I shall take into account course-work prescribed by the Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology Syndicate. Details of the work required shall be published by Notice in the Department of Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology no later than the beginning of the Full Michaelmas Term preceding the examination. The Examiners may require each candidate to submit reports on the course-work undertaken. The Examiners may impose such oral or practical tests as they think fit.
15. (a) The examination for Part IIa shall consist of four written papers, each of which shall be of three hours’ duration.
(b) The Examiners for Part IIa shall take into account course-work prescribed by the Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology Syndicate. Details of the work required shall be published by Notice in the Department of Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology no later than the beginning of the Full Michaelmas Term preceding the examination. The Examiners may require each candidate to submit reports on the course-work undertaken. The Examiners may impose such oral or practical tests as they think fit.
16. (a) The scheme of the examination for Part IIb shall be as follows:
|
Group A: |
Compulsory topics |
|
Group B: |
Advanced chemical engineering topics |
|
Group C: |
Broadening material topics |
|
Group D: |
Research project |
Each candidate shall be required to take all Group A topics, to take a total of eight modules from Group B and Group C topics, and to take a Group D project. The Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology Syndicate shall have power to announce restrictions on the combination of modules that a candidate may choose to offer.
(b) The examination paper on Group A compulsory topics shall be of two hours’ duration.
(c) Each Group B module on an advanced chemical engineering topic shall be examined either by a written paper of one and a half hours’ duration or by course-work or by a combination of the two. Not later than the end of the Full Easter Term each year, the Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology Syndicate shall give notice of the modules prescribed for the following academical year, and shall specify the mode of examination for each module. For modules to be examined by course-work, details of the work required shall be published by the Syndicate by Notice in the Department of Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology not later than the beginning of the Full Michaelmas Term preceding the examination.
(d) Each Group C module on a broadening material topic shall be examined by course-work. Not later than the end of the Full Easter Term each year, the Syndicate shall give notice of the broadening material topics prescribed for the following academical year. The Examiners may require each candidate to submit reports on the course-work undertaken. The Examiners may impose such oral or practical tests as they think fit.
(e) Each candidate shall undertake a Group D project, in which they perform original work in one or more of the following forms: a theoretical investigation, an experimental investigation, an essay, a design project. The Examiners shall require each candidate to submit one or more written reports on the work undertaken. The Examiners may impose such oral or practical tests as they think fit.
17. Each candidate for any Part of the Chemical Engineering Tripos shall be required to sign a declaration that the candidate has read and understood the policies and procedures of the Department of Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology and the University on plagiarism. Each candidate submitting a report under Regulation 16(e) shall be required to sign a declaration that the work submitted is her or his own work, unaided except as specified in the text, and that it does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose. If two or more candidates have undertaken work in collaboration, they will each be required to indicate the extent of their contribution.
These papers will each be on Chemical Engineering principles. They may, for example, include questions on fluid mechanics, process calculations (including thermodynamics), heat and mass transfer, equilibrium staged processes, reactor theory, biotechnology, process systems (including economics and safety, health, and the environment), computer aided process engineering, and mathematical methods.
This paper is to be taken by candidates who have previously obtained honours in the Natural Sciences Tripos or the Computer Science Tripos. In addition to a section on Chemical Engineering principles, it will include questions on General Engineering.
This paper is to be taken by candidates who have previously obtained honours in the Engineering Tripos. In addition to a section on Chemical Engineering principles, it will include questions on Chemistry.
An Affiliated Student or a student admitted to the examination for Part I under the provisions of Regulation 3 will take the section prescribed for him or her by the Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology Syndicate.
1. The Classical Tripos shall consist of three Parts: Part Ia, Part Ib, and Part II. A separate class-list shall be published for each Part.
2. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part Ia:
3. A student who has obtained honours in Part Ia or in another Honours Examination may be a candidate for honours in Part Ib in the year next after so obtaining honours, provided that at the time of the examination he or she has kept four terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
4. A student who has obtained honours either (i) in Part Ia and Part Ib of the Classical Tripos or (ii) in any other Honours Examination may be a candidate for honours in Part II in the year next after or next but one after so obtaining honours, provided that at the time of the examination he or she has kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.23 In exceptional circumstances a candidate who has obtained honours in Part Ia, but not in Part Ib of the Classical Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part II of the Classical Tripos, subject to approval by the Faculty Board.
5. No student who has been a candidate for any Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
6. No student who has obtained honours in Part Ia or Part Ib of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos, having offered classical Greek or classical Latin in the examination, shall be a candidate for Part Ia or Part Ib of the Classical Tripos.
7. For each Part of the Tripos the Faculty Board of Classics shall nominate such number of Examiners as they shall deem sufficient. The Faculty Board shall have power to nominate one or more Assessors to the Examiners for each Part. The Assessors shall, if required, propose questions in the papers or parts of papers assigned to them by the Examiners, shall mark the answers of the candidates in those papers or parts of papers, shall read theses and participate in the viva voce examinations thereon, and shall report as required to the Examiners.
8. Assessors appointed under Regulation 7 may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote. Every paper in Part II of the Classical Tripos shall be examined by at least two of the whole body of Examiners and Assessors.
9. Before the examination there shall be general meetings of the Examiners for Part Ia, Part Ib, and Part II, when the papers set by each Examiner or Assessor shall be submitted to the whole body of Examiners for their approval.
10. The Examiners shall have regard to the style and method of the candidates’ answers and shall give credit for excellence in these respects.
11. The Faculty Board shall have power to make supplementary regulations defining all or any of the subjects set out in the following regulations and to modify, alter, or withdraw such supplementary regulations as they think fit.
12. Public notice of books or subjects prescribed under the following regulations or under any supplementary regulations for each Part of the Tripos shall be given by the Faculty Board not later than the Easter Term next but one preceding the examination to which they apply; provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination is adversely affected. The Board shall also have the power when they first give notice of the books or subjects prescribed for a particular examination to announce any consequential restriction on the combination of papers that a candidate may choose to offer.
13. The examination shall consist of eight papers, each to be set for three hours, as follows:
|
Paper 1. |
Greek translation (also serves as Paper GL 1 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 2. |
Alternative Greek translation (also serves as Paper GL 2 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 3. |
Latin translation (also serves as Paper GL 3 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 4. |
Alternative Latin translation. |
|
Paper 5. |
Greek and Latin texts (also serves as Paper GL 5 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 6. |
Classical questions (also serves as Paper GL 6 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 7. |
Greek prose and verse composition (also serves as GL 7 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 8. |
Latin prose and verse composition (also serves as GL 8 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
14. Every candidate shall offer either Paper 1 or Paper 2, either Paper 3 or Paper 4, and Papers 5 and 6; Paper 2 is intended for candidates who had little or no knowledge of Greek before coming into residence, and Paper 4 is intended for candidates who had a limited knowledge of Latin before doing so. In addition, a candidate may offer one or both of Papers 7 and 8; the Examiners shall give credit for proficiency in these papers.
15. The names of candidates who obtain honours shall be placed by the Examiners in three classes. The names in each class shall be in alphabetical order. In the class-list a mark of distinction may be attached to the name of any candidate whose work in the examination shows special merit. A mark of distinction, G or L respectively, shall be attached to the names of those candidates who, in offering either Paper 1 or Paper 2, or Paper 3 or Paper 4, acquit themselves with credit in that paper. A mark, g or l respectively, shall be attached to the names of those candidates who, in offering either Paper 1 or Paper 2, or Paper 3 or Paper 4, satisfy the Examiners in that paper.
16. In arranging the class-list the Examiners shall take into account the standard attained by candidates in each paper as well as the aggregate of marks obtained by them.
17. The examination shall consist of the following papers, each to be set for three hours:
|
Paper 1. |
Passages for translation from Greek authors (also serves as Paper GL 11 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 2. |
Alternative passages for translation from Greek authors (also serves as Paper GL 12 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 3. |
Passages for translation from Latin authors (also serves as Paper GL 13 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 4. |
Alternative passages for translation from Latin authors. |
|
Paper 5. |
Greek literature (also serves as Paper GL 15 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 6. |
Latin literature (also serves as Paper GL 16 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 7. |
Greek and Roman history (also serves as Paper GL 17 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 8. |
Greek and Roman philosophy (also serves as Paper GL 18 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 9. |
Greek and Roman art and archaeology (also serves as Paper GL 19 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 10. |
Greek and Latin philology and linguistics (also serves as Paper GL 20 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 11. |
Translation from English into Greek prose and verse (also serves as Paper GL 21 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 12. |
Translation from English into Latin prose and verse (also serves as Paper GL 22 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
18. A candidate shall be required to offer six papers as follows:
Paper 1 or Paper 2; Paper 3 or Paper 4; Papers 5 and 6; and two papers chosen from among Papers 7–10; provided that the Faculty Board may, in special circumstances, permit a candidate who is offering or who would otherwise have offered both Paper 2 and Paper 4 to offer
A candidate's application to offer this special combination of papers shall be made through his or her Director of Studies to the Secretary of the Faculty Board not later than the second Monday of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
19. In addition to the papers to be offered under Regulation 18, a candidate may offer Paper 11 or Paper 12 or both these papers.
20. The names of candidates who obtain honours shall be placed by the Examiners in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be in alphabetical order. In drawing up the class-list the Examiners shall have regard in the first place to the work done by the candidates in the six papers which they are required to offer, and no candidate shall be excluded from any class on the ground that he or she has not offered either or both of Papers 11 and 12 in addition. A mark of distinction, an asterisk, shall be attached to the names of candidates whose work in those six papers shows special merit. In determining the place in the class-list of any candidate who has offered either or both the Papers 11 and 12 in addition, the Examiners shall give credit for proficiency in these papers. A mark of distinction, G or L respectively, shall be attached to the names of those candidates who, in offering either Paper 11 or Paper 12, acquit themselves with credit in that paper. A mark, g or l respectively, shall be attached to the names of those candidates who, in offering either Paper 11 or Paper 12, satisfy the Examiners in that paper.
21. In arranging the class-list the Examiners shall take into account the standard attained by candidates in each paper as well as the aggregate of marks obtained by them.
22. The examination shall consist of papers assigned to five groups, A, B, C, D, E, representing five fields of study, and to a sixth group, X, representing a combination of two or more of these fields of study, and certain papers from other Triposes, as set out below.
|
A1. |
A prescribed Greek author or authors, and a prescribed Latin author or authors (also serves as Paper 30 of Part II of the English Tripos).24 |
|
A2. |
Prescribed Greek texts.24 |
|
A3. |
Prescribed Latin texts (also serves as Paper 32 of Part II of the English Tripos).24 |
|
A4. |
Greek and Latin textual criticism and transmission of texts. |
|
B1. |
|
|
B2. |
|
|
B3. |
A prescribed subject or period in Greek and Roman philosophy.25 |
|
C1. |
A prescribed period or subject of Greek history (may also serve as Paper N. 9 of the Oriental Studies Tripos). |
|
C2. |
A prescribed period or subject of Roman history. |
|
C3. |
A prescribed subject taken from ancient history (may also serve as Paper N. 10 of the Oriental Studies Tripos). |
|
C4. |
A subject in ancient or medieval European history (may also be the same, in whole or in part, as Paper 12 of Part II of the Historical Tripos).24 |
|
D1. |
Aegean prehistory (also serves as Paper N. 7 of the Oriental Studies Tripos). |
|
D2. |
A topic within classical archaeology and/or art (may also serve as Paper N. 8 of the Oriental Studies Tripos). |
|
D3. |
A topic within classical archaeology and/or art.24 |
|
D4. |
A topic within classical archaeology and/or art. |
|
E1. |
Elements of comparative linguistics. |
|
E2. |
The Greek language (also serves as Paper 21 of the Linguistics Tripos (Old Regulations)).24 |
|
E3. |
The Latin language (also serves as Paper 22 of the Linguistics Tripos (Old Regulations)).24 |
|
X1. |
A subject specified by the Faculty Board from time to time. |
|
X2. |
A subject specified by the Faculty Board from time to time. |
|
X3. |
A subject specified by the Faculty Board from time to time. |
|
Paper O1. |
General linguistics (Paper Li. 1 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper O2. |
Introduction to modern Greek language and culture (Paper Gr. 3 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper O3. |
Tragedy (Paper 2 of Part II of the English Tripos). |
|
Paper O4. |
History and theory of literary criticism (Paper 9 of Part II of the English Tripos). |
|
Paper O5. |
Metaphysics and the philosophy of mind (Paper 1 of Part Ib of the Philosophy Tripos). |
|
Paper O6. |
History of political thought to c. 1700 (Paper 19 of Part I of the Historical Tripos). |
|
Paper O7. |
A special subject in Neo-Latin literature: Marullus, Poliziano, Bèze, and Buchanan (Paper NL 2 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper O8. |
Judaism and Hellenism (Paper D2(d) of the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos). |
|
Paper O9. |
Early medieval literature and its contexts (Paper 10 of Part I of the English Tripos). |
|
Paper O10. |
The Romance languages (Paper CS 1 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper O11. |
Classical traditions in the sciences (Paper 1 set for the subject History and Philosophy of Science in Part II of the Natural Sciences Tripos). |
|
Paper O12. |
Archaeology in action I (Paper A2 in Archaeology of Part IIa of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos). |
23. A student who is a candidate for Part II in the year next after obtaining honours in Part Ib or in another Honours Examination shall offer
provided that
24. A student who is a candidate for Part II in the year next but one after obtaining honours in Part Ib or in another Honours Examination shall offer
provided that
25. A candidate may be examined viva voce on the field of study of a Group from which he or she offers two or more papers, provided that the scope of such an examination shall be restricted to the subjects of the papers which the candidate has offered. Viva voce examinations shall be held at such times as the Examiners may appoint, and the times appointed shall be announced not later than the second day after the beginning of the examination.
26. (a) A candidate who wishes to offer a thesis under Regulation 23 or Regulation 24 shall submit an application, including the title of the proposed thesis, a brief account of its scope, and a statement of the scheme of papers to be offered in the examination. Applications shall be submitted through candidates’ Directors of Studies to the Academic Secretary of the Faculty, so as to arrive not later than the second Monday of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
(b) Each candidate must obtain the approval of the proposed title by the Faculty Board not later than the last day of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination. When the Faculty Board have approved a title, no change shall be made to it or to the candidate's scheme of papers, without the further approval of the Faculty Board. Any application for a change in title or scheme of papers must be submitted through the candidate's Director of Studies to the Academic Secretary as soon as possible, and in any case no later than ten days before the last Faculty Board meeting of the Lent Term. If a candidate decides to offer a paper in place of a thesis, this is deemed to be a change in the scheme of papers and must be notified to the Faculty Board in accordance with the same timetable.
(c) A thesis shall not exceed 10,000 words in length, including notes but excluding bibliography. Candidates will be required to declare that the thesis is their own work and that it does not contain material already used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose. Except for Greek quotations, which may be written by hand, every thesis must be typewritten (1.5 spacing) unless the candidate has obtained permission from the Faculty Board to present it in manuscript.
(d) A thesis shall be submitted through the candidate's Director of Studies to the Academic Secretary, so as to arrive not later than the first Monday of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held.
(e) Each thesis shall be examined by two Examiners or by an Examiner and an Assessor, and the candidate shall be examined by them upon it viva voce.
27. The names of the candidates who obtain honours shall be placed by the Examiners in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. A mark of distinction shall be awarded for special excellence.
This paper will be divided into two sections. Section (a) will contain three passages of Greek, each taken from works on a schedule of texts prescribed from time to time by the Faculty Board. Section (b) will contain three passages of Greek for unseen translation.
This paper will be divided into sections. Candidates will be required to attempt Sections (a) and (b) unless in a particular case the Faculty Board have agreed that a candidate may attempt Sections (c) and (d) instead. Section (a) will contain three passages of Greek, each taken from a schedule of texts prescribed from time to time by the Faculty Board. Section (b) will contain three passages of Greek for unseen translation. Section (c), if set, will contain three passages of Greek, each taken from a schedule of texts prescribed from time to time by the Faculty Board. Section (d), if set, will contain three passages of Greek for unseen translation.
This paper will be divided into two sections. Section (a) will contain three passages of Latin, each taken from works in a schedule of texts prescribed from time to time by the Faculty Board. Section (b) will contain three passages of Latin for unseen translation.
This paper will be divided into two sections. Section (a) will contain three passages of Latin, each taken from books on a schedule of texts prescribed from time to time by the Faculty Board. Section (b) will contain three passages of Latin for unseen translation.
This paper will contain questions on works contained in the schedules of Greek and Latin texts prescribed for Papers 1 to 4. The paper will contain questions on six passages. The first three passages will be passages of Greek prose and verse, two of which will come from the texts prescribed for Section (a) of Paper 2. The latter three passages will be passages of Latin prose and verse, two of which will come from texts prescribed for Section (a) of Paper 4. The first five questions on each passage will be focused on detailed understanding of the language and the final question will ask for an extended analysis and appreciation. Candidates will be required to answer questions on two passages, one Greek and one Latin.
This paper will be divided into five sections:
Candidates will be required to answer four questions, chosen from at least two of Sections (a)–(e).
This paper will be divided into three sections. Section (a) will contain three passages of English prose for translation into Greek prose (two of which will be straightforward English translations from designated Greek prose authors), and one passage of English verse for translation into Greek iambics; candidates attempting this section will be required to translate one passage only. Section (b) will contain one passage of English prose, based on one of the Greek books prescribed for Section (a) of Paper 2, for translation into Greek prose. Section (c) will contain one passage of English verse for translation into Greek iambics, shorter than that set in Section (a), and one passage of English verse for translation into Greek elegiacs. Candidates will be required to attempt one section only. Candidates taking Paper 1 may attempt either Section (a) or Section (c). Candidates taking Paper 2 may attempt any section.
Credit will be given for knowledge of the general principles of Greek accentuation.
This paper will be divided into two sections. Section (a) will contain three passages of English prose for translation into Latin prose (two of which will be straightforward English translations from designated Latin authors), one passage of English verse for translation into Latin hexameters, and one passage of English verse for translation into Latin elegiacs. Section (b) will contain one passage of English verse for translation into Latin hexameters and one passage of English verse for translation into Latin elegiacs, each shorter than the corresponding passage in Section (a). Candidates will be required to attempt either one passage from Section (a) or both passages from Section (b).
This paper is appropriate for candidates who had little or no knowledge of Greek before entry to the University.
This paper is appropriate for candidates who had a limited knowledge of Latin before entry to the University.
Paper 5. Greek literature
and
Paper 6. Latin literature
Each of these papers will consist of three sections. Sections A and B will contain passages for analysis and appreciation chosen from a schedule of Greek (Paper 5) or Latin (Paper 6) texts which will be prescribed from time to time by the Faculty Board. Section C will contain essay and other questions on these and other works which will be prescribed by the Faculty Board from time to time.
In Paper 5 candidates offering Paper 1 will be required to answer two questions from Section A and two questions from Section C; candidates offering Paper 2 will be required to answer two questions from Section B and two questions from Section C.
In Paper 6 candidates offering Paper 3 will be required to answer two questions from Section A and two questions from Section C; candidates offering Paper 4 will be required to answer two questions from Section B and two questions from Section C.
The paper will contain questions on topics in Greek and Roman history to be specified from time to time; the topics will be taken from the period 800 bc to ad 476. Candidates will have a free choice of questions. Credit will be given for knowledge of ancient sources, on which specific questions may be asked. Candidates for the Classical Tripos will be given credit for knowledge of both Greek and Roman history. Candidates for the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos or the Oriental Studies Tripos will not be expected to show knowledge of both Greek and Roman history.
A text or texts will be prescribed. The paper will be divided into two sections. Section (a) will contain questions on the prescribed text or texts. Section (b) will contain questions on ancient philosophers and philosophical systems. Candidates will be required to answer three questions, of which at least one must be taken from section (a) and at least one from section (b).
The paper will be divided into three sections. Section A will contain one question, involving comments on images. Section B will contain questions principally relating to the Aegean world. Section C will contain questions principally relating to Italy and the Roman Empire.
Candidates will be required to answer Section A, and three other questions including at least one question from each of Sections B and C.
This paper will contain questions on topics in Greek, Latin, and comparative Greek/Latin philology and linguistics to be specified from time to time. Candidates for the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos or the Oriental Studies Tripos will not be expected to show knowledge of both Greek and Latin philology and linguistics.
Candidates will be required to answer four questions related to no fewer than three sections.
This paper will be divided into three sections. Section (a) will contain three passages of English prose for translation into Greek prose (two of which will be straightforward English translations from designated Greek prose authors), and one passage of English verse for translation into Greek iambics; candidates attempting this section will be required to translate one passage only. Section (b) will contain one passage of English prose for translation into Greek prose. Section (c) will contain one passage of English verse for translation into Greek iambics, shorter than that set in Section (a), and one passage of English verse for translation into Greek elegiacs. Candidates will be required to attempt one section only. Candidates taking Paper 1 may attempt either Section (a) or Section (c). Candidates taking Paper 2 may attempt any section.
Credit will be given for knowledge of the general principles of Greek accentuation.
This paper will be divided into three sections. Section (a) will contain three passages of English prose for translation into Latin prose (two of which will be straightforward English translations from designated Latin authors), one passage of English verse for translation into Latin hexameters, and one passage of English verse for translation into Latin elegiacs; candidates attempting this section will be required to translate one passage only. Section (b) will contain one passage of English prose for translation into Latin prose. Section (c) will contain one passage of English verse for translation into Latin hexameters and one passage of English verse for translation into Latin elegiacs, each shorter than the corresponding passage in section (a). Candidates will be required to attempt one section only. Candidates taking Paper 3 may attempt either Section (a) or Section (c). Candidates taking Paper 4 may attempt any section.
This paper will contain questions on a Greek author or authors and on a Latin author or authors. The works prescribed here will be taken from among the major works of Greek and Latin literature.
This paper will be divided into two sections. Section A will contain passages for literary comment, and Section B will contain essay questions. Candidates will be required to answer three questions, at least one from each section.
This paper will be divided into two sections. Section A will contain passages for literary comment, and Section B will contain essay questions. Candidates will be required to answer three questions.
This paper will be divided into three sections. Section A will contain passages for textual comment taken from a prescribed Greek text and a prescribed Latin text. Section B will offer a selection of short passages for textual comment from other Greek and Latin texts. Section C will contain questions on palaeography, related to the texts prescribed for Section A, and essay questions. Candidates will be required to attempt two passages from Section A, one in each language; three of the passages in Section B; and one question from Section C.
In any year, a text and/or subject for study will be prescribed.
In any year, a text and/or subject for study will be prescribed.
These papers may contain questions on the literary, epigraphical, and archaeological sources for the period or subject prescribed, and questions that involve a knowledge of geography and topography and of the political, legal, and social antiquities of the period or subject prescribed; such questions will not require a technical knowledge of archaeology.
If, in any year, the subject prescribed for Paper D2 is connected with early Hellenic archaeology, the subject prescribed for Paper D3 will be connected with classical (Greco-Roman) art; if the subject prescribed for Paper D2 is connected with early Greek art, the subject prescribed for Paper D3 will be connected with the archaeology of the Greek and Hellenistic world.
This paper will cover the principles of the comparative method and of historical reconstruction and their applications to Indo-European phonology, morphology, syntax, and lexicon. A knowledge of the relevant phenomena in Vedic will be required.
A prescribed subject in the history of the Greek language.
A prescribed subject in the history of the Latin language.
For each of Papers E2 and E3 the Faculty Board will prescribe texts for special study. Each paper will include a compulsory question on the prescribed texts.
There will be not more than three papers in this group, X1, X2, X3, whose subjects will be prescribed from time to time by the Faculty Board of Classics. The subjects will be of an inter-disciplinary nature, requiring knowledge related to more than one of the fields of study represented by Groups A, B, C, D, and E.
1. The Computer Science Tripos shall consist of three Parts: Part Ia, Part Ib, and Part II.
2. No student may be a candidate for more than one Part, or for any Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
3. No student who has been a candidate for any Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
4. The Faculty Board of Computer Science and Technology shall have power to issue from time to time supplementary regulations defining or limiting all or any of the papers for examination. Due care shall be taken that sufficient notice is given of any alteration of such supplementary regulations.
5. For each Part of the Tripos the Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners as they shall deem sufficient. They may also nominate for appointment one or more Assessors to the Examiners in such subjects as they consider desirable, and the Assessors so appointed shall, if required to do so, set papers or parts of papers and shall advise the Examiners on the performance of candidates in such subjects. The Assessors, when summoned by the Chairman, shall attend meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
6. The questions proposed by each Examiner or Assessor shall be submitted to, and approved by, the Examiners collectively.
7. The names of the candidates who obtain honours in each Part shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order.
8. The papers for the Computer Science Tripos shall be as follows:
|
Paper 1. Computer science 1.27 |
Paper 6. Computer science 6. |
|
Paper 2. Computer science 2. |
Paper 7. Computer science 7. |
|
Paper 3. Computer science 3. |
Paper 8. Computer science 8. |
|
Paper 4. Computer science 4. |
Paper 9. Computer science 9. |
|
Paper 5. Computer science 5. |
9. A student may be a candidate for honours in Part Ia if he or she has kept one term, provided that three complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
10. A candidate for Part Ia shall submit a portfolio of assessed laboratory work as prescribed in Regulation 11, and shall offer:
|
|
Chemistry |
Physics |
|
|
Evolution and Behaviour |
Physiology of Organisms |
|
|
Geology |
11. A candidate for Part Ia shall submit to the Head of the Department a portfolio of assessed laboratory work. The Head of the Department shall announce not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination the nature of the laboratory work to be undertaken and the dates by which, and the manner in which, the results of such work are to be presented. The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department with assessments of the work submitted by each candidate, and shall take these assessments into account when assigning marks for the examination.
12. A student who has obtained honours in Part Ia of the Computer Science Tripos or in another Honours Examination may be a candidate for honours in Part Ib in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she has kept four terms and that nine complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.28
13. A candidate for Part Ib shall offer Papers 3, 4, 5, and 6, and shall submit a portfolio of assessed laboratory work as prescribed in Regulation 14.
14. A candidate for Part Ib shall submit to the Head of the Department a portfolio of assessed laboratory work. The Head of the Department shall announce not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination the nature of the laboratory work to be undertaken and the dates by which, and the manner in which, the results of such work are to be presented. The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department with assessments of the work submitted by each candidate, and shall take these assessments into account when assigning marks for the examination.
15. A student who has obtained honours in Part Ib of the Computer Science Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part II in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she has kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
16. A candidate for Part II shall offer Papers 7, 8, and 9, and shall submit a dissertation as prescribed in Regulation 17.
17. A candidate for Part II shall submit the proposed title of his or her dissertation to the Head of the Department by the end of the first quarter of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination, and shall obtain the approval of the Head of the Department for the title by the division of the Michaelmas Term. Two copies of the dissertation, which shall be computer-printed and shall not exceed 12,000 words in length, excluding appendices, footnotes, and bibliography, shall be submitted by the candidate to the Head of the Department so as to arrive not later than noon on the third Friday before the first day of the examination. Each candidate will be required to sign a declaration that the dissertation is his or her own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration, and that it does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose; if two or more candidates have undertaken a dissertation in collaboration, they will each be required to indicate the extent of their contribution. The Examiners shall have power to examine any candidate viva voce on the subject of his or her dissertation and on the general field of knowledge within which it falls.
1. The Economics Tripos shall consist of three Parts: Part I, Part IIa, and Part IIb. A separate class-list shall be published for each Part.
2. The scheme of the examination for Part I of the Tripos shall be that defined in Regulations 14 and 15 and for Part IIa of the Tripos that defined in Regulations 16–18 and for Part IIb of the Tripos that defined in Regulations 19–25.
3. The Faculty Board of Economics shall have power to make from time to time supplementary regulations further defining all or any of the subjects of the examination and regulations determining the credit that shall be assigned to such subjects respectively and marking out the lines of study that are to be pursued by the candidates, and to publish lists of books recommended to the candidates and to modify or alter any such supplementary regulations or lists as occasion may require. Sufficient notice of any such modifications or alterations shall be given to avoid hardship to candidates. The Faculty Board shall summon every year a conference of Lecturers on the subjects included in the Tripos, at which these supplementary regulations and lists shall be considered and suggestions for their revision received.
4. A student may be a candidate for honours in Part I if at the time of the examination he or she has kept one term, provided that three complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
5. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part IIa, if they have kept four terms:
A student who, under arrangements approved by the Faculty Board, has spent not less than three terms studying at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology and has been certified by the President of the Institute after consultation with the Chairman of Examiners for Part IIa of the Economics Tripos to have studied diligently during that period, shall be deemed thereby to have obtained honours in that Part of the Tripos. A list containing the names of persons so qualified shall be certified by the Chairman of the Faculty Board and published in the Reporter.
6. A student who has obtained honours in any other Honours Examination other than Part I of the Economics Tripos or has been deemed to have obtained Honours in Part IIa of the Economics Tripos under Regulation 5 may be a candidate for honours in Part IIb in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that the student has kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.29
7. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for any Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
8. No student who has been a candidate for any Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
9. A candidate shall not offer in any Part of the Tripos a paper that he or she has previously offered in another University examination.
10. In each Part the names of the students who obtain honours shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order.
11. The Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners as they may deem sufficient for each Part of the Tripos.
12. The Faculty Board shall have power to nominate one or more Assessors to assist the Examiners in any Part of the Tripos. Assessors shall be responsible for setting the paper or papers in the subject or subjects assigned to them, and for looking over the work of the candidates therein, and shall present a written report to the Examiners. Assessors shall have a right to attend the meetings of the Examiners, but shall not have a vote in determining the class-list.
13. In each Part the questions proposed by the Examiners or Assessors shall be submitted to and approved by the Examiners for that Part collectively.
14. The scheme of examination for Part I of the Tripos shall be as follows:
|
Paper 1. |
Microeconomics. |
|
Paper 2. |
Macroeconomics. |
|
Paper 3. |
Quantitative methods in economics. |
|
Paper 4. |
Political and sociological aspects of economics. |
|
Paper 5. |
British economic history (also serves as Paper 8 of Part I of the Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos). |
Each paper shall be of three hours’ duration, except Paper 3. The examination for Paper 3 shall consist of a written paper of three hours’ duration and the submission of project work undertaken by the candidate; details of the project work required and the arrangements for its submission shall be prescribed from time to time by the Faculty Board.
15. In Part I every candidate shall offer all the papers specified in Regulation 14.
16. The scheme of examination for Part IIa of the Tripos shall be as follows:
|
Paper 1. |
Microeconomics. |
|
Paper 2. |
Macroeconomics. |
|
Paper 3. |
Theory and practice of econometrics I. |
|
Paper 4. |
Economic development. |
|
Paper 5. |
Modern societies (Paper 2 of Part I of the Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos). |
|
Paper 6. |
Mathematics for economists and statisticians. |
|
Paper 7. |
Labour. |
Each paper shall be set for three hours. The examination for Paper 3 shall consist of a written paper of three hours’ duration and the submission of project work undertaken by the candidate; details of the project work required and the arrangements for its submission shall be prescribed from time to time by the Faculty Board.
17. A candidate for Part IIa shall offer
18. If under Regulation 17(b) a candidate offers two papers, the paper of these two on which the Examiners judge the candidate's performance to be least good shall be taken into account only if that would be to the candidate's advantage.
19. The scheme of the examination for Part IIb of the Tripos shall be as follows:
|
Papers 1, 2. |
Economic principles and problems. |
|
Paper 3. |
A subject in economics.30 |
|
Paper 4. |
Economic theory and analysis. |
|
Paper 5. |
Mathematical economics.31 |
|
Paper 6. |
Banking, money, and finance. |
|
Paper 7. |
Public economics. |
|
Paper 8. |
The economics of underdeveloped countries. |
|
Paper 9. |
Industry. |
|
Paper 10. |
Theory and practice of econometrics II. |
|
Paper 11. |
Time series and financial econometrics. |
|
Paper 12. |
A subject in economics.30 |
|
Paper 13. |
A subject in economics.30 |
|
Paper 14. |
A subject in economic history. |
|
Paper 15. |
A subject in economic history.30 |
|
Paper 16. |
A subject in sociology II (Paper Soc. 5 of the Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos in any year that the subject of that paper is ‘Modern Britain’). |
|
Paper 17. |
A subject in the field of sociology and politics. |
Each paper shall be of three hours’ duration, except Paper 10. The examination for Paper 10 shall consist of a written paper of three hours’ duration and the submission of an account of a project undertaken by the candidate; the work to be undertaken for the project, and the arrangements for the submission of the report, shall be prescribed from time to time by the Faculty Board.
20. Except as provided in Regulation 22 a candidate for Part IIb shall offer
21. If under Regulation 20(b) a candidate offers three papers, the paper of these three on which the Examiners judge the candidate's performance to be least good shall be taken into account only if that would be to the candidate's advantage, provided that at least one of Papers 3–15 shall always be taken into account.
22. A candidate who takes the examination in the year next after obtaining honours in any Tripos examination other than Part IIa of the Economics Tripos shall offer Papers 1 and 2 and not less than two nor more than three papers chosen from among Papers 3–17, provided that a candidate must offer at least one paper chosen from Papers 3–15. If a candidate offers three such papers, that paper from among the three in which the Examiners judge the candidate's work to be least good shall be taken into account only if that would be to the candidate's advantage, provided that at least one of Papers 3–15 shall always be taken into account.
23. For Papers 12, 13, and 15 the Faculty Board shall announce by the division of the Lent Term of the year preceding the examination a total of not more than three subjects for each paper. In any case where the Faculty Board announce more than one such subject for a paper, a candidate may offer not more than one of the subjects announced. For Paper 17 a candidate may not offer more than one of the subjects specified in the supplementary regulations for this paper.
24. Some choice of questions shall be allowed in all papers.
25. (a) A candidate for Part IIb under Regulation 20 shall submit an application to the Secretary of the Faculty Board, specifying the proposed topic of the dissertation, and the paper or field within which it falls. Applications shall be considered by the Examiners; the approval or rejection of a candidate's proposed topic shall be communicated to the candidate. A candidate whose proposed topic is rejected may submit a revised application.
(b) When a candidate's proposed topic has been approved by the Examiners, no change shall be made in it, except that a candidate may subsequently apply for permission to revise the topic.
(c) The timetable for the submission and the approval of applications under sub-paragraphs (a) and (b) shall be announced by the Faculty Board not later than the end of the Michaelmas Term. All applications shall be submitted in accordance with detailed instructions issued by the Board.
(d) A dissertation shall be in English, and shall be of not less than 6,000 words and not more than 7,500 words in length,32 including notes and appendices but excluding bibliography. Candidates will be required to give full references to sources used.
(e) Two copies of the dissertation, in typewritten or computer-printed form, shall be submitted, in accordance with detailed arrangements approved by the Faculty Board, so as to reach the Secretary of the Faculty Board not later than the first day of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held. Together with the dissertation each candidate shall submit
26. The Examiners shall have power to examine a candidate viva voce on the subject of her or his project submitted under Regulations 14, 16 or 19, or on her or his dissertation submitted under Regulation 25.
Both papers will emphasize theoretical issues (some questions may also be set which require knowledge of the history of economic thought).
This paper will deal with the following: the theory of the consumer: choice and demand; the theory of the producer; costs and supply; supply, demand, and market equilibrium; partial and general equilibrium analysis; demand and supply in factor markets; market equilibrium under various forms of industrial structure; market failure and the role of the state; elementary game theory and bargaining.
The paper will provide an introduction to the following topics. National income accounting. Classical theory of output and employment. Elementary neoclassical growth theory. Quantity theory of money. Economic fluctuations and short-run equilibrium. Interaction between goods and financial markets: the IS-LM model; Simple open economy macroeconomics; Aggregate supply and the labour market; Stabilization policy.
This paper will cover the application of simple statistical and mathematical techniques to a range of problems in economics. The written examination for the paper will be set in four sections, and will carry 80% of the total mark for the paper. The remaining 20% of the total mark will be accounted for by the submission of an essay on a topic in applied economics in accordance with Regulation 14.
Candidates are required to answer questions from all four sections of the written paper: the marks attached to each section, and the number of questions to be answered, will be shown on the question paper. Sections A and B of the paper will comprise a number of questions on mathematical techniques, and the application of these techniques to simple problems in economic theory. Sections C and D of the paper will deal with the manner in which statistics contributes to the study of economic problems and to the discussion of issues of public policy. The questions in these sections will test candidates’ ability to perform relatively simple statistical derivations, to analyse problems in applied economics, and their knowledge of statistical sources. Sections A and C will each contain four short questions: students will be required to answer all questions in these sections. Sections B and D will each contain two long questions of which students will be required to answer one. Statistical tables, and a list of the most important statistical formulae, will be provided.
A detailed schedule of the specific mathematical and statistical techniques covered in this paper will be published by the Faculty Board not later than the start of the Michaelmas Term of the academical year in which the examination is to be held.
This paper considers the influence of political and sociological factors on economic affairs. It reviews the history of economic and social policy-making in the post-war period in Britain. It examines a variety of influences on policy: the political ideologies that inform the conduct of policy; the domestic and international institutions that provide the context within which policy is formed; the nature of power in government; and the broader social and economic processes that shape the environment in which economic policy is conducted. The paper examines the changing nature of institutions that have regulated the employment relationship and shaped labour standards with the decline of trade unions and the increased role of the law. As background to a wider understanding of the global economy, it introduces the economic analysis of property rights, civil liberties, social capital, income inequality, the family, religion, and terrorism.
This paper will be concerned with three main themes in the industrial development of Britain between 1750 and 1939: the industrial revolution, problems of growth and trade in the mature economy up to 1914, and the inter-war years; it will also cover some of the demographic and social changes associated with this industrial development. The specific topics which will be covered in the course of the analysis of the main themes include the long-run growth of output, productivity, and the standard of living; the costs of growth; demographic changes; capital accumulation and technical progress; entrepreneurship; foreign trade, the export of capital, and the role of the Empire; changes in the industrial structure; the labour market; government economic policies.
The paper covers the following topics in economic theory: consumer theory; producer theory; equilibrium and markets; welfare economics; game theory and industrial organization; introduction to decision-making under uncertainty; asymmetric information; financial markets.
The paper aims to develop a good understanding of macroeconomics at the intermediate level, and to provide a rigorous framework for macroeconomic analysis. The paper covers topics from five areas: intertemporal macroeconomics including the behaviour of consumption, investment, and labour supply; labour markets, unemployment, and inflation; monetary economics, interest rates, and the role of the banking system; open economy macroeconomics including foreign exchange rate fluctuations; macroeconomic policy.
Papers 1 and 2 will contain a number of questions that will involve candidates in manipulating simple mathematical models at a level of mathematical competence no higher than that required in Paper 3 in Part I of the Economics Tripos.
This paper deals with the manner in which statistics contributes to the study of economic and social problems and to the discussion of issues of public policy. Its main purpose is to test candidates’ understanding of the intuition and concepts which underlie elementary statistical techniques, and their ability to analyse problems in applied economics, by bringing to bear on them relevant economic theory, knowledge of statistical sources, and relatively simple statistical derivations. A detailed schedule of the specific statistical techniques covered in this paper will be published by the Faculty Board not later than the start of the Michaelmas Term of the academic year in which the examination is to be held.
The examination for Paper 3 will consist of two components, as follows:
The written paper will carry 60% of the weight for the examination as a whole, and the project 40%.
The paper introduces concepts and theories in development economics and applies them to the comparative development experiences of selected countries or regions. It is designed to provide a useful foundation for candidates proposing to take Part IIb specialist options in development economics or economic history. It also constitutes a self-contained one-year course for those interested in this field but not planning to pursue it further. The concepts and theories covered are: the concept and measurement of ‘development’; models of growth and development, population growth, human and physical capital investment dual economy models; coordination failure and the big push; factor market failures in developing economies including insurance and credit; trade policy issues; inequality and growth; the political economy of development.
The examination will be in two sections. Section (1) will include purely analytical questions. Section (2) will require candidates to relate their analysis of theoretical issues to comparative historical evidence from a small number of countries, the current choice of which will be announced by the Faculty Board early in the academical year. Candidates will be required to answer one question from Section (1) and two questions from Section (2). Each answer will carry equal weight.
The paper covers those aspects of linear algebra, differential and integral calculus, differential and difference equations, probability theory, and statistical theory that are used in various parts of the Tripos. This paper is a pre-requisite for Paper 11 (Time series and financial econometrics) of Part IIb of the Economics Tripos and is recommended for those who plan to take Paper 6 (Banking, money, and finance) of Part IIb of the Economics Tripos.
The paper has the following subject matter: the determination of (the level and structure of) wages and employment by employer demand and household supply; theories of compensating differentials, human capital, internal labour markets, asymmetric information, labour mobility, industrial conflict, discrimination, and collective organization and activity; current issues in industrial relations and the management of the employment relationship; gender issues in, and public policies towards, the labour market. Candidates will be expected to know the main empirical characteristics of the British labour market, and some comparative attributes to other advanced economies. They should be familiar with the main sources of data on the British labour market and modern approaches to the analysis of such data. They should also be able to draw selectively on contributions from sociology and political science.
These papers will deal with the scope and method of economics, with fundamental ideas, and with the application of the methods of economic analysis to economic problems. The papers will be designed to afford scope for the exercise of analytical power in abstract reasoning and in interpreting economic data. A few questions of a more advanced analytical character may be set, but the papers as a whole will be so framed as to be within the competence of those who have not made a study of advanced methods of analysis. A main object will be to test the power of candidates to apply their theoretical reasoning to actual problems. Candidates will, therefore, be expected to show a general knowledge and understanding of the role of the Government in economic affairs and of the working and effects of the principal economic institutions in the fields of production and distribution, of money and banking, of international economics, of employment, labour, and wage determination. Knowledge of the British economy is a basic requirement. Candidates should be able to analyse British problems in their international setting. Some questions will be asked about international economic problems and institutions, and about the problems of different types of economy. The questions set will not require such detailed knowledge as may be appropriate in Papers 3–9, but an understanding of general principles.
This paper will not be set until further notice.
In this paper questions will be set of a more advanced character than in Papers 1 and 2, and the emphasis will rest on the theoretical aspects of economics. The paper will provide opportunity for the use of analytical methods including mathematics.
This paper provides an introduction to advanced topics regarding the economic functions of money, credit, banking, financial asset markets, and monetary policy.
The topics to be covered in the paper will include: portfolio theory; valuation of financial assets and options; coordination of monetary and fiscal policy; bank risk management and regulation; and the design and transmission of monetary policy. Questions for this paper will assume knowledge of analytical models, relevant empirical evidence, and recent significant events regarding banking, financial markets, and monetary policy in developed and emerging economies.
The paper studies the following subject matter: optimal taxation, externalities, and environmental policy; empirical evaluation of the effects of taxation and benefits on economic behaviour; social security; political decision-making and political economics; public expenditure and tax systems in practice. The paper will require knowledge of the relevant theories and institutions.
The paper deals with the problems of growth and development in developing countries. Standard analytical tools, microeconomic and macroeconomic, are used to analyse key economic problems. The paper provides a framework for the understanding of how market failures and institutional failures affect economic and institutional development. Candidates are expected to show familiarity with the theoretical issues, to apply theory to the experience of a number of developing countries, and to use basic econometric knowledge to assess empirical evidence.
This paper will have the following subject matter: The modern business enterprise: its internal organization and functioning and their implications for its economic performance; competition, selection, and external constraints on corporate behaviour; law and the corporation; alternative theories of the firm; financial systems, capital structure, and corporate financial choices; multinational corporations; the market for corporate control. The evolution of firms, markets, and industries; standard models of imperfect competition, strategic behaviour; the relationship between industrial structure, behaviour, and performance; information technology and networks; technical change. Deindustrialization and structural changes in UK industry; issues of competition and industrial policies in the context of the international economy.
The Faculty Board will publish a list of prescribed readings for this paper at the beginning of the Michaelmas Term of the academic year in which the examination will be held. Students will be expected to be familiar with these readings, and to develop an understanding of the relevant literature which lies beyond them. The examination for this paper will be set in two sections. Section A will contain not less than three questions which relate closely to the topics covered in the prescribed readings, while Section B will contain not less than eight questions on more general topics associated with the subject matter of the paper. Candidates will be required to answer one question from Section A, and three questions from Section B.
This paper will deal with ways in which statistical data and methods can assist in the study of economic and social problems. It will not require the use of advanced mathematical methods.
The examination for this paper consists of a written paper of three hours’ duration and the submission of an account of a project undertaken by the candidate. The written paper and the account of the project will carry equal weight. In the written paper candidates will be required to answer a number of questions relating to statistical methods and sources and their applications and to show knowledge in each of these areas. Statistical tables will be provided.
The project to be undertaken by the candidate shall be chosen from a list of topics specified by the Examiners. The topics will be announced not less than two weeks before the last day of Full Lent Term. Candidates will be required to submit an account of the project, in the form of an extended essay by a date not later than one week after the first day of Full Easter Term. This account, which must be in English, should not exceed 4,000 words in length (inclusive of notes and appendices).34 It should report the statistical sources and techniques used by the candidate as well as presenting the candidate's results and conclusions. Candidates are expected to show familiarity with a range of statistical techniques which are widely used for the analysis of economic data and to be able to select the appropriate techniques and data for the analysis of the topic which they have selected.
Candidates will be expected to show knowledge of a specified range of statistical techniques, in addition to those prescribed for Paper 3 in Part I of the Economics Tripos and Paper 3 in Part IIa of that Tripos. A detailed schedule of the techniques which are required for this paper will be published by the Faculty Board not later than the start of the Michaelmas Term of the academic year in which the examination is to be held. Candidates will also be expected to show familiarity with major econometric studies in areas to be decided by the Faculty Board from time to time, and with the most important statistical and economic problems involved in the analysis of economic issues in these areas.
Until further notice the areas will include:
Not more than six of these areas will be covered each year. At the beginning of the Michaelmas Term each year the Faculty Board will announce the areas to be covered in that year and will issue a list of references associated with each area.
The paper provides a grounding in econometric theory, particularly as it relates to time series. Proofs and derivations play a more important role than in Paper 10. Candidates will be expected to show an understanding of both the statistical theory and the way in which statistical methods can be used in economics and finance.
Questions may be posed on regression, estimation procedures such as maximum likelihood and generalized methods of moments, test statistics, model selection, simultaneous equations, the properties of time series models and the way in which they are fitted and selected, dynamic models, and cointegration. Financial topics may include predictability of asset returns, volatility, portfolio analysis, CAPM model, factor model, and option pricing.
The use of approved calculators and statistical tables is permitted in the examination. The examination paper will consist of two sections, and students will be required to answer six questions from Section A, and two questions from Section B. Each section will carry equal weight.
These papers will not be set until further notice.
This paper will, until further notice, be a paper entitled ‘World Depression in the interwar years’. Its main focus will be on the causes and courses of the Great Depression of the 1930s, but the events of the 1920s including the inflation and deflation of 1919–21 will also receive attention. Topics covered will include the transfer problem and international monetary arrangements, the growth of protection and the development of trading blocs, monopolistic tendencies and changes in income distribution, technology and structural changes, the agrarian depression, and the comparative experience of different countries with regard to unemployment, especially following the trough of the cycle.
The main countries considered will be Britain, France, Germany, the USA, and Japan, but the paper will not be exclusively confined to these, and, in particular, the experience of some of the main primary producing countries will also be studied.
This paper will not be set until further notice.
Candidates for this paper who are taking the Economics Tripos shall be examined by written examination.
Until further notice the subjects specified for this paper, from which candidates are required to select one, will be
1. The Education Tripos shall consist of two Parts; a separate class-list shall be published for each Part.
2. The following may present themselves as candidates for Part I:
3. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part II provided36 that they have kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after their first term of residence:
4. No student shall be a candidate for both Parts, or for either Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
5. No student who has been a candidate for either Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
6. The Faculty Board of Education shall have power to issue from time to time supplementary regulations defining or limiting all or any of the subjects of examination, and to modify, alter, or withdraw such supplementary regulations as occasion may require, provided that due care is taken to give sufficient notice of any change.
7. Public notice of any variable subjects for the examinations in any year shall be given by the Faculty Board before the end of the Easter Term in the year next but one preceding the examination to which they apply; provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so, and if they are satisfied that no student’s preparation for the examination is adversely affected.
8. Not later than the first day of Full Michaelmas Term each year the Faculty Board shall publish, by Notice in the Faculty of Education, details of the course-work, performances, workshops, and practical examinations to be undertaken by candidates for each Part of the Tripos during the ensuing academical year.
9. There shall be two separate bodies of Examiners, one for Part I and one for Part II. The Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners as they deem sufficient to conduct the examinations. The Faculty Board shall also have power to nominate one or more Assessors to assist the Examiners in any subject of the Tripos. Assessors shall propose questions in the papers or parts of papers assigned to them by the Examiners, shall mark the answers of the candidates in those papers or parts of papers, and shall advise the Examiners on the performance of candidates in the examination. Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice.
10. In the class-lists for each Part of the Tripos, the names of the candidates who obtain honours shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. In addition the Examiners may affix a mark of distinction to the names of candidates placed in the first class whose work is of special merit. The names in the first and third classes and each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order.
11. The examination for Part I shall comprise three sections, as set out below. Candidates shall offer:
Section I. Education studies
Section I consists of two written papers, each of three hours' duration.
|
Paper 1 |
Disciplines of education |
|
Paper 2 |
Disciplines of education II |
Section II. Globalization, modernity, and education
Section II consists of one written paper of three hours’ duration.
|
Paper 3 |
Globalization, modernity, and education |
Section III. Subject studies
Candidates may offer two or three papers from one subject area only, as outlined in Schedule 1.
12. The examination for Part II shall comprise four sections, as set out below. Candidates shall offer:
With the permission of the Faculty Board, a candidate may offer a dissertation in place of one paper from Papers 1–4 of Section II, providing that the candidate may not offer more than one dissertation in total under Sections II and IV. Unless otherwise stated in Schedule 2, any dissertation shall be submitted under the conditions set out in Regulation 14.
Section I. Research and investigation in education
Candidates shall submit a dissertation on a topic related to the investigation and analysis of an educational problem. The dissertation shall be submitted under the conditions set out in Regulation 14. At the discretion of the Examiners, the examination may include an oral examination on the dissertation.
Section II. Advanced topics in education studies
Section II consists of four written papers, each of three hours’ duration.
|
Paper 1 |
The psychology of education |
|
Paper 2 |
The philosophy of education |
|
Paper 3 |
The sociology of education (also serves as Paper Soc. 8 of the Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos) |
|
Paper 4 |
The history of education |
Section III. Special subjects in education
Candidates may offer one or more special subjects in education, which shall each count as one paper. The special subjects, and the examination requirements for each special subject, shall be announced by the Faculty Board from time to time, providing that due care is taken to give sufficient notice to all candidates.
Section IV. Subject studies
Candidates may offer up to two papers from one subject area only, as outlined in Schedule 2.
13. For both Parts, no candidate shall offer any paper, dissertation, or other exercise that he or she has previously offered in any University examination.
14. A candidate who intends to submit a dissertation under Section II of Part I, or under Sections I, II, and IV of Part II, shall submit the proposed topic to the Secretary of the Faculty Board through her or his Director of Studies, by a date announced by the Faculty Board not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term preceding the examination. The Secretary shall communicate the approval or rejection of the proposed topic to the candidate no later than the beginning of the Lent Term preceding the examination.
The submitted dissertation shall be of not less than 8,000 words and not more than 10,000 words, inclusive of notes and appendices. Dissertations shall be submitted by candidates through the Undergraduate Office to the Secretary of the Faculty Board by a date specified by the Faculty Board not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term preceding the examination. Each dissertation shall be in typescript, unless previous permission has been obtained from the Faculty Board to present it in manuscript; it shall bear the candidate’s examination number and shall be accompanied by a brief synopsis.
Candidates will be required to declare that the dissertation is their own work and that it does not contain material already used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose. At the discretion of the Examiners, a candidate may be examined viva voce on his or her dissertation.
15. Candidates intending to offer papers in Modern and Medieval Languages at Part II shall during the academical year next before the year of the examination be required to spend a period studying abroad under the conditions specified for the year abroad in the regulations of Part II of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos, including all conditions relating to the submission of evidence of, and reports on, the period of study abroad and applications for the approval of the candidates’ plans.
16. The examinations for the Education Tripos shall be held under these regulations for the first time
for Part I in 2009
for Part II in 2010
Candidates may offer two or three papers chosen from only one subject area, as outlined in the Schedule. Where stated, some papers are examined by means other than a single written paper. Some subject areas may restrict the combinations of papers that may be offered.
All candidates shall offer the equivalent of two or three papers.
The following options shall count as one paper:
Biology of Cells (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ia of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Evolution and Behaviour (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ia of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Physiology of Organisms (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ia of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
The following options shall count as two papers:
Animal Biology (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Cell and Developmental Biology (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Ecology (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Physiology (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Plant and Microbial Sciences (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
All candidates shall offer the following two papers:
Passages for translation from Latin authors (Paper 3 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos)
Latin literature (Paper 6 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos)
A candidate who wishes to offer three papers may additionally offer one of Papers 7–10 from Part Ib of the Classical Tripos.
Candidates may offer two or three of the following papers:
|
Paper Ed.D2 |
Film, culture, and identity |
|
Paper Ed.D3 |
Drama production II (performance or workshop and submission of a note-book) |
|
Paper Ed.E3 |
Shakespeare and Renaissance drama |
English literature and its contexts, 1300–1550 (Paper 1 of Part I of the English Tripos)
English literature and its contexts, 1500–1700 (Paper 2 of Part I of the English Tripos)
English literature and its contexts, 1688–1847 (Paper 3 of Part I of the English Tripos)
English literature and its contexts, 1830 to the present (Paper 4 of Part I of the English Tripos)
Literary criticism (Paper 6 of Part I of the English Tripos)
A candidate may offer a dissertation in place of any of these papers, provided that only one dissertation is offered in total. Any dissertation shall be offered under the conditions specified in Regulation 14.
Candidates may offer two or three of Papers 1–10 of Part Ib of the Geographical Tripos, in accordance with the examination requirements as set out in the regulations for that Tripos. Candidates will be required to submit a portfolio of course-work under conditions specified by the Faculty Board of Earth Sciences and Geography not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term preceding the examination.
Candidates may offer two or three of any of the following papers:
Paper 1 of Part I of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos
Any of Papers 2–24 of Part I of the Historical Tripos
All candidates shall offer:
|
Paper Ed. Ma |
Mathematical reasoning and mathematics education (submission of written assignments) |
A candidate who wishes to offer two papers shall also offer two of the following options, which combined will make up one Mathematics paper:
|
Paper Ed.Ma2 |
Differential equations (including questions taken from Paper 2 from Part Ia of the Mathematical Tripos) |
|
Paper Ed.Ma3 |
Groups (including questions taken from Paper 3 from Part Ia of the Mathematical Tripos) |
|
Paper Ed.Ma4 |
Vector calculus (including questions taken from Paper 3 from Part Ia of the Mathematical Tripos) |
A candidate who wishes to offer three papers shall also offer the following options, which combined will make up two Mathematics papers:
|
Paper Ed.Ma2 |
Differential equations (including questions taken from Paper 2 from Part Ia of the Mathematical Tripos) |
|
Paper Ed.Ma3 |
Groups (including questions taken from Paper 3 from Part Ia of the Mathematical Tripos) |
|
Paper Ed.Ma4 |
Vector calculus (including questions taken from Paper 3 from Part Ia of the Mathematical Tripos) |
All candidates shall offer the following paper:
Translation into the foreign language, and test in the foreign language through audio-visual media (Paper B3 from Part Ib of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos), all in the language which he or she has previously offered in the Preliminary Examination for Part I of the Education Tripos
and
one or two additional papers taken from Schedule Ib to the regulations for the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos
Candidates may offer two or three of any of the following papers:
Analysis (Paper 2 of Part Ib of the Music Tripos)
Portfolio of free compositions (Paper 3 of Part Ib of the Music Tripos), which shall be submitted under conditions specified in the regulations for the Music Tripos
Any of the additional papers from Part Ib of the Music Tripos announced by the Faculty Board of Music, which shall be undertaken under any conditions specified by the Faculty Board of Music when they are announced
|
Paper Ed.Mu3 |
Performance and rehearsal techniques (practical rehearsal and practical examination) |
All candidates shall offer the equivalent of two or three papers.
The following options shall count as one paper:
Chemistry (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ia of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Geology (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ia of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Materials and Mineral Sciences (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ia of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Physics (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ia of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
The following options shall count as two papers:
Chemistry A (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Chemistry B (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Physics A (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Candidates may offer two or three papers chosen from Group B in Regulation 18 of the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos. Where, under the regulations for that Tripos, a paper may be offered in a form of assessment other than a written paper, the paper offered shall be submitted under conditions specified in the regulations for the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos.
Candidates may offer up to two papers from only one subject area, as outlined in the Schedule. Where stated, some papers are examined by means other than a single written paper. Some subject areas may restrict the combinations of papers that may be offered.
A candidate who wishes to offer one paper may offer either of the two written papers from the subject History and Philosophy of Science from Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos.
A candidate who wishes to offer two papers may offer one of the following options, which shall count as two papers:
Animal Biology (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Cell and Developmental Biology (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Ecology (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Experimental Psychology (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
History and Philosophy of Science (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Physiology (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Plant and Microbial Sciences (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Candidates may offer one or two of the papers from Part II of the Classical Tripos.
Candidates may offer one or two of the following papers:
|
any of Papers 1–13 of Part II of the English Tripos |
|
|
Paper Ed.D4 |
Modern drama and theatre |
|
Paper Ed.A1 |
Arts and performance (written paper and submission of course-work) |
A candidate may offer a dissertation in place of any of the papers above, providing that the candidate may offer only one dissertation in total. A dissertation in place of any of Papers 1–13 of Part II of the English Tripos shall be offered under the regulations for that Tripos. Any other dissertation shall be offered under the conditions specified in Regulation 14.
Candidates may offer one or two of Papers 1–15 of Part II of the Geographical Tripos, in accordance with the examination requirements as set out in the regulations for the Geographical Tripos. Some papers may require candidates to submit a portfolio of course-work in addition.
Candidates may offer one or two of Papers 3–29 of Part II of the Historical Tripos.
A candidate wishing to offer a single paper in Mathematical Sciences may offer one of the following options:
Students who have completed the course in Modern and Medieval Languages in Part I of the Education Tripos shall have the following choices for Part II:
(A) A one-year Part II, five papers in Education Studies as set out in Regulation 12.
(B) A two-year Part II, including a period spent abroad as detailed in Regulation 15.
The student having undertaken an intensive study course or similar and gained an acceptable form of certification in a further language (in the country of that language) which shall be one of those normally available within the Education with Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos, other than French:
and either:
Candidates may offer one or two of the following papers:
Paper 1 of Part II of the Music Tripos, a dissertation which shall be submitted under the regulations of the Music Tripos
Any of Papers 3–6 of Part II of the Music Tripos, all of which shall be submitted or undertaken under the conditions specified in the regulations for the Music Tripos
Any of the additional papers from Part II of the Music Tripos announced by the Faculty Board of Music, which shall be undertaken under any conditions specified by the Faculty Board of Music when they are announced
|
Paper Ed.A1 |
Arts and performance (written paper and submission of course-work) |
A candidate who wishes to offer one paper may offer either of the two written papers from the subject History and Philosophy of Science from Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos.
A candidate who wishes to offer two papers may offer one of the following options, which shall count as two papers:
Chemistry A (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Chemistry B (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Geological Sciences A (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Geological Sciences B (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
History and Philosophy of Science (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Materials Science and Metallurgy (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Mineral Sciences (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Physics A (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Physics B (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Candidates may offer one or two papers from Group C in Regulation 18 of the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos. Where, under the regulations for that Tripos, a paper may be offered in a form of assessment other than a written paper, the paper offered shall be submitted under conditions specified in the regulations for the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos.
1. The Education Studies Tripos shall consist of two Parts; a separate class-list shall be published for each Part.
2. The following may present themselves as candidates for Part I:
3. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part II,39 provided that they have kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after their first term of residence:
4. No student shall be a candidate for both Parts, or for either Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
5. No student who has been a candidate for either Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
6. The Faculty Board of Education shall have power to issue from time to time supplementary regulations defining or limiting all or any of the subjects of examination, and to modify, alter, or withdraw such supplementary regulations as occasion may require, provided that due care is taken to give sufficient notice of any change.
7. Public notice of any variable subjects for the examinations in any year shall be given by the Faculty Board before the end of the Easter Term in the year next but one preceding the examination to which they apply; provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so, and if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination is adversely affected.
8. Not later than the first day of Full Michaelmas Term each year the Faculty Board shall publish, by Notice in the Faculty of Education, details of the course-work to be undertaken by candidates for each Part of the Tripos during the ensuing academical year.
9. There shall be two separate bodies of Examiners, one for Part I and one for Part II. The Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners as they deem sufficient to conduct the examinations. The Faculty Board shall also have power to nominate one or more Assessors to assist the Examiners in any subject of the Tripos. Assessors shall propose questions in the papers or parts of papers assigned to them by the Examiners, shall mark the answers of the candidates in those papers or parts of papers, and shall advise the Examiners on the performance of candidates in the examination. Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
10. In addition to any Assessors nominated under Regulation 9, Assessors shall be appointed as follows for Section II of Part I and for Section IV of Part II:
11. In the class-list for each Part of the Tripos, the names of the candidates who obtain honours shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. In Part II of the Tripos, the class-list may show, by some convenient mark, candidates who have undertaken professional placements. In the class-list for Part II a mark of distinction may be attached to the name of any candidate whose work in the examination shows special merit.
12. The examination for Part I shall comprise two sections, as set out below. Every candidate shall offer both sections.
Section I. Education studies.
Course-work related to the foundation disciplines of education.
At the discretion of the Examiners the examination may include an oral examination on the course-work submitted.
Section II. Subject studies.
For this section each candidate shall select one subject from among the subjects specified in Schedule I to these regulations, and shall offer the written papers or other exercises specified for that subject in Schedule I, which may be either specially set for the Education Studies Tripos or taken from another University examination; provided always that a candidate shall not offer any paper that he or she has previously offered in any University examination; and provided that:
13. The examination for Part II shall comprise four sections, as follows:
Section I. Research and investigation in education.
Course-work related to educational research methods and analysis.
At the discretion of the Examiners the examination may include an oral examination on the course-work submitted.
Section II. Advanced topics in education studies.
|
Paper 1. |
The psychology of education. |
|
Paper 2. |
The philosophy of education. |
|
Paper 3. |
The sociology of education. |
|
Paper 4. |
The history of education. |
|
Paper 5. |
A special subject in education studies specified by the Faculty Board from time to time. |
Papers 1–5 shall each be of three hours’ duration.
Section III. Curriculum studies.
|
Paper 6. |
A subject in curriculum studies specified by the Faculty Board from time to time. |
Paper 6 shall be of two hours’ duration. The Examiners shall take into account course-work done by candidates as prescribed from time to time by the Faculty Board. The Faculty Board shall announce from time to time, subject to the provisions of Regulation 6, not more than four subjects for Paper 6; a candidate may offer not more than one of those subjects.
Section IV. Subject studies.
Written papers and other exercises in the subjects specified in Schedule II to these regulations, which may be either specially set for the Education Studies Tripos or taken from another University examination.
14. There shall be two alternative schemes of examination for Part II, (A) and (B).
provided that
15. (a) A dissertation offered in Part I or in Part II in place of a paper taken from another University examination shall be submitted in accordance with the regulations for the other examination concerned.
(b) A dissertation offered in Part I or Part II in place of a specially set paper, or in Part II in place of a paper from Section II or Section III, shall be submitted in accordance with the following arrangements:
16. No student who has offered the special subject Modern Foreign Languages shall be a candidate for Part II unless evidence has been produced to the Secretary of the Faculty Board that during the academical year next before the year of the examination he or she has spent a period studying abroad under conditions approved by the Faculty Board in a country or countries relevant to the papers to be offered in the examination.42 Such evidence will normally consist of a certificate from a university or employer confirming dates of attendance. Every student shall submit a report on their year abroad to the Faculty Board in the manner prescribed from time to time by the Board. Students shall keep the Secretary of the Faculty Board informed of their address abroad at all times.
17. A candidate proposing to study abroad in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 16 shall apply to the Faculty Board for the approval of his or her plans. The application shall be submitted through the candidate's Director of Studies to the subject co-ordinator so as to arrive not later than the last day of Full Michaelmas Term in the academical year next preceding that which the candidate proposes to spend abroad, and shall indicate the country or countries that the student intends to visit and the way in which he or she will be occupied while abroad.42 If a student subsequently changes his or her plans, he or she must inform the subject co-ordinator and seek permission afresh.
18. In the Michaelmas Term the Faculty Board shall publish a list of all candidates whose first and second professional placements are deemed satisfactory. A student whose name does not appear on this list or any subsequent supplementary list, will not normally be permitted to embark on a third professional placement. In the Lent Term, the Faculty Board shall publish a list of all students whose third professional placement is deemed satisfactory.
In this Schedule an asterisk denotes a paper specially set for the Education Studies Tripos.
Every candidate for Part I shall offer one of the following combinations:
One option chosen from Group 1 and both papers chosen from Group 2.
|
Either |
From Part Ia of the Natural Sciences Tripos one of the following: Biology of Cells (the written paper and practical examination) Physiology of Organisms (the written paper and submission of practical note-books) |
|
or |
From Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos one of the following: Animal Biology (both written papers and the submission of practical note-books) Ecology (both written papers and the submission of practical note-books) History and Philosophy of Science (both written papers) Plant and Microbial Sciences (both written papers and the practical examination and the submission of practical note-books) |
|
Both |
Paper 3: Bioethics – being a dissertation on an agreed subject within Bioethics conforming to Regulation 15(b) of the Education Studies Tripos, its length being between 6,000 and 8,000 words inclusive of notes and appendices; |
|
and |
Paper 4: Special Study in Biology – the examination consists of written course-work assignments and practical experiments together with the submission of a research report equivalent in length to 7,000 words. |
Four papers from Part Ib of the Classical Tripos as follows:
Passages for translation from Latin authors (Paper 3 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos),
Latin literature (Paper 6 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos), and
two further papers from Papers 7–10 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos.
|
Either |
(a) |
Any four of the following papers: |
||
|
|
*Paper E1. Medieval and Renaissance literature, 1350–1700. |
|||
|
|
*Paper E2. Shakespeare and Renaissance drama. |
|||
|
|
*Paper E3. Augustan and Romantic literature, 1660–1820. |
|||
|
|
*Paper E4. Literature and culture – 1830 to the present. |
|||
|
|
*Paper E5. Modern drama and theatre. |
|||
|
|
*Paper E6. Drama in production (practical). |
|||
|
|
*Paper E7. Film, culture, and identity. |
|||
|
|
*Paper E8. International literature in English; |
|||
|
|
provided that |
|||
|
|
(i) |
in substitution for one paper a candidate may offer a dissertation on a topic of literary, dramatic, or theatrical interest falling within the scope of that paper, and |
||
|
|
(ii) |
if a candidate submits a dissertation in substitution for Paper E1 it shall not be wholly or largely on Shakespeare's drama. |
||
|
|
Such a dissertation shall conform to the requirements of Regulation 15(b) for the Education Studies Tripos; its length shall be between 5,000 and 7,000 words, inclusive of notes and appendices. |
|||
|
or |
(b) |
Four papers, as follows: |
||
|
|
(i) |
*Paper A1. Arts and performance |
||
|
|
and |
|||
|
|
(ii) |
any three papers chosen from among Papers E1–8. |
||
The examination for Paper A1 consists of a written paper of three hours’ duration and a practical examination.
Three papers and course-work as follows:
Three papers and a dissertation, as follows:
Five papers as follows:
|
*Paper M1. |
|||
|
*Paper M2. |
|||
|
*Paper M3. |
|||
|
*Paper M4. |
|||
|
*Paper M5. |
The examination for each of Papers M1–3 consists of a written paper of three hours’ duration together with the submission of a project report on a topic chosen from an approved list. The examination for Paper M4 consists of the submission of a report on topics in Mathematics Education. The examination for Paper M5 consists of a written paper of one and a half hours’ duration together with the submission of a report on a topic chosen from a list of approved topics.
Four papers in one language from Part Ib of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos:
Three papers and a dissertation or a composition, as follows:
The examination for Paper A1 consists of a written paper of three hours’ duration and a practical examination.
The examination for Paper N1 consists of a practical test of (i) rehearsal technique and (ii) performance on an instrument or in singing.
Four papers, as follows:
provided that in substitution for one paper a candidate may offer a dissertation on a topic in Religious Studies prescribed by the Faculty Board of Education. Such a dissertation shall conform to the requirements of Regulation 15(b) of the Education Studies Tripos; its length shall be between 5,000 and 7,000 words, inclusive of notes and appendices.
The following papers and other exercises shall be available in Section IV of Part II. A candidate may offer not more than two papers or other exercises from this Section.
A candidate wishing to offer a single paper in Biological Sciences may offer the following option:
A candidate wishing to offer two papers in Biological Sciences may offer one of the following options:
Two papers chosen from Part II of the Classical Tripos.
The following papers from Part II of the Historical Tripos: Papers 3–29.
A candidate wishing to offer a single paper in Mathematical Sciences may offer one of the following options:
A candidate wishing to offer two papers in Mathematical Sciences may offer one of the following options:
A candidate shall offer the oral examination C from Part II of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos, which shall be conducted under the conditions specified in the regulations for the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos
one or two of the following papers, provided that any paper offered is in the same language as the oral examination and that at least one of the papers listed in (i) and (ii) must be offered:
A candidate wishing to offer a single paper in Physical Sciences may offer the following option:
A candidate wishing to offer two papers in Physical Sciences may offer one of the following options:
1. The Engineering Tripos shall consist of four Parts, Part Ia, Part Ib, Part IIa, and Part IIb.
2. No student who has been a candidate for any Part of the Engineering Tripos shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
3. The Faculty Board of Engineering shall nominate such number of Examiners as they think sufficient for each Part of the Engineering Tripos. They may also nominate for appointment one or more Assessors to the Examiners in such subjects as they consider desirable; the Assessors so appointed shall set papers or parts of papers and shall advise the Examiners on the performance of candidates in their subjects. The Assessors, when summoned by the Chairman, shall attend meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
4. In each Part of the Engineering Tripos the questions proposed by each Examiner or Assessor shall be submitted to the whole body of Examiners for approval.
5. The Faculty Board shall have power to define or limit by supplementary regulations all or any of the subjects of examination, to determine the credit that shall be assigned to each subject, and to mark out the lines of study that are to be pursued by candidates. They shall also have power to modify or alter any such supplementary regulations as occasion may require, due care being taken that sufficient notice is given of any change.
6. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part Ia:
7. The following papers shall be set in Part Ia:
1. Mechanical engineering
2. Structures and materials
3. Electrical and information engineering
4. Mathematical methods
Every candidate shall offer all four papers. Each paper shall be of three hours’ duration.
8. The Examiners shall take into account such course-work done by candidates as shall from time to time be determined by the Faculty Board. For this purpose the Head of the Department of Engineering shall present to the Examiners detailed reports on the performance of each candidate in this course-work. Details of the work required of candidates shall be published by the Faculty Board by Notice in the Department of Engineering not later than the beginning of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
9. The names of the candidates who obtain honours in Part Ia shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order.
10. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part Ib:
11. The following papers shall be set in Part Ib:
1. Mechanics
2. Structures
3. Materials
4. Thermofluid mechanics
5. Electrical engineering
6. Information engineering
7. Mathematical methods
8. Selected topics
Each paper in Part Ib shall be of two hours’ duration, except Paper 8. The examination for Paper 8 shall consist of either a written paper of two and a half hours’ duration, or a written paper of one and a half hours’ duration and the submission of course-work in one foreign language. Every candidate shall offer all eight papers.
12. The Examiners shall take into account such course-work done by candidates as shall from time to time be determined by the Faculty Board. For this purpose the Head of the Department of Engineering shall present to the Examiners detailed reports on the performance of each candidate in this course-work. Details of the work required of candidates shall be published by the Faculty Board by Notice in the Department of Engineering not later than the beginning of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
13. In order to obtain honours in Part Ib a candidate must satisfy the Examiners that he or she has such industrial or equivalent experience as shall be determined from time to time by the Faculty Board.
14. The names of the candidates who obtain honours in Part Ib shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order.
15. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part IIa of the Engineering Tripos:
16. The scheme of examination for Part IIa of the Engineering Tripos shall be as follows:
|
Group A: |
Energy, fluid mechanics, and turbomachinery |
|
Group B: |
Electrical engineering |
|
Group C: |
Mechanics, materials, and design |
|
Group D: |
Civil, structural, and environmental engineering |
|
Group E: |
Management and manufacturing |
|
Group F: |
Information engineering |
|
Group G: |
Engineering for the Life Sciences |
|
Group I: |
Imported modules from other courses |
|
Group M: |
Multidisciplinary modules |
|
Group S: |
Modules shared with Part IIb of the Engineering Tripos |
In each of Groups A, B, E, and F the Faculty Board shall prescribe modules whose total duration for written papers shall be nine hours. In each of Groups C and D the Faculty Board shall prescribe modules whose total duration for written papers shall be ten and a half hours. In Group G the Faculty Board shall prescribe modules whose total duration for written papers shall be no more than nine hours. Not later than the end of the Easter Term each year the Faculty Board shall give notice of the modules prescribed for the examination to be held in the academical year next following, and shall specify the mode of examination for each module. In giving such notice the Faculty Board shall announce combinations of modules which satisfy the qualifying conditions for each engineering area specified by the Board and shall have power to announce restrictions on the combination of modules that a candidate may choose to offer.
17. Each module in Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, and G shall be examined either by a written paper of one and a half hours or by a written paper of three hours. Each module in Groups I, M, and S shall be examined either by a written paper of one and a half hours or by a written paper of one and a half hours, and course-work.
18. Each candidate shall offer modules whose total duration for written papers amounts to fifteen hours, chosen subject to any restrictions announced by the Faculty Board under Regulation 16.
19. The Examiners shall take into account such course-work done by candidates as shall from time to time be determined by the Faculty Board. For this purpose the Head of the Department of Engineering shall present to the Examiners detailed reports on the performance of each candidate in this course-work. Details of the work required of candidates shall be published by the Faculty Board by Notice in the Department of Engineering not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
20. Every candidate submitting course-work under Regulations 18 or 19 shall be required to sign a declaration that the work submitted is his or her own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration; if two or more candidates have undertaken work in collaboration, they shall be required to indicate the extent of their collaboration.
21. In order to obtain honours in Part IIa of the Engineering Tripos a candidate must satisfy the Examiners that he or she has such industrial or equivalent experience as shall be determined from time to time by the Faculty Board; a statement of each candidate's experience shall be certified by the Head of the Department of Engineering.
22. For each combination of subjects in Part IIa, announced by the Faculty Board under Regulation 16 as an engineering area, there shall be a separate class-list. The names of the candidates who obtain honours in each engineering area shall be arranged in three classes, the second of which shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. For special excellence in Part IIa a mark of distinction may be awarded.
23. A candidate who, under arrangements approved by the Faculty Board of Engineering, has spent not less than three terms studying at an institution listed in the Schedule to these regulations and who has been certified by the head of that institution, after consultation with the Chairman of Examiners for Part IIa of the Engineering Tripos, to have studied diligently during that period, shall be deemed thereby to have obtained honours in Part IIa of the Engineering Tripos. A list containing the names of persons so qualified shall be certified by the Chairman of the Faculty Board of Engineering and published in the Reporter.
24. A student who has obtained honours in Part IIa of the Engineering Tripos or has been deemed to have obtained honours in Part IIa of the Engineering Tripos under Regulation 23 may, in the year after or next but one after so obtaining honours, be a candidate for honours in Part IIb of the Engineering Tripos, provided that he or she
provided always that fifteen complete terms have not passed after the student's first term of residence.43
25. The scheme of examination for Part IIb of the Engineering Tripos shall be as follows:
|
Group A: |
Energy, fluid mechanics, and turbomachinery |
|
Group B: |
Electrical engineering |
|
Group C: |
Mechanics, materials, and design |
|
Group D: |
Civil, structural, and environmental engineering |
|
Group E: |
Management and manufacturing |
|
Group F: |
Information engineering |
|
Group G: |
Engineering for the Life Sciences |
|
Group I: |
Imported modules from other courses |
|
Group M: |
Multidisciplinary modules |
|
Group R: |
Research modules |
In each group except Groups G, I, M, and R the Faculty Board shall prescribe not fewer than six and not more than twelve modules for examination; each module shall be examined either by a written paper which shall normally be of one and a half hours' duration or by course-work or by a combination of the two. Not later than the end of the Easter Term each year the Faculty Board shall give notice of the modules prescribed for the examination to be held in the academical year next following, and shall specify the mode of examination for each module. In giving such notice the Faculty Board shall announce combinations of modules which satisfy the qualifying conditions for each engineering area specified by the Board and shall have power to announce restrictions on the combination of modules that a candidate may choose to offer. For modules to be examined by course-work, details of the work required of candidates shall be published by the Faculty Board by Notice in the Department of Engineering not later than the beginning of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
26. Each candidate
27. With the permission of the Faculty Board, a candidate for Part IIb may submit, in place of any one of the modules which he or she would otherwise be required to offer under Regulation 26(b) a dissertation on a subject approved by the Faculty Board which falls within the field of the module concerned.
28. A candidate who wishes to offer a dissertation under Regulation 27 shall submit a statement of the modules that he or she intends to offer under Regulation 26(b), together with details of the project to be undertaken under Regulation 26(a) and the title of the proposed dissertation, to the Secretary of the Faculty Board, in accordance with any instructions issued by the Faculty Board, not later than the fourth Wednesday of Full Michaelmas Term in the year of candidature. A candidate shall obtain the approval of his or her proposed scheme of examination, and of the title of the dissertation, by the Faculty Board not later than the end of the third quarter of the Michaelmas Term.
29. A dissertation offered under Regulation 27 shall contain full references to any sources used in its composition, and shall be of not less than 4,000 words and not more than 5,000 words in length, including footnotes and appendices. Candidates shall submit their dissertations to the Chairman of Examiners not later than the end of the first week of Full Easter Term in the year of candidature. Each dissertation shall be in typewritten form (unless previous permission has been obtained from the Faculty Board through a candidate's Tutor to present the dissertation in manuscript).
30. Every candidate submitting project work under Regulation 26(a) or course-work under Regulation 26(b) shall be required to sign a declaration that the work submitted is his or her own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration; if two or more candidates have undertaken work in collaboration, they shall be required to indicate the extent of their collaboration. Every candidate submitting a dissertation under Regulation 27 shall be required to sign a declaration that the work submitted is his or her own work and that it does not contain material already used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose.
31. For each combination of subjects in Part IIb, announced by the Faculty Board under Regulation 25 as an engineering area, there shall be a separate class-list. The names of the candidates who obtain honours in each engineering area shall be arranged in alphabetical order in a single class, with distinctive marks attached to the names of those candidates who in the opinion of the Examiners deserve special credit, (d) for a distinguished performance, (m) for a meritorious performance.
Institutions approved for the purpose of Regulation 23 (Exchange Programmes)
Massachusetts Institute of Technology
Ecole Centrale Paris
National University of Singapore
The paper shall consist mainly of questions on: kinematics of particles and rigid bodies, and dynamics of particles, in two dimensions; mechanical vibrations; basic concepts of thermodynamics, fluid mechanics, and heat transfer, and their applications.
The paper shall consist mainly of questions on: equilibrium, compatibility and elasticity of structures; buckling phenomena in simple structures; properties and applications of engineering materials; the physical origins of the properties.
The paper shall consist mainly of questions on: linear circuits and devices; electromagnetics; digital circuits and information processing.
The paper shall consist mainly of questions on: vectors, functions, and complex numbers; ordinary differential equations; Fourier series, matrices; functions of several variables; probability; computing.
The paper shall consist mainly of questions on: kinematics and dynamics of particles and rigid bodies; moment of momentum; D’Alembert's principle; accelerations and dynamic stresses in mechanisms; applications to machinery.
The paper shall consist mainly of questions on: elastic analysis of statically indeterminate beams and frames; stress and strain in thin-walled structures; analysis of stress and strain; the Tresca and von Mises yield criteria; plastic theory of structures.
The paper shall consist mainly of questions on: the thermal and thermomechanical behaviour of engineering materials; the forming, joining, and heat treatment of engineering materials, and the control of microstructure and properties; the influence of manufacturing processes on design and material selection.
The paper shall consist mainly of questions on: fluid dynamics, including boundary layers and internal flows: heat transfer by convection; heat exchangers; thermodynamics, including irreversibility, properties of working fluids, non-ideal cycles, and power generation.
The paper shall consist mainly of questions on: bipolar transistors; operational amplifiers with feedback; power in AC circuits; electrical machines; electromagnetic waves.
The paper shall consist mainly of questions on: control systems; transfer functions; feedback; stability; signal and data analysis; communications; signal and transmission path characteristics; modulation; digitizations of signals.
The paper shall consist mainly of questions on: vector calculus; probability; linear algebra.
The paper shall consist mainly of questions on topics in professional engineering activities as shall from time to time be determined by the Faculty Board, and divided into sections corresponding to those activities. Candidates will be required to answer questions from two sections or, in the case of candidates offering a foreign language, one section. In addition there will be a section on Introductory Business Economics, from which candidates will be required to answer one question.
1. The English Tripos shall consist of two Parts.
2. The scheme of the examination shall be as defined in Regulations 15–18.
3. Public notice of all the variable subjects and of the texts or portions of subjects specified for special study shall be given by the Faculty Board of English before the end of the Easter Term in the year next but one preceding the examination to which they apply; provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination is adversely affected. The Board shall have power when they give notice of the variable subjects selected for a particular examination to announce any consequential restriction on the combination of papers that a candidate may choose to offer.
The Board shall have power to define or limit by supplementary regulations all or any of the subjects of examination, and to modify or alter such supplementary regulations as occasion may require.
4. The following may present themselves for examination in Part I:
5. A student who has obtained honours in Part I of the English Tripos or in another Honours Examination may be a candidate for Part II in the year after or next but one after so obtaining honours, provided that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.44
6. No student shall be a candidate for both Parts, or for either Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
7. No student who has been a candidate for either Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
8. No student who has failed to attain the standard for honours in Part I shall be a candidate for Part II.
9. (a) To conduct the examination in each Part of the Tripos the Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners as they deem appropriate.
(b) The Faculty Board shall have power to nominate Assessors to assist the Examiners for each Part of the Tripos. Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
10. Before the examination there shall be general meetings of the Examiners for Part I and of the Examiners for Part II, when the papers set by each Examiner or Assessor shall be submitted to the whole body of Examiners for their approval, and shall be settled by the Examiners for each Part in common.
11. In each Part the answers to the questions in each paper shall be read by two of the whole body of Examiners and Assessors for that Part.
12. The style and method of the candidates’ answers shall be taken into account.
13. The Examiners for Part I and the Examiners for Part II shall hold separate meetings, at which the class-list for each Part shall be drawn up. In each of these lists the names of the candidates who deserve honours shall be placed in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order.
14. For special excellence in either Part a mark of distinction may be awarded.
15. The papers in Part I shall be as follows:
|
Paper 1. |
English literature and its contexts, 1300–1550 (also serves as Paper 33 in Part II of the English Tripos). |
|
Paper 2. |
English literature and its contexts, 1500–1700 (also serves as Paper 34 in Part II of the English Tripos). |
|
Paper 3. |
English literature and its contexts, 1688–1847 (also serves as Paper 35 in Part II of the English Tripos). |
|
Paper 4. |
English literature and its contexts, 1830 to the present (also serves as Paper 36 in Part II of the English Tripos). |
|
Paper 5. |
Shakespeare (also serves as Paper 37 in Part II of the English Tripos). |
|
Paper 6. |
Literary criticism. |
|
Paper 7. |
European languages and literatures. |
|
Paper 8. |
English language for literature, 1300 to the present. |
|
Paper 9. |
English literature and its contexts, 1300 to the present (open dissertation). |
|
Paper 10. |
Early medieval literature and its contexts (also serves as Paper 14 of Part II of the English Tripos, as Paper O9 of Part II of the Classical Tripos, and as Paper 11 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos). |
|
Paper 11. |
Insular Latin language and literature (Paper 9 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos). |
|
Paper 12. |
Old Norse language and literature (Paper 6 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos). |
|
Paper 13. |
Medieval Welsh language and literature (Paper 7 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos). |
Every paper shall be set for three hours except Papers 6, 7, and 8 which shall be set for three and a half hours, and Paper 9 which shall comprise a dissertation, to be submitted in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 20, the topic of which must fall within the scope of Papers 1–5 but may range across the chronological boundaries of individual papers within this group.
16. Every candidate for Part I shall offer Papers 1 and 5 and
provided that
17. (a) A candidate who intends to offer a portfolio under Regulation 16(ii) shall notify the Director of Undergraduate Studies through his or her Director of Studies, in accordance with detailed arrangements approved by the Board. Such notification shall be not later than a date in the Full Lent Term to be promulgated by the Board in the Michaelmas Term.
(b) A portfolio submitted under Regulation 16(ii) shall consist of three essays, each of not fewer than 1,500 words and not more than 2,000 words in length. Portfolio essays must be on subjects of literary interest which fall within the scope of the paper for which they are substituted. The portfolio of essays as a whole should exhibit a range and substance comparable with that required by the examination paper for which it is substituted. It should show knowledge of work before and after the date specified in the rubric for the paper for which it was substituted. Candidates will be required to declare that the essays are their own work and that they do not contain material already used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose. Where appropriate full and proper acknowledgement must be given to the work of others.
(c) The essays shall be typewritten, in English, with proper attention to style and presentation; they shall be submitted through the candidate's Director of Studies to the Director of Undergraduate Studies, in accordance with detailed arrangements approved by the Board, so as to arrive not later than the last Thursday of the Full Lent Term next preceding the examination. Candidates may be called for viva voce examination in connection with their portfolios.
18. The papers in Part II shall be as follows:
|
Paper 1. |
Practical criticism. |
|
Paper 2. |
Tragedy (also serves as Paper O3 of Part II of the Classical Tripos).46 |
|
Paper 3. |
Chaucer.46 |
|
Paper 4. |
Medieval English literature, 1066–1500 (also serves as Paper 13 of Part II of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos). |
|
Paper 5. |
Special period of English literature (taken from the period after 1500 and before 1700). |
|
Paper 6. |
Special period of English literature (taken from the period after 1700). |
|
Paper 7. |
Special subject I. |
|
Paper 8. |
English moralists. |
|
Paper 9. |
History and theory of literary criticism (also serves as Paper O4 of Part II of the Classical Tripos). |
|
Paper 10. |
Postcolonial and related literatures.46 |
|
Paper 11. |
American literature. |
|
Paper 12. |
Special subject II.46 |
|
Paper 13. |
History of the English language (also serves as Paper 18 of the Linguistics Tripos (Old Regulations)).46,47 |
|
Paper 14. |
Early medieval literature and its contexts (Paper 10 of Part I of the English Tripos). |
|
Paper 15. |
Old English language and literature (Paper 5 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos). |
|
Paper 16. |
Insular Latin language and literature (Paper 9 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos). |
|
Paper 17. |
Old Norse language and literature (Paper 6 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos). |
|
Paper 18a. |
Medieval Welsh language and literature (Paper 7 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos). |
|
Paper 18b. |
Advanced medieval Welsh language and literature (Paper 7 of Part II of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos). |
|
Paper 19a. |
Medieval Irish language and literature (Paper 8 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos). |
|
Paper 19b. |
Advanced medieval Irish language and literature (Paper 8 of Part II of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos). |
|
Paper 20. |
French literature, thought, and history, from 1510 to 1622 (Paper Fr. 6 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos).48 |
|
Paper 21. |
French literature, thought, and history, from 1594 to 1700 (Paper Fr. 7 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 22. |
French literature, thought, and history, from 1690 to 1799 (Paper Fr. 8 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 23. |
French literature, thought, and history, from 1789 to 1898 (Paper Fr. 9 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 24. |
French literature, visual culture, thought, and history, from 1890 to 1958 (Paper Fr. 10 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 25. |
Literature, visual culture, thought, and history in the French-speaking world, since 1945 (Paper Fr. 11 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 26. |
Dante and the culture of his age (Paper It. 7 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 27a. |
Introduction to Neo-Latin literature, from 1350 to 1700 (Paper NL 1 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 27b. |
A special subject in Neo-Latin literature: Marullus, Poliziano, Bèze, and Buchanan (Paper NL 2 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 28. |
A special subject in comparative literature (i) and (ii) (Papers CS 447 and 5 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 29. |
The structure of English (Paper 8 of the Linguistics Tripos).49 |
|
Paper 30. |
A prescribed Greek author or authors, and a prescribed Latin author or authors (Paper A1 of Part II of the Classical Tripos). |
|
Paper 31. |
Prescribed Greek texts (Paper A2 of Part II of the Classical Tripos).50 |
|
Paper 32. |
Prescribed Latin texts (Paper A3 of Part II of the Classical Tripos). |
|
Paper 33. |
English literature and its contexts, 1300–1550 (Paper 1 of Part I of the English Tripos). |
|
Paper 34. |
English literature and its contexts, 1500–1700 (Paper 2 of Part I of the English Tripos). |
|
Paper 35. |
English literature and its contexts, 1688–1847 (Paper 3 of Part I of the English Tripos). |
|
Paper 36. |
English literature and its contexts, 1830 to the present (Paper 4 of Part I of the English Tripos). |
|
Paper 37. |
Shakespeare (Paper 5 of Part I of the English Tripos). |
Each paper shall be set for three hours except Paper 1 which shall be set for three and a half hours. The Faculty Board shall announce in every year, subject to the provisions of Regulation 3, not more than four special subjects for Paper 7, and may in addition announce not more than three special subjects for Paper 12; in each case a candidate may offer not more than one of these subjects. A question paper shall be set for each subject so announced and for which there is a candidate. Every candidate who offers a paper in which there is a choice of subjects shall take only one of these question papers; the candidate's examination entry shall state which subject he or she intends to offer.
19. Every candidate for Part II shall offer:
provided that:
20. (a) A candidate who intends to offer either a compulsory dissertation in Part II under Regulation 19(a), or Paper 9, or an optional dissertation in either Part under Regulation 16(i) or Regulation 19(c), shall submit the proposed topic of the dissertation through his or her Director of Studies to the Director of Undergraduate Studies, in accordance with detailed arrangements approved by the Board, so as to arrive not later than the penultimate Friday of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
(b) The Director of Undergraduate Studies shall communicate the Board's approval or rejection of the proposed topic to the candidate's Director of Studies. When the Board have approved a topic, no change shall be made in it or in a scheme of work approved by the Board without the further approval of the Board. A candidate may submit a revised topic so as to reach the Director of Undergraduate Studies not later than a date in the Full Lent Term to be promulgated by the Board in the Michaelmas Term; topics submitted after that date will be considered by the Board only in the most exceptional circumstances.
(c) The length of a dissertation shall be as follows:
for Part I, not more than 5,000 words in length;
for Part II, not fewer than 6,000 words and not more than 7,500 words in length.
In each case the prescribed length shall include notes and appendices, although appendices beyond the prescribed limit may be allowed in special circumstances, subject to the approval of the Faculty Board given not later than the division of the Lent Term next preceding the examination. Candidates will be required to declare that the dissertation is their own work and that it does not contain material already used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose.
(d) Every dissertation shall be typewritten, in English, with proper attention to style and presentation in accordance with detailed guidelines issued by the Faculty Board; it shall be sent through the candidate's Director of Studies to the Director of Undergraduate Studies, accompanied by a brief synopsis of its contents and a list of the books and articles used in its preparation, and in accordance with detailed arrangements approved by the Board, so as to arrive not later than the second day of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held.
(e) A candidate may be called for viva voce examination in connection with his or her dissertation.
21. At the same time as dissertation topics are submitted through candidates’ Directors of Studies to the Director of Undergraduate Studies, each candidate shall submit the whole scheme of work to be offered in the examination. The Director of Undergraduate Studies shall communicate the Board's approval or rejection of the proposed scheme of work to the candidate's Director of Studies.
22. A candidate for either Part shall be allowed to submit an original composition in English, of not more than 5,000 words (exclusive of notes). Such a composition, if of sufficient merit, may be taken into account by the Examiners in classifying the candidate; they shall have power to examine the candidate upon it viva voce. The submission of non-written material shall not be allowed. Compositions shall be typewritten, and shall be sent through candidates’ Director of Studies to the Director of Undergraduate Studies, in accordance with detailed arrangements approved by the Board, so as to arrive not later than the second day of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held. Candidates will be required to declare that the original composition is their own work and that it does not contain material used to any substantial extent for a comparable academic purpose.
For the purpose of the regulations and supplementary regulations for Part I of the English Tripos, ‘English literature’ shall be understood to mean the literature in English of the British Isles including Ireland. In Papers 1–5 candidates must answer primarily in relation to English literature thus defined, and questions will not be asked, nor may answers be primarily written, on authors other than those who were born, or have spent a substantial part of their lives working, in the British Isles. This will not however preclude the possibility of comparison, where appropriate, with other literature in English (such as American or Commonwealth), provided that greater weight falls on English literature than on other literature. These rules shall also govern the acceptability of topics for period dissertations substituted for Papers 2, 3, and 4, and the open dissertation under Paper 9. No more than one dissertation may be submitted. Candidates submitting a dissertation under Paper 9 are permitted to offer an examination paper which covers the same period as the topic for the dissertation. Candidates substituting a portfolio for Papers 2–4 may not offer a dissertation under Paper 9 on a topic which falls within the scope of the paper for which the portfolio is substituted. More detailed guidance about the acceptability of specific authors as the subjects of examination answers or as the topics of dissertations may be given in a document issued by the Faculty Board of English and revised as necessary from time to time.
Medieval texts shall be prescribed for special study; and passages shall be set from them for translation or comment, or both. The Faculty Board may give notice from time to time of a list of topics on which optional questions will be set. Questions shall be set both on the literature and on the life and thought of the period.
Questions shall be set both on the literature and on the life and thought of the period.51
Questions shall be set both on the literature and on the life and thought of the period.51
Questions shall be set both on the literature and on the life and thought of the period.51
Questions shall be set requiring explanation and discussion of a specified work or specified works. Questions shall also be set on other works of Shakespeare and matters of historical and critical interest relevant to his works.
The paper will be set in two sections. Candidates will be required to answer three questions, including at least one question from each section; in Section B candidates may not answer two questions on the same topic. Section A (Practical criticism) will consist of questions offering passages of English prose or verse from various periods for critical comment. These questions will require close critical analysis of the given passage(s) but may also allow for the raising of general critical and theoretical issues appropriate to the reading of those passages. Approximately half of the questions in this section will invite candidates to consider the passages in the light of the topics specified in Section B; there will be at least one such question corresponding to each of the topics. Section B (Topics) will consist of essay questions on three specified topics. For 2003 the specified topics are: (i) The function of criticism; (ii) Theories of versification; (iii) Writing and the unconscious. The formal examination will last for three and a half hours, of which thirty minutes are assigned for reading-time.
The languages within the scope of this paper are: classical Greek; classical Latin; French; German; Italian; Old English. Candidates will not be required to show knowledge of more than one of these languages, though they may do so if they wish. In each language, except in the case of Old English, two texts (or collections of texts) will be prescribed for study. Candidates will be required to show knowledge of two such texts (except in the case of Old English, where only one text is set).
This paper requires candidates to recognize and describe in English writing from 1300 to the present day; linguistic features (such as syntax, lexis, register, elementary phonetics, rhetoric); the relations between spoken and written Englishes; the historical development and study of the language, in its literary and other varieties; contact between English and other languages. The Faculty Board shall, from time to time, prescribe specified topics, with lists of relevant reading. Candidates will be required to answer on at least one of the specified topics.
The topic of a dissertation to be submitted under this paper must fall within the scope of Papers 1–5. It may be comparative across the period boundaries of the individual papers. The dissertation shall be prepared and submitted in accordance with Regulation 20.
The period covered by this paper is 1066–c. 1350. English, French, and Latin texts shall be prescribed for special study, and passages set from them for translation or explanation or both. Questions shall also be set on English, French, and Latin texts of the period. Candidates will be required to show knowledge of one of these three languages, and of work in at least one other of them, which they may, if they wish, have studied in translation. Candidates are expected to show such knowledge of the life and thought of the period as is necessary for the understanding of its literature.
Passages of English prose and verse for critical comment.
Tragedy ancient and modern in connection and comparison with English Tragedy.
Candidates will be expected to show a full and detailed knowledge of the works of Chaucer. Questions shall be set on those works and on Chaucer's relationship to his contemporaries and to the life and thought of his age.
A specific literary subject shall be prescribed for special study. It shall be of a kind to require reading in early as well as in late medieval English literature and may involve the study of related texts from other languages.
Candidates will be required to show a substantial knowledge of the literature of whatever period is prescribed together with its life and thought.
Candidates will be required to show a substantial knowledge of the literature of whatever period is prescribed together with its life and thought.
The work of an author or of a group of authors, or a literary topic or genre, or a period not already prescribed for Paper 5 or Paper 6, within the field of English literature, shall be prescribed for special study. Relevant texts may be recommended for study from time to time. In accordance with Regulation 18 the Faculty Board may from time to time prescribe a number of such special subjects of which one may be offered by candidates for this paper.
Questions will be set on the history and nature of moral thought, broadly interpreted. Candidates will be invited to show knowledge of a range of literary, philosophical, social, and political writings by authors from Plato to the present, but the paper will normally permit concentration on a particular chronological period or selection of authors. Candidates will also be given opportunities to relate the themes of this paper to their existing interests in poetry, drama, and the novel. From time to time a special topic may be specified for study.
The paper shall comprise historical, critical, and comparative questions on works and problems in the history of literary criticism and also of literary theory from the fourth century bc to the present day. A sufficient number of questions will be set to enable candidates to choose questions on a limited chronological period (including the modern period).
The scope of the paper is, subject to the following qualifications, literature in English outside the British Isles and the United States of America. It includes expatriate nationals publishing in those countries (e.g. Rushdie, d’Aguiar, Lessing). Comparative and incidental reference to British, Irish, American, and foreign language texts is welcome but should not form the greater part of any single answer. Answering on texts in translation is permitted but should not constitute the greater part of answers to the paper as a whole.
The paper will be divided into two sections. Section A will consist of passages for comment from the set texts. A list of set texts will be available from the Faculty Office. Section B will consist of essay questions, enabling comparison between texts from different regions.
The subject covered by this paper is American literature, life, and thought, with special reference to the period from 1820 to the present day. A list of books may be recommended from time to time for special study. All candidates will be expected to show such knowledge of the life and thought of the period as is necessary for understanding its literature.
For a year for which a subject is announced for this paper under Regulation 18, the work of an author or of a group of authors, or a literary topic or genre, or a period not already prescribed for Paper 5, or 6, or 7, shall be prescribed for special study. Relevant foreign texts as well as English texts may be recommended for study from time to time. In accordance with Regulation 18 the Faculty Board may from time to time prescribe a number of such special subjects of which one may be offered by candidates for this paper.
This paper will be concerned with the historical development and structure of the English language and of its internal and extra-territorial varieties. A specified topic will be prescribed for special study.
The paper will be divided into two sections. Section A will contain questions pertaining to the specified topic; Section B will contain essay questions of a more general nature. Candidates will be required to answer one question from Section A and two questions from Section B.
For the purpose of Regulations 19(a) and 19(c) governing the submission of dissertations in Part II of the Tripos, ‘English literature’ shall be understood to mean literature written in the English language (including Old English), works written by authors of the British Isles in other languages, such as Latin or French, and works written in Old Norse and the Medieval Celtic languages. It shall be understood to embrace the English language and such philosophical, historical, and other writing as normally comes within the scope of the English Tripos.
Where a topic is chosen involving comparison with a foreign literature, the dissertation should be primarily on an English literary topic, though there is no objection to comparison with other literature where this is relevant. Where a topic involves comparison between literature and another medium such as music or the visual arts, the weight of the dissertation should likewise fall on literature (which may, for example, include libretti). Discussion of work produced in a medium other than literature is not admissible as the exclusive topic of a dissertation.
More detailed guidance about the acceptability of specific writings as the topic of a dissertation may be given in a document issued by the Faculty Board of English and revised as necessary from time to time.
1. The Geographical Tripos shall consist of three Parts: Part Ia, Part Ib, and Part II.
2. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part Ia:
3. A student may be a candidate for honours in Part Ib in the year after obtaining honours either in Part Ia or in another Honours Examination, provided that he or she has kept four terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
4. A student may be a candidate for honours in Part II:
provided that he or she has kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.52
5. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for any Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
6. No student who has been a candidate for any Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
7. The Faculty Board of Earth Sciences and Geography shall have power to issue from time to time supplementary regulations defining or limiting all or any of the subjects of examination. Due care shall be taken that sufficient notice is given of any alterations of such supplementary regulations.
8. The Faculty Board shall nominate for each Part of the Tripos such number of Examiners as they shall deem sufficient. There shall be two separate bodies of Examiners, one for Part Ia and Part Ib, and one for Part II. There shall be a separate Chairman of Examiners for each body of Examiners.
9. The Faculty Board shall have power to nominate one or more Assessors to assist each body of Examiners. An Assessor may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
10. The questions proposed by each Examiner and Assessor shall be submitted to the whole body of Examiners for approval.
11. The Examiners shall have regard to the style and method of candidates’ answers, and shall give credit for excellence in these respects.
12. In the class-list for each Part of the Tripos the names of those who obtain honours shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions.
13. For special excellence in each Part of the Tripos a mark of distinction may be awarded.
14. In the examination for each Part of the Tripos the Examiners may take account of the laboratory and field work done by candidates during the courses leading to the examination.
15. Notice of prescribed areas shall be published by the Faculty Board in the Reporter before the end of the Easter Term next preceding the examination to which they apply; provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination would be adversely affected.
16. The examination shall consist of five papers as follows:
|
Paper 1. |
Human geography I |
|
Paper 2. |
Human geography II |
|
Paper 3. |
Human geography III |
|
Paper 4. |
Physical geography I |
|
Paper 5. |
Physical geography II |
17. Each paper shall be set for three hours. A candidate for Part Ia shall
The Examiners shall have power to examine candidates viva voce on their submitted work.
18. The papers for Part Ib shall be as follows:
|
Group A |
|
|
Paper 1. |
Human geography I. Cities. |
|
Paper 2. |
Human geography II. Understanding the economy: contemporary geographies of capitalism. |
|
Paper 3. |
Human geography III. Development. |
|
Paper 4. |
Human geography IV. Geography and public policy. |
|
Paper 5. |
Human geography V. Culture and society. |
|
Group B |
|
|
Paper 6. |
Physical and environmental geography I. Earth observation. |
|
Paper 7. |
Physical and environmental geography II. Glacial processes, landforms, and sediments. |
|
Paper 8. |
Physical and environmental geography III. Environmental hazards. |
|
Paper 9. |
Physical and environmental geography IV. Catchment systems. |
|
Paper 10. |
Physical and environmental geography V. Biogeography and biogeomorphology. |
Each paper shall consist of either a written paper of three hours’ duration or a written paper of two hours’ duration together with the submission of course-work; the mode of examination of each paper, details of the course-work required of candidates, and the arrangements for the submission of the course-work shall be published by the Faculty Board not later than the division of the Easter Term next preceding the examination.
19. A candidate for Part Ib shall
The Examiners shall have power to examine candidates viva voce on their submitted work.
20. The papers for Part II shall be as follows:
|
Paper 1. |
Human geography I. |
|
Paper 2. |
Human geography II. |
|
Paper 3. |
A prescribed topic or topics in geography I. |
|
Paper 4. |
A prescribed topic or topics in geography II. |
|
Paper 5. |
The geography of a prescribed area or areas I. |
|
Paper 6. |
The geography of a prescribed area or areas II. |
|
Paper 7. |
Historical geography I. |
|
Paper 8. |
Historical geography II. |
|
Paper 9. |
A prescribed topic or topics in geography III. |
|
Paper 10. |
A prescribed topic or topics in geography IV. |
|
Paper 11. |
A prescribed topic or topics in environmental geography. |
|
Paper 12. |
Physical geography I. |
|
Paper 13. |
Physical geography II. |
|
Paper 14. |
A prescribed topic or topics in geography V. |
|
Paper 15. |
A prescribed topic or topics in geography VI. |
Each paper shall consist of either a written paper of three hours’ duration or a written paper of two hours’ duration together with the submission of course-work; the mode of examination of each paper, details of the course-work required of candidates, and the arrangements for the submission of the course-work shall be published by the Faculty Board not later than the division of the Easter Term next preceding the examination.
21. A candidate for Part II shall offer any four papers from the papers specified in Regulation 20.
22. Except as provided in (a) and (b) below, every candidate for Part II shall send to the Chairman of Examiners so as to arrive not later than the first Tuesday of the Full Term in which the examination is to be held, for submission to the Examiners, a dissertation on some geographical subject. This regulation shall not apply to:
23. Every candidate submitting a dissertation or a critical review essay under Regulation 22(b) shall obtain the approval of the Head of the Department for the subject of the proposed dissertation not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
24. A dissertation shall be of not less than 8,000 words and not more than 10,000 words in length, shall be in typewritten form, unless previous permission has been obtained from the Chairman of Examiners through a candidate's Tutor to present the dissertation in manuscript, and shall be accompanied by a declaration as specified in Regulation 25. The dissertation shall be taken into consideration by the Examiners, who shall have power to examine a candidate upon it viva voce.
25. When submitting records of practical exercises for Part Ia (Regulation 17(b)), or essays and records of practical exercises, and dissertation proposals for Part Ib (Regulation 19(b)), or course-work or a dissertation for Part II (Regulations 20 and 24), or a critical review essay for Part II (Regulation 22(b)), a candidate will be required to sign a declaration that the work submitted is his or her own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration (full and proper acknowledgement being given of the work of others), and that it does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose; if two or more candidates have undertaken practical exercises in collaboration, they will each be required to indicate the extent of their contribution.
People, space, and geographies of difference. This paper introduces students to concepts of globalization and the contemporary restructuring of the economy and society.
Historical geography. This paper introduces students to some central themes in the historical geography of the modern world.
Society, environment, and development. This paper introduces students to key concepts in the fields of environment and development, and explores their significance for society in a variety of contexts and at a range of different scales.
Environmental processes. This paper focuses on present-day processes occurring in the atmosphere, the oceans, and at the earth's surface.
Environmental change through time. This paper introduces the nature and magnitude of environmental changes at timescales ranging from decades/centuries to the Late Cenozoic.
For each of these papers either one or two topics/areas will be prescribed. In a year in which two topics/areas are prescribed, the paper will be divided into two sections, one relating to each of the two topics/areas; candidates will be required to confine their answers to one section.
1. The Historical Tripos shall consist of two Parts. A separate class-list shall be published for each Part.
2. The Faculty Board of History shall have power to define or limit by supplementary regulations all or any of the subjects of the examination; to determine the credit that shall be assigned to such subjects respectively; to mark out the lines of study that are to be pursued by candidates; and to modify or alter any such supplementary regulations as occasion may require. They shall also have power to publish from time to time lists of books recommended to the candidates.
3. Before the end of the Easter Term each year the Faculty Board shall give notice of the variable subjects for the examinations to be held in the academical year next but one following; provided that
4. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part I:
5. A student who has obtained honours in another Honours Examination may be a candidate for honours in Part II in the year next after or next but one after so obtaining honours; provided that the student has kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
6. An Affiliated Student may be a candidate for honours either in Part I or in Part II as allowed by the Faculty Board in accordance with the regulations for Affiliated Students.
7. No student shall be a candidate for both Parts, or for either Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
8. No student who has been a candidate for either Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
9. The Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners as they may deem sufficient for each Part of the Tripos.
10. The Faculty Board shall have power to nominate one or more Assessors to assist the Examiners in either Part of the Tripos. Assessors shall, if required, set the paper or papers assigned to them, shall look over the work of the candidates therein, and shall present a report to the Examiners. They may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
11. The Examiners shall have regard to the style and method of the candidates’ answers and shall give credit for excellence in these respects.
12. In each Part, the names of the candidates who obtain honours shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. A mark of distinction shall be affixed to the names of those candidates placed in the first class whose work either in a part or in the whole of the examination is of special merit. Explanation of the mark shall be limited to the words ‘With distinction’.
13. The scheme of examination for Part I shall be:
|
Paper 1. |
Themes and sources. |
|
Paper 2. |
British political and constitutional history, 380–1100. |
|
Paper 3. |
British political and constitutional history, 1050–1509. |
|
Paper 4. |
British political and constitutional history, 1485–1750. |
|
Paper 5. |
British political and constitutional history, 1700–1914. |
|
Paper 6. |
British political and constitutional history, since 1867. |
|
Paper 7. |
British economic and social history, 380–1100. |
|
Paper 8. |
British economic and social history, 1050–c. 1500. |
|
Paper 9. |
British economic and social history, c. 1500–1750. |
|
Paper 10. |
British economic and social history, 1700–1914. |
|
Paper 11. |
British economic and social history, since c. 1870. |
|
Paper 12. |
European history, 776 bc–ad 69. |
|
Paper 13. |
European history, 31 bc–ad 900. |
|
Paper 14. |
European history, 900–c. 1215. |
|
Paper 15. |
European history, 1200–1520. |
|
Paper 16. |
European history, 1450–1760. |
|
Paper 17. |
European history, 1715–1890. |
|
Paper 18. |
European history, since 1890.53 |
|
Paper 19. |
History of political thought to c. 1700 (also serves as Paper O6 of Part II of the Classical Tripos and Paper Pol. 1 of the Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos).54 |
|
Paper 20. |
History of political thought from c. 1700 to c. 1890 (also serves as Paper Pol. 2 of the Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos).54 |
|
Paper 21. |
Empires and world history from the fifteenth century to the First World War.54,55 |
|
Paper 22. |
North American history from 1607 to 1865. |
|
Paper 23. |
A subject in any aspect of history specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.54 |
|
Paper 24. |
A subject in any aspect of history specified by the Faculty Board from time to time. |
Each paper shall be of three hours’ duration, except Paper 1. The examination for Paper 1 shall consist of the submission of an essay, on a topic chosen from a list of topics announced by the Faculty Board; the length of the essay and the arrangements for its submission shall be prescribed by the Faculty Board from time to time.
14. Candidates for Part I shall offer papers as follows:
provided that
15. The scheme of examination for Part II shall be:
|
Paper 1. |
Sources paper. |
|
Paper 2. |
Essay paper. |
|
Paper 3. |
The history of political thought to c. 1700 (also serves as Paper Pol. 14 of the Social and Political Sciences Tripos). |
|
Paper 4. |
The history of political thought from c. 1700 to c. 1890 (also serves as Paper Pol. 15 of the Social and Political Sciences Tripos).56 |
|
Paper 5. |
Political philosophy and the history of political thought since c. 1890 (also serves as Paper Pol. 6 of the Social and Political Sciences Tripos). |
|
Paper 6. |
A subject in economic history specified by the Faculty Board. |
|
Paper 7. |
A subject in the history of international relations specified by the Faculty Board. |
|
Paper 8. |
A subject in the history of ideas specified by the Faculty Board from time to time. |
|
Paper 9. |
A subject in comparative and thematic studies specified by the Faculty Board from time to time. |
|
Paper 10. |
A subject in comparative and thematic studies specified by the Faculty Board from time to time. |
|
Paper 11. |
A subject in comparative economic and social history specified by the Faculty Board from time to time. |
|
Paper 12. |
A subject in ancient history specified by the Faculty Board.57 |
|
Paper 13. |
A subject in medieval English history specified by the Faculty Board. |
|
Paper 14. |
A subject in medieval European history specified by the Faculty Board. |
|
Paper 15. |
A subject in English or European or English and European history in the medieval period specified by the Faculty Board from time to time. |
|
Paper 16. |
A subject in English or European or English and European history in the medieval period specified by the Faculty Board from time to time. |
|
Paper 17. |
A subject in English or European or English and European history in the early modern period specified by the Faculty Board from time to time. |
|
Paper 18. |
A subject in English or European or English and European history in the early modern period specified by the Faculty Board from time to time. |
|
Paper 19. |
A subject in modern English history specified by the Faculty Board. |
|
Paper 20. |
A subject in modern European history specified by the Faculty Board.56 |
|
Paper 21. |
A subject in English or European or English and European history in the modern period specified by the Faculty Board from time to time. |
|
Paper 22. |
A subject in English or European or English and European history in the modern period specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.56 |
|
Paper 23. |
A subject in English or European or English and European history specified by the Faculty Board from time to time. |
|
Paper 24. |
A subject in English or European or English and European history specified by the Faculty Board from time to time. |
|
Paper 25. |
A subject in African history specified by the Faculty Board. |
|
Paper 26. |
A subject in Asian history specified by the Faculty Board.58 |
|
Paper 27. |
A subject in North American history specified by the Faculty Board from time to time. |
|
Paper 28. |
A subject in extra-European history specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.56 |
|
Paper 29. |
A subject in extra-European history specified by the Faculty Board from time to time. |
|
Paper 30. |
Historical argument and practice. |
Not more than one subject shall be specified for each of Papers 6–30.
16. Candidates for Part II shall offer papers, or papers and a dissertation, as follows:
17. (a) A candidate for Part II who wishes to offer a dissertation under Regulation 16 shall submit an application, including the title of the proposed dissertation and a statement of the scheme of papers to be offered in the examination. Applications, signed by the candidate's Director of Studies, shall be submitted to the Academic Secretary of the Faculty so as to arrive not later than the tenth day of July next preceding the examination. Applications submitted after that date will be considered by the Board only in the most exceptional circumstances.
(b) Each candidate shall obtain the approval of the proposed title by the Faculty Board not later than the last day of August preceding the examination. When the Faculty Board have approved a title, no change shall be made to it without the further approval of the Board. A candidate may submit a revised title so as to reach the Academic Secretary of the Faculty not later than the division of the Lent Term; titles submitted after that date will be considered by the Board only in the most exceptional circumstances.
(c) A dissertation shall be not less than 7,000 words and not more than 15,000 words in length, shall show knowledge of primary sources, and shall give full reference to all sources used.59 Each dissertation shall be typewritten unless previous permission has been obtained from the Faculty Board through a candidate’s Director of Studies to present the dissertation in manuscript. Candidates will be required to provide a brief synopsis of the contents of the dissertation, and to declare that the dissertation is their own original work and that it does not contain material already used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose.
(d) A dissertation shall be submitted through the candidate's Director of Studies to the Academic Secretary of the Faculty, in accordance with arrangements approved by the Board, so as to arrive not later than the first Friday of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held.
(e) The Examiners shall have power, if they consider that a dissertation is not sufficiently legible, to require that it be resubmitted in typescript.
(f) A candidate may be called for viva voce examination on his or her dissertation and on the general field of knowledge within which it falls.
The purpose of this paper is to give candidates experience of problems in the interpretation of historical sources within a thematic framework. Each candidate will be required to select an option from a list of options announced by the Faculty Board, and each option will include a number of essay topics. An essay on a topic chosen from a list announced by the Faculty Board will be submitted. Some of the topics may involve the use of sources in a foreign language.
In these papers candidates will be required to show knowledge of political and constitutional aspects and also of general aspects of English, Irish, Scottish, and Welsh history where relevant to the period studied. Candidates will be expected to show evidence of their ability to use and interpret contemporary documents. In each paper three questions must be answered, but no question will be specified as compulsory.
In these papers candidates will be required to show knowledge of economic, social, and cultural aspects and also of general aspects of English, Irish, Scottish, and Welsh history where relevant to the period studied. Candidates will be expected to show evidence of their ability to use and interpret contemporary documents. In each paper three questions must be answered, but no question will be specified as compulsory.
These papers will survey European history in the periods concerned, in its political, constitutional, cultural, economic, and social aspects. Candidates will also be required to show knowledge of general aspects of European history. In each paper candidates will be required to answer three questions.
Papers 17 and 18 will each be set in two sections. In one section the major emphasis will be on political and constitutional history; in the other section the major emphasis will be on economic, social, intellectual, and cultural history. Candidates will be required to answer three questions, at least one question to be taken from each section.
These papers will deal with political ideas and arguments in relation to the general historical contexts in which they arose. Each paper will be divided into two sections. Section A will consist of questions on prescribed texts. The list of these texts and of recommended secondary reading to accompany them is lodged in the Faculty Office as the Faculty's official book list. Section B will be designed to test knowledge of a series of themes of importance in the history of political thought in the period covered by the paper. Each of these themes, defined by a group of texts, is accompanied by a list of secondary reading relevant to the understanding of the theme concerned. These lists of primary and secondary sources are lodged in the Faculty Office as the Faculty's official book lists. The questions set in Section B of each paper will be derived from, and confined to, these themes. In each paper three questions must be answered; one question, but not more than one, must be taken from Section B.
This paper will deal comparatively with the growth of political, economic, and cultural relations between Europe and the rest of the world since 1400; and with their effects in world history. The subject will consist of an historical introduction to the institutions and culture of the major societies of Africa and Asia; comparative analysis of the motives and forms of the expanding wealth and power of Europe; the effects of European expansion upon indigenous societies and the emergence of modern nationalisms; the politics and economics of European colonization and the development of colonial nationalism in the Americas (excluding the United States after 1776), Australasia, and North and South Africa; the general theory of imperialism and nationalism in the modern world.
This paper will concentrate on the history of those parts of North America which now form the United States. Candidates will be required to answer three questions.
This paper will, until further notice, be a paper entitled ‘The West and the “Third World” from the First World War to the present day’. The paper will survey the historical interaction between the West and the ‘Third World’ since 1918 in its political, economic, and strategic aspects. It will deal with the effects of world economic fluctuations and of the two World Wars on Western societies and the development of modern nationalist movements; Western attempts at political and strategic adjustment including the process of decolonization; the emergence of the ‘new states’ and their evolution since independence; the nature and relevance of modern theories of imperialism, neo-colonialism, and under-development. Attention will be given to those aspects of the social and economic structure of overseas societies that are pertinent to the explanation of major political trends.
This paper will, until further notice, be a paper entitled ‘The history of the United States from 1865’. The paper will concentrate on the history of those parts of North America which now form the United States. Candidates will be required to answer three questions.
Each candidate shall choose one special subject from a list of special subjects published by the Faculty Board. For each of the subjects primary sources will be specified, some of which may be in a foreign language. A candidate will be required to take one three-hour examination paper and to submit an essay of 5,000 to 6,000 words. The examination paper will include extracts from the specified primary sources and will require commentary by the candidate. For the essay candidates will be required to select an option from a list of options announced by the Faculty Board and to discuss an historical issue with reference to the primary sources specified for the special subject.
These papers will deal with political ideas and arguments in relation to the general historical contexts in which they arose. Each paper will be divided into two sections. Section A will consist of questions on prescribed texts. The list of these texts and of recommended secondary reading to accompany them is lodged in the Faculty Office as the Faculty's official book list. Section B will be designed to test knowledge of a series of themes of importance in the history of political thought in the period covered by the paper. Each of these themes, defined by a group of texts, is accompanied by a list of secondary reading relevant to the understanding of the theme concerned. These lists of primary and secondary sources are lodged in the Faculty Office as the Faculty's official book lists. The questions set in Section B of each paper will be derived from, and confined to, these themes. In each paper three questions must be answered; one question, but not more than one, must be taken from Section B.
This paper will explore the central texts and key ideas of twentieth-century political thought, looking at both analytical concepts and historical context. It is divided into two parts, Section A covering authors and their texts, and Section B a variety of themes in contemporary political philosophy. Section A will consist of questions on prescribed texts, the list of which, with recommended secondary reading, is lodged in the Faculty Office and published from time to time on its website as the official booklist. Section B will consist of questions on political concepts, the list of which, with recommended reading, is lodged in the Faculty Office and published from time to time on its website as the official booklist. Students are required to answer three questions, taking at least one from each section.
This paper will, until further notice, be a paper entitled ‘The history of Africa from 1800 to the present day’. The paper will deal with the history of the entire African continent. Candidates will be expected to show a general grasp of the processes of African history including the principles of African social, economic, and political organization, the growth of African states and empires, the changes brought about by European influences, the emergence of modern nationalism, the terms of decolonization, and the problems of post-colonial government and economy. While candidates will be allowed to give special attention to one or more geographical regions, they will also be given the opportunity to draw comparisons between them. The paper is not divided into sections, but for purposes of both specialization and comparison the continent will be considered to have the four following regions: North and North East Africa, including central and eastern Sudan, Ethiopia, and Somalia; South and South Central Africa, including Angola and Mozambique; East Africa, including Rwanda and Burundi; Western Africa, including the western Sudanic zone and Zaire (Congo).
This paper will, until further notice, be a paper entitled ‘The history of Latin America in the colonial period, c. 1500–1830’.
This paper aims to provide an opportunity for candidates to reflect on broad issues of historical argument and practice arising out of their work for all three years of the Historical Tripos, but especially Part II. The paper is a means of enabling candidates to raise and discuss fundamental questions which relate their specialist knowledge to more general themes of historical inquiry and explanation. The focus of this paper, as distinct from other Part II papers, is on understanding the conceptual, historiographical, and methodological dimensions of historical argument and practice. However, the paper also fundamentally requires candidates to develop their understanding of these conceptual, historiographical, and methodological issues in relation to their work for their other Part II papers, for example by critically evaluating the merits of different approaches in relation to the more specific and empirical material that they encounter elsewhere in the Tripos. The questions will be designed to encourage broad discussion of issues derived from, and relevant to, papers set in Part II, and will also allow candidates to draw upon their wider reading, done within and outside Parts I and II. The paper will offer a choice of questions, from which candidates will be required to answer one.
1. The History of Art Tripos shall consist of three Parts, Part I, Part IIa, and Part IIb.
2. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part I:
3. A student who has obtained honours in Part I of the History of Art Tripos or in another Honours Examination may be a candidate for honours in Part IIa in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she has kept four terms and that nine complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.60
4. A student who has obtained honours in an Honours Examination other than Part I of the History of Art Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part IIb in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she has kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.60
5. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for any Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
6. No student who has been a candidate for any Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
7. The Faculty Board of Architecture and History of Art shall nominate such number of Examiners as they deem sufficient for each Part of the Tripos.
8. The Faculty Board shall have power to nominate one or more Assessors to assist the Examiners in any of the subjects in each Part of the Tripos. If required to do so, Assessors shall set papers in the subject or subjects assigned to them, shall mark the answers of the candidates in those papers, shall assess essays and dissertations, and shall advise the Examiners on the performance of candidates in the examination. Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
9. The questions proposed by each Examiner and Assessor shall be submitted to the whole body of Examiners for approval.
10. The Faculty Board shall have power:
11. Public notice of subjects, special periods, and books prescribed under the following regulations or under any supplementary regulations for the Tripos shall be given by the Faculty Board (a) for Part I, before the end of the Easter Term of the year next preceding the examination to which they apply, and (b) for Part IIa and Part IIb, before the end of the Easter Term next but one preceding the examination to which they apply; provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination is adversely affected.
12. There shall be a separate class-list for each Part. In each list the names of candidates who deserve honours shall be placed in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order. A mark of distinction may be awarded for special excellence.
13. The scheme of examination for Part I shall be:
|
|
Paper 1. |
The objects of art history. |
|
|
Papers 2 and 3. |
The making of art. |
|
|
Papers 4 and 5. |
The meaning of architecture and art. |
Papers 3 and 5 shall each consist of reproductions of works of art requiring comment and interpretation.
Each candidate shall offer all five papers and shall submit a Part I short dissertation, as prescribed in Regulation 18, on a subject approved by the Faculty Board relating to some aspect of art or architecture in or around Cambridge.
14. The scheme of examination for Part IIa and Part IIb shall be:
|
|
Paper 1. |
Approaches to the history of art, with reference to works of criticism. |
|
|
Paper 2. |
The display of art. |
|
|
Papers 3–24. |
Such number of pairs of papers on special subjects as the Faculty Board shall announce from time to time in accordance with Regulation 10. There shall be not less than eight and not more than eleven pairs of such papers on special subjects. Each pair of papers shall deal with a particular person, subject, or period in the history of art. In each pair of papers, the second paper shall consist of reproductions of works of art requiring comment and interpretation. |
15. A candidate for Part IIa shall offer Paper 1 and two pairs of papers on special subjects.
16. A candidate for Part IIb
17. A candidate shall not offer in any Part of the Tripos a paper that he or she has previously offered in another University examination.
18. (a) Each candidate for Part I shall submit the proposed title of his or her Part I short dissertation for approval by the Faculty Board. Titles shall be submitted to the Secretary of the Department of History of Art so as to arrive not later than the division of the Lent Term next preceding the examination.
(b) Each candidate for Part IIa shall submit a statement of the scheme of papers to be offered in the examination to the Secretary of the Department of History of Art, so as to arrive not later than the second Monday of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
(c) Each candidate for Part IIb shall submit the proposed title of his or her Part IIb dissertation for approval by the Faculty Board. Titles shall be submitted to the Secretary of the Department of History of Art, so as to arrive not later than the last day of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
(d) The Secretary of the Faculty Board shall communicate the Board's approval or rejection of a proposed dissertation title to each candidate. When the Board have approved a title, no change shall be made to it or, in the case of Part IIa or Part IIb, to the candidate's scheme of papers, without the further approval of the Board.
(e) The length of a Part I short dissertation or a Part II dissertation shall be as follows:
A short dissertation submitted by a candidate for Part I shall be of not more than 5,000 words in length. A dissertation submitted by a candidate for Part IIb shall be of not less than 7,000 words and not more than 9,000 words in length.
In each case the prescribed length shall include notes and appendices, but not bibliography. Each dissertation shall be printed or typewritten.
(f) (i) Part I short dissertations shall be submitted to the Secretary of the Department of History of Art, in accordance with detailed arrangements approved by the Faculty Board, so as to arrive not later than the Friday after the Division of the Easter Term in which the examination is to be held.
(ii) Two copies of the Part IIb dissertation shall be submitted to the Secretary of the Department of History of Art, in accordance with detailed arrangements approved by the Faculty Board, so as to arrive not later than the first day of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held.
Each candidate submitting a dissertation will be required to sign a declaration that the work submitted is his or her own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration, and that it does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose.
The course for this paper consists of a survey of Western (and some non-Western) art, which introduces students to the development of the visual arts. It provides an opportunity to study the material covered at first hand, by using the resources of the Fitzwilliam Museum and other Cambridge collections, and in relation to its historical and artistic background.
These papers are concerned with painting and sculpture; the Faculty Board may prescribe specified artists, or specified subjects or periods, for special study. The first half of the course deals with the processes and attitudes which have shaped the world of images, such as methods and materials, the creative process, and notions of quality and taste, as well as the reproduction of images. The course introduces students to such questions, and focuses on specific artists, periods, and traditions. The second half of the course deals with sculpture; it covers various topics, such as techniques and materials, classical sculpture and its legacy, and more modern developments.
The course for these papers is divided into two halves, dealing respectively with traditions of representation and architectural meaning; the Faculty Board may prescribe specified artists or periods for special study. The course aims to provide an awareness of changing attitudes to architecture and art in Western Europe. Emphasis is placed on close critical study of a range of key examples, as well as their context. The first part of the course covers various topics in the study of the visual arts, focusing on the content and interpretation of the figurative arts. The second part covers areas such as the theory and use of classical orders, building typology, and the relationship between design and construction.
This paper will deal with the influence of writers of classical antiquity upon the Renaissance approach to art and architecture; with changing attitudes towards both antiquity and the Middle Ages in the eighteenth century; with nineteenth-century and twentieth-century theoretical and critical approaches to art and architecture; and with recent developments in art historical methods, the growth of connoisseurship, formal and stylistic criticism, and sociological and iconographical interpretations of works of art and architecture.
1. The Land Economy Tripos shall consist of three Parts: Part Ia, Part Ib, and Part II.
2. A student may be a candidate for honours in Part Ia if he or she has kept one term, provided that three complete terms have not passed after the student's first term of residence.
3. A student who has obtained honours in Part Ia or in another Honours Examination may be a candidate for honours in Part Ib in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she has kept four terms and that nine complete terms have not passed after the student's first term of residence.61
4. A student who has obtained honours in Part Ib or in another Honours Examination may be a candidate for honours in Part II in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she has kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after the student's first term of residence.61
5. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for any Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
6. No student who has been a candidate for honours in any Part shall again be a candidate for honours in the same Part.
7. There shall be two separate bodies of Examiners, one for Part Ia, and one for Part Ib and Part II. In each case, the Board of Land Economy shall nominate such number of Examiners as they shall deem sufficient.
8. The Board of Land Economy shall have power to nominate one or more Assessors to assist the Examiners in any of the subjects of the Tripos. Each Assessor shall propose questions in the papers assigned to him or her by the Examiners, shall look over the answers of the candidates to those questions, and shall report thereon to the Examiners. An Assessor may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
9. Each body of Examiners shall elect one of their number to act as Chairman.
10. The questions proposed by each Examiner or Assessor shall be submitted to the whole body of Examiners for approval.
11. There shall be a separate class-list for each Part of the Tripos. In each list the names of those who obtain honours shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order. For special excellence a mark of distinction may be awarded.
12. The papers for the Land Economy Tripos, which shall be divided into Groups I–V, shall be as follows:
|
Paper 1. |
Economics. |
|
Paper 2. |
Public law. |
|
Paper 3. |
Accounting and data evaluation. |
|
Paper 4. |
Land, environment, and structural change. |
|
Paper 5. |
Environmental economics, law, and policy. |
|
Paper 6. |
Fundamentals of finance and investment. |
|
Paper 7. |
Regional economics. |
|
Paper 8. |
The law of real property: principles, policy, and economic implications. |
|
Paper 9. |
Private law. |
|
Paper 10. |
The built environment. |
|
Paper 11. |
Land and urban economics. |
|
Paper 12. |
Law and economics. |
|
Paper 13. |
Landlord and tenant law. |
|
Paper 14. |
Planning law and policy. |
|
Paper 15. |
Advanced techniques in finance and investment for real estate. |
|
Paper 16. |
Agriculture, forestry, and rural development. |
|
Paper 17. |
Land policy and development economics. |
The subject of each paper shall be examined by means of a paper of three hours’ duration, except Paper 4, for which the paper shall be of two hours’ duration. Additionally, the examination for each of Papers 3, 4, 6, and 15 shall include submission of a report on a project undertaken by the candidate; the work to be undertaken for the project, and the arrangements for the submission of the report, shall be prescribed from time to time by the Board of Land Economy.
13. A candidate for honours in Part Ia shall offer all four papers from Group I.
14. A candidate for honours in Part Ib shall offer papers as follows:
provided that
15. The Board of Land Economy shall have power to grant exemption from the requirement to offer Paper 3 to any candidate for honours in Part Ib under Regulation 14(b) who satisfies the Board that he or she has passed an examination of an acceptable standard in statistics or quantitative methods. Application for such exemption shall be made in writing through the candidate's Tutor to the Secretary of the Board of Land Economy not later than the end of the second week of the Full Michaelmas Term preceding the examination; the candidate shall be notified of the Board's decision not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term.
16. Candidates for honours in Part II shall offer papers, or papers and a dissertation, as follows:
17. A dissertation offered under Regulation 16 shall be submitted in accordance with the following provisions:
18. The Board of Land Economy shall have power to make supplementary regulations defining all or any of the subjects of examination, and to modify, alter, or withdraw such supplementary regulations as they see fit, due care being taken that sufficient notice is given of any change.
An introduction to economic concepts and theory and to the economic environment in which the private sector, governments, and public organizations operate.
A study of constitutional and administrative law, including the European Union, Parliament, the Executive, next step agencies, quangos and other government agencies, local government, and judicial review.
An introduction to principles of accounting and data evaluation for use in private business and public organizations.
The examination for this paper includes the submission of a report on a project (see below).
Major economic, demographic, institutional, and technological changes and their impact upon the natural and built environments of the United Kingdom. The examination for this paper includes the submission of a report on a project (see below).
Principles of environmental economics and law, environmental policy and policy analysis, urban and rural environmental management.
An introduction to the analytical techniques for identifying risk/return opportunities in real estate and other financial markets, and the different types of funding/investment strategies available to real estate professionals.
The examination for this paper includes the submission of a report on a project (see below).
Theories relating to regional growth and the economic analysis of regional development and policies designed to influence patterns of growth and development. The term ‘region’ is defined broadly to include international trading blocs, nations, and regions within a particular country.
An introduction to land law in England and Wales, including estates, tenure, title, registration systems, mortgages, and other interests in land.
Principles of contract and tort, introduction to company law.
Elements of building design and construction and the impact of social, economic, legal, and technological factors on the built environment.
The economics of land markets and policies for public intervention in land markets, urban economics, the economics of housing and housing policy, and commercial property.
The relationship between the disciplines of law and economics, including economic theories and analysis of law, the part played by economic theory in legal reasoning, the role of law in allocating resources and in correcting market failures, and economic and legal theories of value and of compensation.
The land law of England and Wales of particular relevance to the relationship of landlord and tenant: common law of leases and of the rights and obligations of the parties to leases; the statutory regulation of residential, business, and agricultural tenancies; and homelessness.
The law, administration, practice, and theory of land use planning in Great Britain.
An introduction to advanced methods in the valuation and financing of real estate, mixed asset portfolio allocation, and risk management.
The examination for this paper includes the submission of a report on a project (see below).
The development and current patterns of agriculture, forestry, and the rural sector generally in the United Kingdom and an analysis of policies directly related to rural development.
The role of land, agriculture, and natural resources in the growth and development of low income countries and their relationships to richer countries.
The project to be undertaken for each of these papers shall be specified by the Board of Land Economy and announced not later than the division of the Lent Term. Candidates will be required to submit in typescript, by a date to be announced by the Board, an account of the project in the form of an extended essay. This account, which must be in English, should not exceed 4,000 words in length (including notes, but excluding appendices and bibliography).63 It should report the statistical and other sources and techniques used by the candidate as well as presenting the candidate's results and conclusions. Each candidate will be required to sign a declaration that the project and the report on it are his or her own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration, and that the report does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose; if two or more candidates have undertaken a project in collaboration, they will each be required to indicate the extent of their contribution.
1. The Law Tripos shall consist of three Parts: Part Ia, Part Ib, and Part II.
2. A student may be a candidate for honours in Part Ia if he or she has kept one term, provided that three complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
3. The following may be candidates for honours in Part Ib:
4. The Faculty Board of Law may grant to a student, who has passed with sufficient credit before coming into residence an examination in law the standard and scope of which are approved by the Faculty Board, the privilege of being a candidate for honours in Part Ib earlier than as aforesaid, provided that the student has kept one term.
5. Students who have obtained honours in Part Ib of the Law Tripos and have kept seven terms may be candidates for honours in Part II as follows:
6. In order to be a candidate for Part II under Regulation 5(a) a student shall produce evidence to the Secretary of the Faculty Board to demonstrate that during the academical year next before the year of candidature he or she satisfactorily completed a course of study in a member country of the European Community at a university approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board.
7. A student who wishes to study abroad in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 6 shall make application on a form approved by the Faculty Board and obtainable from the Faculty Office. An application shall be submitted through the student's Tutor to the Secretary of the Faculty Board so as to arrive not later than the end of the first quarter of the Michaelmas Term of the academical year next preceding that which the student proposes to spend abroad. The Secretary shall inform each student as soon as possible whether his or her application is approved.
8. A student who has obtained honours in Part Ib under Regulation 4 may be a candidate for honours in Part II,64 provided that he or she has kept four terms.
The Faculty Board may grant to a student, who has passed with sufficient credit before coming into residence an examination in law the standard and scope of which are approved by the Faculty Board, the privilege of being a candidate for honours in Part II earlier than as aforesaid and without having passed any examination after coming into residence, provided that the student has kept one term.
A student who has obtained honours in Part II under this regulation shall be qualified to proceed to the B.A. Degree when he or she has kept six terms, provided that a student who satisfies the Examiners for the LL.M. Examination before completing six terms’ residence, and who elects to proceed to the LL.M. Degree, shall not also be entitled to proceed to the B.A. Degree.
9. A candidate who, under arrangements approved by the Faculty Board of Law, has spent not less than six terms studying at the University of Paris II and has qualified for the degree of Maîtrise en droit of that University shall be deemed thereby to have obtained honours in Part II of the Law Tripos. A list containing the names of persons so qualified shall be certified by the Chairman of the Faculty Board of Law and published in the Reporter.
10. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for any Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
11. No student who has been a candidate for honours in any Part shall again be a candidate for honours in the same Part.
12. Subject to the provisions of Regulation 10, a student who is not eligible to be a candidate for honours shall be entitled, provided that he or she has kept four terms at least, to take the examination for either Part Ib or Part II as a candidate not for honours.
13. There shall be three separate bodies of Examiners, one for Part Ia, one for Part Ib, and one for Part II. For each Part, the Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners as they shall deem sufficient to conduct the examination.
14. The Faculty Board shall have power to nominate one or more Assessors to examine in any of the subjects of the Tripos. Assessors shall be required to set the paper or papers in the subjects assigned to them and to present such written reports to the Examiners as may be required. Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
15. There shall be a separate class-list for each Part of the Tripos. In each list the names of the successful candidates shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order. In each class-list a mark of distinction shall be affixed to the names of those candidates placed in the first class whose work is of special merit. In the class-list for Part II the symbol (e) shall be placed against the names of those candidates who have taken the examination under Regulation 5(a).
16. The names of candidates who have satisfied the Examiners under Regulation 12 shall be published in an alphabetical list headed ‘The following (who are not candidates for honours) have attained the honours standard’; and such candidates shall be deemed to have been granted an allowance towards the Ordinary B.A. Degree.
17. The Examiners may grant an allowance towards the Ordinary B.A. Degree to a candidate who has failed under Regulation 12 to attain the honours standard.
18. The papers for the Law Tripos which shall be divided into Groups I–IV shall be as follows:
|
Paper 1. |
Civil law I. |
|
Paper 2. |
Constitutional law. |
|
Paper 3. |
Criminal law. |
|
Paper 4. |
Law of tort. |
|
Paper 5. |
|
Paper 10. |
Law of contract. |
|
Paper 11. |
Land law. |
|
Paper 12. |
International law. |
|
[Paper 13. |
Civil law II. |
|
Paper 20. |
Administrative law. |
|
Paper 21. |
Family law. |
|
Paper 22. |
Legal history. |
|
Paper 23. |
Criminology, sentencing, and the penal system. |
|
Paper 24. |
Equity. |
|
Paper 25. |
Criminal procedure and criminal evidence. |
|
Paper 26. |
European Union law.]67 |
|
〈Paper 13. |
Civil law II. |
|
Paper 20. |
Administrative law. |
|
Paper 21. |
Family law. |
|
Paper 22. |
Legal history. |
|
Paper 23. |
Criminology, sentencing, and the penal system (also serves as Paper Int. 6 of the Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos). |
|
Paper 25. |
Criminal procedure and criminal evidence. |
|
Paper 26. |
European Union law. |
|
Paper 42. |
Intellectual property. |
|
Paper 46. |
Comparative law. |
|
Paper 47. |
Jurisprudence.〉67 |
|
[Paper 40. |
Commercial law. |
|
Paper 41. |
Labour law. |
|
Paper 42. |
Intellectual property. |
|
Paper 43. |
Company law. |
|
Paper 44. |
Aspects of obligations. |
|
Paper 45. |
Conflict of laws. |
|
Paper 46. |
Comparative law.66 |
|
Paper 47. |
Jurisprudence. |
|
Paper 48. |
Prescribed subjects (half-papers).]67 |
|
〈Paper 24. |
Equity. |
|
Paper 40. |
Commercial law. |
|
Paper 41. |
Labour law. |
|
Paper 43. |
Company law. |
|
Paper 44. |
Aspects of obligations. |
|
Paper 45. |
Conflict of laws. |
|
Paper 48. |
Prescribed subjects (half-papers).〉67 |
The Faculty Board shall have power, not later than the end of the Easter Term in the year preceding the examination to which they apply, to prescribe not more than twelve subjects for Paper 48, or to transfer any paper from Group II to Group III. Each paper shall be of three hours’ duration, except Paper 48, for each subject of which the examination shall consist of a half-paper of two hours’ duration.
19. A candidate for honours in Part Ia of the Tripos shall offer Papers 1–4 from Group 1, provided that a candidate who has been approved to follow a course at the University of Paris II under Regulation 9 and who intends to follow such a course shall offer Paper 5 instead of Paper 1.
20. A candidate for honours in Part Ib shall offer five papers chosen from among Papers 1, 2, and 4 and Groups II and III, provided that
21. A candidate for honours in Part II shall
provided that
22. A candidate who under Regulation 20(ii) or 21 chooses to substitute for one paper of Part Ib or Part II, respectively, participation in a seminar course together with submission of an essay on a prescribed subject, as provided in those regulations, shall be assessed by the Examiners for Part Ib or Part II, as applicable, after they have considered a report from the lecturer or lecturers appointed by the Faculty Board to conduct the seminar course. Candidates may be called for viva voce examination on the subject or subjects of any seminar course in which they have participated.
The procedure for prescribing the subject or subjects of a seminar course, for notifying a candidate's intention to participate in such a course, and for assessing that participation and the essay submitted in connection with the course, shall be as follows:
23. The Faculty Board of Law shall have power to issue from time to time supplementary regulations defining or limiting all or any of the subjects of examination, and determining the scope, character, and conditions of the papers and the credit that shall be assigned to each, and to amend or withdraw such regulations; provided that due care is taken to give sufficient notice of any supplementary regulation or of any amendment of an existing supplementary regulation.
1. The papers for the examination in Law for European Students shall be the papers set in Groups I–IV of the Law Tripos. Each candidate shall
2. A student may be a candidate for the Examination if he or she
provided that three complete terms have not passed after the student's first term of residence.
3. The Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners as they shall deem sufficient, and shall have power to nominate one or more Assessors to the Examiners.
4. The names of candidates who have satisfied the Examiners shall be arranged in alphabetical order in a single class.
1. The Linguistics Tripos shall consist of one Part only.
2. A student who has obtained honours in another Honours Examination may be a candidate for honours in the Linguistics Tripos in the year next after or next but one after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she has kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after the student's first term of residence.69
3. No student shall be a candidate for the Linguistics Tripos on more than one occasion, and no student shall be a candidate for the Linguistics Tripos and also for another Honours Examination in the same term.
4. The Faculty Board of Modern and Medieval Languages shall nominate such number of Examiners as they think sufficient to conduct the examination, and shall have power to nominate one or more Assessors to assist the Examiners in any of the subjects of the examination. If required to do so, Assessors shall set papers in the subject or subjects assigned to them, shall mark the answers of the candidates in those papers, shall assess dissertations, and shall advise the Examiners on the performance of candidates in the examination. Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
5. The papers set by each Examiner or Assessor shall be submitted to the Chairman of the Examiners and one other Examiner for their approval.
6. The Faculty Board shall have power:
7. Before the end of the Easter Term each year the Faculty Board shall give notice of any variable subjects for the examination to be held in the academical year next but one following; provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination is adversely affected.
8. The names of the candidates who deserve honours shall be placed in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order. For special excellence a mark of distinction may be awarded.
9. A candidate shall not offer in the Linguistics Tripos a paper that he or she has previously offered in another Honours Examination.
10. The papers set for the Linguistics Tripos shall be as follows:
|
Paper 1. |
Linguistic theory. |
|
Paper 3. |
Phonetics (also serves as Paper Li. 3 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos).70 |
|
Paper 4. |
Syntax (also serves as Paper Li. 4 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos).70 |
|
Paper 5. |
Semantics and pragmatics (also serves as Paper Li. 5 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos).70 |
|
Paper 6. |
Phonology and morphology (also serves as Paper Li. 6 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos).70 |
|
Paper 7. |
Historical linguistics (also serves as Paper Li. 7 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos and as Paper 15 of Part II of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos).70 |
|
Paper 8. |
The structure of English (also serves as Paper Li. 8 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos and as Paper 29 of Part II of the English Tripos).70,71 |
|
Paper 9. |
Foundations of speech communication (also serves as Paper Li. 9 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos).70 |
|
Paper 10. |
The language of Italy (Paper It. 10 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 11. |
The Hispanic languages (Paper Sp. 11 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 12. |
Aspects of the history of the German language (Paper Ge. 11 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 13. |
The history of the French language (Paper Fr. 13 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 14. |
The history of the Russian language (Paper Ru. 9 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 15. |
The history and structure of modern Greek (Paper Gr. 7 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 16. |
The Romance languages (Paper CS 1 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 17. |
The Slavonic languages (Paper CS 3 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 18. |
History of the English language (Paper 13 of Part II of the English Tripos).72 |
|
Paper 20. |
Celtic philology (Paper 12 of Part II of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos). |
|
Paper 21. |
The Greek language (Paper E2 of Part II of the Classical Tripos). |
|
Paper 22. |
The Latin language (Paper E3 of Part II of the Classical Tripos). |
|
Paper 23. |
Germanic philology (Paper 11 of Part II of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos). |
|
Paper 24. |
Experimental psychology (the subject Experimental Psychology in Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos). |
11. A candidate who takes the examination in the year next after obtaining honours in another Honours Examination shall offer:
12. A candidate who takes the examination in the year next but one after obtaining honours in another Honours Examination shall offer:
13. The following provisions shall apply to a dissertation offered under Regulation 12:
The examination for this paper will consist of a written paper and a practical component. The practical component will assess competence in impressionistic and quantitative phonetic methods.
The examination for this paper will consist of a written paper and a 4,000-word project to be submitted on the first day of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held.
1. The Linguistics Tripos shall consist of three Parts: Part I, Part IIa, and Part IIb. There shall be a separate class-list for each Part.
2. A student who has not obtained honours in an Honours Examination may be a candidate for honours in Part I, provided that he or she has kept one term and that three complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
3. A student who has obtained honours in another Honours Examination may be a candidate for honours in Part IIa,75 in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she has kept four terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
4. A student who has obtained honours in Part IIa of the Linguistics Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part IIb,75 in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she has kept seven terms and that fifteen terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
5. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for one Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
6. No student who has been a candidate for any Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
7. For each Part of the Tripos, the Faculty Board of Modern and Medieval Languages shall nominate such number of Examiners as they think sufficient to conduct the examination, and shall have power to nominate one or more Assessors to assist the Examiners in any of the subjects of the examination. If required to do so, Assessors shall set papers in the subject or subjects assigned to them, shall mark the answers of the candidates in those papers, shall assess dissertations, and shall advise the Examiners on the performance of candidates in the examination. Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
8. The papers set by each Examiner or Assessor shall be submitted to the Chairman of the Examiners and one other Examiner for their approval.
9. The Faculty Board shall have power:
10. Before the end of the Easter Term each year the Faculty Board shall give notice of any variable subjects for the examination to be held in the academical year next but one following; provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no student’s preparation for the examination is adversely affected.
11. In the class-lists for each Part of the Tripos the names of the candidates who obtain honours shall be placed in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order. For special excellence a mark of distinction may be awarded.
12. The papers for the Linguistics Tripos, which shall be divided into three Groups A–C, shall be as follows:
|
Paper 1. |
Sounds and words. |
|
Paper 2. |
Structures and meanings. |
|
Paper 3. |
Language, brain, and society. |
|
Paper 4. |
History and varieties of English. |
|
Paper 5. |
Phonetics. |
|
Paper 6. |
Foundations of speech communication. |
|
Paper 7. |
Phonology and morphology. |
|
Paper 8. |
Syntax. |
|
Paper 9. |
Semantics and pragmatics. |
|
Paper 10. |
Historical linguistics (also serves as Paper 15 of Part II of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos). |
|
Paper 11. |
Linguistic theory. |
|
Paper 13. |
The language of Italy (Paper It. 10 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 14. |
The Hispanic languages (Paper Sp. 11 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 15. |
Aspects of the history of the German language (Paper Ge. 11 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 16. |
The history of the French language (Paper Fr. 13 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 17. |
The history of the Russian language (Paper Ru. 9 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 18. |
The history and structure of modern Greek (Paper Gr. 7 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 19. |
The Romance languages (Paper CS 1 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 20. |
The Slavonic languages (Paper CS 3 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
|
Paper 21. |
Experimental psychology (the subject Experimental Psychology in Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos). |
|
Paper 22. |
Celtic philology (Paper 12 of Part II of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos). |
|
Paper 23. |
The Greek language (Paper E2 of Part II of the Classical Tripos). |
|
Paper 24. |
The Latin language (Paper E3 of Part II of the Classical Tripos). |
|
Paper 25. |
Germanic philology (Paper 11 of Part II of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos). |
13. A candidate for Part I of the Linguistics Tripos shall offer Papers 1–4.
14. (i) A candidate who takes the examination for Part IIa after obtaining honours in Part I of the Linguistics Tripos shall offer four papers chosen from Papers 5–10, 13–21.
(ii) A candidate who takes the examination for Part IIa in the year next after obtaining honours in another Honours Examination shall offer:
provided that a candidate who has previously offered one or both of Papers 1 and 2 in a previous Honours Examination shall substitute that paper or both papers by either one further paper or two further papers, respectively, chosen from Papers 5–10, 13–21.
15. A candidate who takes the examination for Part IIb shall offer:
16. The following provisions shall apply to a dissertation offered under Regulation 15:
17. The examinations for the Linguistics Tripos shall be held under the New Regulations for the first time
for Part I in 2011,
for Part IIa in 2011,
for Part IIb in 2012.
The examinations for the Linguistics Tripos shall be held under the Old Regulations for the last time in 2011.
1. The Management Studies Tripos shall consist of one Part only.
2. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in the Management Studies Tripos if twelve terms have not passed after their first term of residence:
3. No student shall be a candidate for the Management Studies Tripos and also for another Tripos Examination in the same term, and no student shall be a candidate for the Management Studies Tripos on more than one occasion.
4. The Faculty Board of Business and Management shall nominate such number of Examiners as they think sufficient. They may also nominate for appointment one or more Assessors to the Examiners in such subjects as they consider desirable, and the Assessors so appointed shall set papers or parts of papers and shall advise the Examiners on the performance of candidates in those subjects. The Assessors, when summoned by the Chairman, shall attend meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
5. The questions proposed by each Examiner or Assessor shall be submitted to the whole body of Examiners for approval.
6. The names of the candidates who obtain honours shall be arranged in three classes of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. For special excellence a mark of distinction may be awarded.
7. The Faculty Board of Business and Management shall have power to define or limit by supplementary regulations all or any of the subjects of examination, and to modify or alter any such supplementary regulations as occasion may require. They shall also have power to determine the credit that shall be assigned to each subject of examination, and to mark out the lines of study that are to be pursued by candidates.
8. The following papers shall be set:
|
M1. |
Marketing and organizational behaviour. |
|
M2. |
Quantitative methods and operations management. |
|
M3. |
Economics and finance. |
9. Each candidate shall offer all three papers, and shall submit to the Examiners, not later than the last Monday of Full Easter Term, a report, of not more than 6,000 words, excluding footnotes and bibliography, on a project designed to give evidence of the candidate's industrial, commercial, or equivalent experience. The subject of the project shall be chosen from a list of approved subjects which shall be announced by the Director of Judge Business School not later than the last day of Full Lent Term. Reports shall be in typewritten form (unless a candidate has obtained previous permission from the Faculty Board of Business and Management to present a report in manuscript). Each candidate will be required to sign a declaration that the project and the report on it are his or her own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration, and that the report does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose; if two or more candidates have undertaken a project in collaboration, they will each be required to indicate the extent of their contribution.
10. The Examiners shall take into account such course-work done by candidates as shall from time to time be determined by the Faculty Board of Business and Management. For this purpose the Director of Judge Business School shall present to the Examiners a detailed report on the performance of each candidate in this course-work. Details of the work required of candidates shall be published by the Faculty Board by notice in the Business School not later than the beginning of the Full Michaelmas Term preceding the examination.
The paper will consist mainly of questions on the theory and practice of marketing and the organization and behaviour of people at work.
The paper will consist mainly of questions on the quantitative methods used in management and operations management.
The paper will consist mainly of questions on the economics of firms and markets, the theory of finance, and financial accounting.
1. The Manufacturing Engineering Tripos shall consist of two Parts. There shall be a separate class-list for each Part.
2. A student who has obtained honours in Part Ib of the Engineering Tripos or in Part I of the Chemical Engineering Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part I of the Manufacturing Engineering Tripos in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that the student has kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
3. The Faculty Board of Engineering may in special circumstances, which they shall themselves determine, give leave to a student who has obtained honours in any Honours Examination to be a candidate for honours in Part I of the Manufacturing Engineering Tripos in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she has attained a satisfactory standard, as defined by the Faculty Board, in his or her last Honours Examination, and provided also that the student has kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
4. A student who, under arrangements approved by the Faculty Board of Engineering, has spent not less than three terms studying at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology and has been certified by the President of the Institute after consultation with the Chairman of Examiners for Part I of the Manufacturing Engineering Tripos to have studied diligently during that period, shall be deemed thereby to have obtained honours in that Part of the Tripos. A list containing the names of persons so qualified shall be certified by the Chairman of the Faculty Board of Engineering and published in the Reporter.
5. A student who has obtained honours in Part I of the Manufacturing Engineering Tripos or has been deemed to have obtained honours in Part I of the Manufacturing Engineering Tripos under Regulation 4 may be a candidate for honours in Part II in the year next after or next but one after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she
provided always that fifteen complete terms have not passed after the student's first term of residence.
6. No student shall be a candidate for either Part and also for another Honours Examination in the same term.
7. The Faculty Board of Engineering shall nominate such number of Examiners for each Part of the Tripos as they shall consider sufficient. The Examiners for each Part shall elect one of their number to act as Chairman. The Faculty Board may nominate one or more Assessors to the Examiners in each Part of the Tripos. Assessors shall be responsible either for setting the paper or papers or questions assigned to them or for looking over the work of the candidates therein and presenting a report to the Examiners or both, as the Examiners may decide. The Assessors, when summoned by the Chairman, shall attend meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
8. In each Part of the Tripos the questions proposed by each Examiner or Assessor shall be submitted to the whole body of Examiners for approval.
9. The Examiners for each Part of the Tripos shall take into account such course-work done by candidates as shall from time to time be determined by the Faculty Board of Engineering. For this purpose the Head of the Department of Engineering shall present to the Examiners a detailed report on the performance of each candidate in this course-work. Details of the work required of candidates for each Part shall be published by the Faculty Board of Engineering by Notice in the Department of Engineering not later than the beginning of the Full Michaelmas Term preceding the examination. Every candidate submitting course-work under this regulation shall be required to sign a declaration that the work submitted is her or his own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration; if two or more candidates have undertaken work in collaboration, they shall be required to indicate the extent of their collaboration.
10. In Part I the names of the candidates who obtain honours shall be arranged in three classes of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names of those in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. For special excellence in Part I a mark of distinction may be awarded. In Part II the names of the candidates who obtain honours shall be arranged in alphabetical order in a single class and distinctive marks shall be attached to the names of those candidates who in the opinion of the Examiners deserve special credit. The mark (d) shall be used to denote a distinguished performance, and the mark (m) a meritorious performance.
11. The Faculty Board of Engineering shall have power to publish supplementary regulations defining the scope and character of each of the examination papers and to amend such supplementary regulations from time to time as they may think fit. Any alteration of supplementary regulations shall be published before the division of the Easter Term in the academical year before that in which it is to have effect.
12. The examination for Part I of the Manufacturing Engineering Tripos shall consist of ten modules which shall be examined by either written examination, essays or course-work as specified by the Faculty Board of Engineering.
Not later than the end of the Easter Term each year the Faculty Board shall give notice of the modules prescribed for the examination to be held in the academical year next following, and shall specify the mode of examination for each module. In giving such notice the Faculty Board shall ensure that the examination shall provide for written papers whose total duration shall be at least twelve hours.
13. In order to obtain honours in Part I, a candidate must satisfy the Examiners that he or she has such industrial or equivalent experience as shall be determined from time to time by the Faculty Board; a statement of each candidate's experience shall be certified by the Head of the Department of Engineering.
14. The examination for Part II shall consist of two written papers.
Paper 1 shall consist mainly of questions on technological aspects of manufacturing.
Paper 2 shall consist mainly of questions on managerial aspects of manufacturing.
1. The Mathematical Tripos shall consist of four Parts, Part Ia, Part Ib, Part II, and Part III.
2. The Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners as they think sufficient for each Part of the Tripos, and shall also have power to nominate one or more Assessors for each Part. Assessors shall propose questions in the papers or parts of papers assigned to them by the Examiners, shall mark the answers of the candidates in those papers or parts of papers, and shall advise the Examiners on the performance of candidates in the examination. Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
3. A candidate shall offer one of the following options:
The examination for Part Ia shall consist of five papers. The Faculty Board of Mathematics shall determine how the questions on the various subjects shall be distributed among the papers.
4. Every candidate shall offer Papers 1, 2, and 3, and one additional paper as follows:
5. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part Ia:
No student shall be a candidate for Part Ia on more than one occasion.
6. The names of the candidates who have obtained honours shall be placed in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. The symbol (p) shall be placed against the names of those candidates who have satisfied the Examiners in the option Mathematics with Physics.
7. The examination for Part Ib shall consist of four papers. The Faculty Board shall determine how the questions on the various subjects shall be distributed among the papers.
8. A student who has obtained honours in an Honours Examination may be a candidate for honours in Part Ib in the year next after so obtaining honours, provided that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.77 No student shall be a candidate for Part Ib on more than one occasion.
9. Candidates for Part Ib may submit note-books containing records of practical work done by them. Such practical work shall be prescribed from time to time by the Faculty Board of Mathematics, and shall be carried out in accordance with instructions which shall be announced not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination by the Head of the Department in which the work is to be performed. As an indication of good faith, each candidate shall submit, with the records of his or her work, a declaration that these instructions have been observed. The Head of the Department shall present an assessment of this work to the Examiners, and the Examiners shall take account of this assessment in drawing up the class-list. Candidates may be examined viva voce on their submitted work.
10. The names of the candidates who have obtained honours shall be placed in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order.
11. A candidate who, under arrangements approved by the Faculty Board of Mathematics, has spent not less than three terms studying at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology and has been certified by the President of the Institute after consultation with the Chairman of Examiners for Part Ib of the Mathematical Tripos to have studied diligently during that period, shall be deemed thereby to have obtained honours in Part Ib of the Mathematical Tripos. A list containing the names of persons so qualified shall be certified by the Chairman of the Faculty Board of Mathematics and published in the Reporter.
12. The examination for Part II shall consist of four papers. The Faculty Board shall determine how the questions on the various subjects shall be distributed among the papers.
13. A student who has obtained honours in an Honours Examination other than Part Ia of the Mathematical Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part II in the year next or next but one after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she has kept four terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.77 No student shall be a candidate for Part II on more than one occasion.
14. Candidates for Part II may submit note-books containing records of practical work done by them. Such practical work shall be prescribed from time to time by the Faculty Board of Mathematics, and shall be carried out in accordance with instructions which shall be announced not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination by the Head of the Department in which the work is to be performed. As an indication of good faith, each candidate shall submit, with the records of his or her work, a declaration that these instructions have been observed. The Head of the Department shall present an assessment of this work to the Examiners, and the Examiners shall take account of this assessment in drawing up the class-list. Candidates may be examined viva voce on their submitted work.
15. The names of the candidates who have obtained honours shall be placed in three classes: Wranglers, Senior Optimes, and Junior Optimes, of which the Senior Optimes shall be divided into two divisions. The names of the Wranglers and of the Junior Optimes and of those in each division of the Senior Optimes shall be arranged in alphabetical order.
16. The examination for Part III shall comprise written papers, each of which shall be set for either two hours or three hours, and topics for an optional essay. The number of papers that the Faculty Board intend to set and the subject and duration of each paper shall be announced by the Board not later than 1 November next preceding the examination. A member of the Faculty may request that a paper or papers be set additional to those announced, provided that such a request is made to the Secretary of the Faculty Board no later than the division of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination. The member of the Faculty shall take responsibility for preparing a proposal that will contain an outline syllabus and shall agree to set and assess the examination if so requested by the Examiners. The subject and duration of each additional paper that the Faculty Board agree to set shall be announced by them not later than the last day of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
17. Each candidate shall send, through his or her Director of Studies, to the Chairman of Examiners, so as to arrive before the end of the second Friday of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held, the titles of the papers that he or she wishes to offer. No candidate shall offer papers whose total duration amounts to more than nineteen hours or, if the candidate has submitted an essay in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 19, papers whose total duration amounts to more than sixteen hours.
18. Before the last day of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination the Examiners shall announce a number of topics for an essay. A candidate may request that an essay may be submitted on a topic other than those announced, provided that the request is made, through the candidate's Director of Studies, so as to reach the Secretary of the Faculty Board not later than 1 February next preceding the examination. Any additional topics approved by the Examiners shall be announced by them not later than 1 March next preceding the examination.
19. Each candidate may submit an essay on any one topic that has been announced. A candidate who desires to do so shall, through his or her Director of Studies, so inform the Chairman of Examiners before the end of the first quarter of the Easter Term in which the examination is to be held, and shall submit the essay, through his or her Director of Studies, so as to reach the Chairman of Examiners not later than the end of the second Friday of the Full Easter Term. Each essay shall state the sources consulted; it shall be prefaced by a declaration signed by the candidate that it represents the candidate's own work unaided except as may be specified in the declaration, and that it does not contain material that the candidate has already used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose. The Examiners shall have power, at their discretion, to examine a candidate viva voce on the subject of his or her essay.
[20. A student who has obtained honours in an Honours Examination taken not earlier than the fourth term after his or her first term of residence may be a candidate for honours in Part III, provided that he or she has kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
21. No student shall be a candidate for Part III on more than one occasion, or for Part III and for another Honours Examination in the same term.
22. A student who is not qualified under Regulation 20 may nevertheless be granted leave by the Degree Committee for the Faculty of Mathematics, if in their opinion he or she is suitably prepared, to be a candidate not for honours in Part III
23. The names of the candidates who have obtained honours in the examination for Part III shall be arranged in alphabetical order in one class. In that class-list the letter (c) shall be attached to the names of those candidates who under Regulation 24(a) are entitled to the award of a Certificate of Advanced Study in Mathematics. The names of those candidates who, having presented themselves under Regulation 22(a) or (b), have satisfied the Examiners shall be appended to the class-list in a list headed ‘The following who are not candidates for honours have attained the honours standard and are entitled to the award of a Certificate of Advanced Study in Mathematics’. In each list distinctive marks shall be attached to the names of those candidates who in the opinion of the Examiners deserve special credit. The mark (d) shall be used to denote a distinguished performance, and the mark (m) a meritorious performance.
24. A Certificate of Advanced Study in Mathematics shall be awarded to a member of the University who has kept at least three terms by residence and:
A candidate for honours under Regulation 20 may count for the purposes of the Certificate terms of residence which he or she has previously kept.
25. The Certificate shall be in the following form:
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT
having diligently attended a course of Advanced Study in Mathematics and having been admitted to the examination appointed by the University of Cambridge has been approved78 by the Examiners and has been awarded the Certificate of Advanced Study in Mathematics.]
〈20. A student who has obtained honours in an Honours Examination taken not earlier than the fourth term after his or her first term of residence may be a candidate for honours in Part III, provided that he or she has kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence, and provided also that he or she has not proceeded to the B.A. Degree.
21. No student shall be a candidate for Part III on more than one occasion, or for Part III and for another Honours Examination in the same term.
22. The names of the candidates who have obtained honours in the examination for Part III shall be arranged in alphabetical order in one class. Distinctive marks shall be attached to the names of those candidates who in the opinion of the Examiners deserve special credit. The mark (d) shall be used to denote a distinguished performance, and the mark (m) a meritorious performance.〉79
1. The Medical and Veterinary Sciences Tripos shall consist of two Parts: Part Ia and Part Ib.
2. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part Ia:
3. A student who has obtained honours in Part Ia of the Medical and Veterinary Sciences Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part Ib in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
4. Notwithstanding the provisions of Regulations 2 and 3, a student who is above the standing for honours may be a candidate not for honours in Part Ia and Part Ib for the purpose of becoming qualified to be a candidate subsequently for the Final M.B. Examination or for Part I of the Final Veterinary Examination.
5. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for any Part and another Honours Examination, in the same term.
6. No student who has been a candidate for any Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
7. The Faculty Board of Biology shall have power to issue from time to time supplementary regulations defining or limiting all or any of the subjects of the examinations for Part Ia and Part Ib. Due care shall be taken that sufficient notice is given of any alteration of such supplementary regulations.
8. There shall be two bodies of Examiners, one for each Part of the Tripos. For each of the two bodies there shall be a Chairman of Examiners and an Assistant Chairman, appointed on the nomination of the Faculty Board of Biology.
9. In each Part of the Tripos there shall be appointed for each subject a Senior Examiner and such number of Examiners and Assessors as are required to conduct the examination.
The Examiners shall be nominated by the Faculty Board of Biology.
10. The Examiners in each subject shall be jointly responsible for all the questions set in that subject. The work of each candidate in any subject shall be tested by at least two Examiners in the subject, and the Examiners in each subject shall be jointly responsible for the marks in that subject. At least two Examiners or one Examiner and one Assessor shall set and conduct every oral and practical examination. The Examiners shall have regard to the style and method of candidates’ answers, and shall give credit for excellence in these respects.
11. The Assessors shall propose questions in the parts of the subjects assigned to them by the Examiners, shall look over the answers of the candidates to those questions, and shall report thereon to the Examiners. The Assessors may be required to assist the Examiners in setting and conducting every oral and practical examination. The Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
12. The Chairman shall communicate the marks of all candidates to the Registrary.
13. The names of candidates who, having presented themselves under Regulation 4, attain the prescribed standard shall be published by the Examiners in lists headed ‘The following (who are not candidates for honours) have attained the honours standard’.
14. In Part Ia the examination shall consist of the following subjects:
|
|
Functional Architecture of the Body (FAB) |
|
|
Homeostasis (HOM) |
|
|
Molecules in Medical Science (MIMS) |
|
|
Veterinary Anatomy and Physiology (VAP) |
15. The examination in each subject shall consist of either two written papers or one written paper and a practical examination, covering three sections numbered I–III, as specified below. In addition, the examination in Homeostasis shall include the submission of note-books containing records of practical work.
(c) The examinations in Functional Architecture of the Body and in Veterinary Anatomy and Physiology shall each consist of:
16. In each subject the examination shall carry the same maximum marks; the maximum marks allocated to Sections I and II together shall be equal to the maximum marks allocated to the remaining parts of the examination in that subject.
17. Every candidate shall offer the subjects Homeostasis and Molecules in Medical Science, and either Functional Architecture of the Body or Veterinary Anatomy and Physiology.
18. The names of the candidates who obtain honours in Part Ia shall be arranged in three classes. The names in each class shall be arranged in alphabetical order.
19. In Part Ib the examination shall consist of the following subjects:
|
|
Biology of Disease (BOD) |
|
|
Comparative Vertebrate Biology (CVB) |
|
|
Human Reproduction (HR) |
|
|
Mechanisms of Drug Action (MODA) |
|
|
Neurobiology with Animal Behaviour (NAB) |
|
|
Neurobiology with Human Behaviour (NHB) |
|
|
Veterinary Reproductive Biology (VRB) |
20. The examination in each subject shall consist of one written paper and a practical examination, covering three sections numbered (I)–(III) as specified below.
(a) The examinations in Biology of Disease and in Mechanisms of Drug Action shall each consist of:
(b) The examinations in Neurobiology with Human Behaviour, and in Neurobiology with Animal Behaviour shall each consist of:
(c) The examinations in Human Reproduction and in Veterinary Reproductive Biology shall each consist of:
(d) The examination in Comparative Vertebrate Biology shall consist of:
21. Every candidate shall offer the following for the examination:
|
|
Biology of Disease (BOD) |
|
|
Human Reproduction (HR) |
|
|
Mechanisms of Drug Action (MODA) |
|
|
Neurobiology with Human Behaviour (NHB) |
|
|
Biology of Disease (BOD) |
|
|
Veterinary Reproductive Biology (VRB) |
|
|
Mechanisms of Drug Action (MODA) |
|
|
Neurobiology with Animal Behaviour (NAB) |
|
|
Comparative Vertebrate Biology (CVB) |
22. The maximum marks allocated to the examination in each subject or paper shall be in the following proportions:
|
|
Biology of Disease (BOD) |
10 |
|
|
Comparative Vertebrate Biology (CVB) |
8 |
|
|
Human Reproduction (HR) |
8 |
|
|
Mechanisms of Drug Action (MODA) |
10 |
|
|
Neurobiology with Animal Behaviour (NAB) |
10 |
|
|
Neurobiology with Human Behaviour (NHB) |
10 |
|
|
Veterinary Reproductive Biology (VRB) |
8 |
|
|
Special Options paper |
8 |
For the examinations in each subject, the maximum marks for Sections I and II together shall be equal to the maximum marks allocated to Section III.
23. Public notice of the topics covered in the Special Options paper shall be given by the Faculty Board not later than the division of the Easter Term of the year next preceding the examination concerned, provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination is adversely affected. The Faculty Board shall have power:
24. The names of the candidates who obtain honours in Part Ib shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order.
Section I will consist of compulsory short-answer questions on tissue anatomy, aspects of organogenesis, the topographical, functional, and applied anatomy of the human body. Section II will consist of a practical examination and will cover similar aspects. In Section III, candidates will be required to write essays.
Section I will contain computer-marked and short-answer questions on nerve and neuromuscular transmission, muscle, autonomic nervous system, cardiovascular system, respiration, kidney, salt and water balance, digestion, absorption, and temperature regulation. Section II will contain questions on the practical work in experimental physiology and histology. Section III will contain essay questions. Candidates will also be required to submit note-books containing records of practical work (see Regulation 15(a)(iii)).
The examination will test knowledge and understanding of the material contained in the MIMS course. Section I will consist of short-answer questions on the lecture material. Section II will consist of questions on practical aspects, including interpretation and handling of data. Section III will contain essay questions and will consist of three subsections, A, B, and C, each containing a choice of questions. Candidates will be required to answer one question from each subsection. Subsection A will relate principally to the lectures given in the Michaelmas Term, subsection B principally to the lectures given in the Lent and Easter Terms, and subsection C to the entire course of lectures and practicals. The nature of the questions in Section III will be to test integrated understanding rather than detailed factual knowledge.
Section I will consist of computer-marked and short-answer questions on the anatomy of domestic mammals and on the structure and function of the gastrointestinal systems of herbivorous mammals. Section II will consist of questions on associated practical work. In Section III, candidates will be required to write two or three essays chosen from not fewer than eight.
The examination in BOD will be treated from the standpoint of abnormal biology. It will include the variations that may occur in the structure and functions of living cells, tissues, and organs, together with the biology of parasites, bacteria, and viruses. Section I will consist of compulsory short-answer questions on the lecture material. Section III will consist of essay questions. Section II will consist of a two-hour practical examination which will include laboratory work and questions on practical aspects and problem solving.
The examination will require knowledge of the structure and function of birds, fish, amphibians and reptiles, and certain species of laboratory animal.
Section I will consist of compulsory short-answer questions and Section II will consist of practical questions. Section III will consist of a written paper that will contain essay questions on reproductive biology and the social and ethical aspects of reproduction and the effects of reproductive activity on populations.
Sections I and III of the examination in MODA will require knowledge of the actions of drugs on whole organisms and mammalian systems, and also of the mode of drug action at the cellular, sub-cellular, and molecular levels. Section I will include compulsory short-answer questions and Section III will include essay questions. Section II will consist of a practical examination and will include questions on data handling and problem solving; laboratory work will not be involved. Questions that require an elementary knowledge of statistical procedures may be included in all three sections of the examination.
The examination in NAB will require knowledge of the structure and functions of the central nervous system, the special sense organs, neuropharmacology and animal behaviour, with particular reference to domestic animals. Section I will include or consist entirely of compulsory short-answer questions. Section III will consist of essay questions. In Section II, candidates will be examined on practical aspects of neuroanatomy and in experimental neurophysiology; questions may be included which require an elementary knowledge of statistical procedures.
The examination in NHB will require knowledge of the structure and functions of the central nervous system and the special sense organs, neuroanatomy, experimental psychology and some of its applications to medicine. Particular topics will include neuropharmacology; learning and memory; perception and information processing; intelligence and development; emotion and its physiological basis; and social psychology. Section I will include or consist entirely of compulsory short-answer questions. Section III will consist of essay questions. In Section II, candidates will be examined on practical aspects of neuroanatomy and in experimental neurophysiology; questions may be included which require an elementary knowledge of statistical procedures.
Section I of the examination will consist of computer-marked and short-answer questions on the structure and function of the reproductive systems of mammals, with particular reference to domestic mammals. Section II will consist of questions on associated practical work and may include a data-handling exercise. Section III will consist of essay questions.
1. The Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos shall consist of three Parts, Part Ia, Part Ib, and Part II.
2. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part Ia:
3. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part Ib:
4. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part II:83
5. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for any Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
6. No student who has been a candidate for any Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
7. Except as otherwise specified in Schedule A, the written papers in each Part shall be of three hours’ duration.
8. There shall be a separate body of Examiners for each Part, provided that the Faculty Board of Modern and Medieval Languages shall have power to nominate an Examiner to examine in more than one Part. From among the resident Examiners for each Part the Faculty Board shall appoint such number of Senior Examiners as they may deem sufficient.
9. The Faculty Board shall have power to nominate one or more Assessors to assist the Examiners in any of the subjects in any Part of the Tripos. If required to do so, Assessors shall set papers in the subject or subjects assigned to them, shall mark the answers of the candidates in those papers, shall assess dissertations, projects, and course-work, shall set and conduct oral examinations, and shall advise the Examiners on the performance of candidates in the examination. Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
10. To conduct the examination in each Part, the Faculty Board shall nominate at least two Examiners for each modern language in which candidates desire to present themselves. The Faculty Board shall have power to nominate any Examiner to examine in more than one language.
11. The Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners for the papers in classical Latin and classical Greek in Part Ia and Part Ib as they shall deem sufficient.
12. For each Part of the Tripos there shall be a meeting or meetings of the Chairman of Examiners and all the Senior Examiners, at which the questions proposed for each written paper and the subject matter proposed for each oral examination shall be submitted by the Senior Examiner concerned and shall be approved by the Chairman of Examiners and the Senior Examiners acting together.
13. (a) The Examiners or Assessors shall assess any course-work submitted by the candidate under Regulation 16. Except where otherwise specified a candidate’s answers to the questions in each written paper and other submitted work shall be written in English.
(b) Two Examiners or Assessors shall conduct the oral examination of each candidate in each language.
14. For Part Ia there shall be a separate class-list for each language, which shall be drawn up at a meeting attended by the Examiners (including the Senior Examiner) responsible for that language and by the Chairman of Examiners; each list shall indicate whether a candidate has offered Option A or Option B. For each of the other Parts there shall be a single class-list, which shall be drawn up at a meeting attended by all the Examiners for that Part.
15. In each class-list the names of the candidates who have obtained honours shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. Marks of distinction may be awarded as follows:
In Part Ia, for special excellence in any language.
In Part Ib or Part II, for special excellence in the examination as a whole.
In Part II, for special excellence in the oral examination.84
In determining the place in the class-list of any candidate who has offered one of Papers GL 9, GL 10, GL 20, or GL 21 in addition, the Examiners shall give credit for proficiency in these papers. A mark of distinction, G or L respectively, shall be attached to the names of those candidates who, in offering one of Papers GL 9, GL 10, GL 20, or GL 21 acquit themselves with credit in that paper. A mark, g or l respectively, shall be attached to the names of those candidates who, in offering one of Papers GL 9, GL 10, GL 20, or GL 21 satisfy the Examiners in that paper.
16. The Faculty Board shall have power:
17. The Faculty Board shall give public notice of all the variable subjects selected for the examinations in any year as follows:
provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so, and if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination is adversely affected. The Board shall have power when they give notice of the variable subjects selected for a particular examination to announce any consequential restriction on the combination of papers that a candidate may choose to offer, or on the subject areas in which a candidate may offer a dissertation.
18. Examinations shall be held in the following languages:
19. A candidate shall not offer in any Part of the Tripos a paper that he or she has previously offered in another University examination.
20. (a) In each of the modern languages specified in Regulation 18(a) other than French, the examination for Part Ia shall consist of either Option A or Option B, as set out below. In French the examination shall consist of Option B only.
|
Option A. |
Papers A1, A2, and A3. |
|
|
Oral examination A. |
||
|
Option B. |
Papers B1 and B2. |
|
|
Oral examination B. One paper from Schedule Ia relating to the language concerned. |
||
(b) In classical Greek or Latin the examination for Part Ia shall consist of either Option A (in Greek only) or Option B (in either Greek or Latin), as follows:
|
Option A. |
Papers GL 2, GL 5, and GL 6. |
|
|
Option B. |
Papers GL 1 or GL 3, GL 5, and GL 6. |
|
|
In Greek a candidate may additionally offer Paper GL 7; in Latin, Paper GL 8. |
||
21. Subject to the provisions of Regulation 19, every candidate for Part Ia shall offer:
A candidate shall offer either Option A in one language and Option B in the other, or Option B in both languages.
22. In order to obtain honours in Part Ia a candidate shall be required to attain the honours standard in each of two languages.
23. Subject to the provisions of Regulation 19, candidates for Part Ib shall offer written papers and other exercises as follows:
provided that a candidate may offer, in place of one of the designated papers from Schedule Ib,87 a portfolio of three essays, each of not fewer than 1,500 words and not more than 2,000 words in length. All the essays must be on subjects falling within the scope of that paper and must conform to the rubric of that paper. Detailed instructions will be issued by the Faculty and Departments, by the division of the Michaelmas Term preceding the examination, regarding the coverage of prescribed texts and topics and any other requirements for the portfolio as a whole. Candidates will be required to declare that the essays are their own work. The essays shall consist of work done for supervisions and shall be in English and submitted with supervisors’ comments but without revision of any kind by the candidate. They shall be submitted by the candidate to the Secretary of the Faculty Board, in accordance with detailed arrangements approved by the Board, so as to arrive not later than the first Friday of the Full Easter Term in which the examination takes place. Candidates may be called for viva voce examination in connection with their portfolios.
24. Subject to the provisions of Regulation 19, candidates for Part II shall offer written papers and other exercises as follows:
provided that a candidate who offers a dissertation under (a)(iii), (b)(ii), (c)(ii), or (d)(iii) may not also offer two papers from Schedule D that are assessed by means other than a written examination, unless the Faculty Board has given special permission for the candidate to do so.
25. A student who is a candidate for Part II under Regulations 4(a) or 4(c) who has not achieved a satisfactory standard, as defined by the Faculty Board, either in Paper B3 or in the aggregated marks of Papers B1 and B2 in any language in the examination for Part Ib, may not offer Papers C1 or C2 in that language.
26. The Faculty Board shall have discretion in exceptional circumstances to grant exemption from the oral examination specified in Regulation 24(a), (b), or (d) to any candidate on the application of his or her Tutor. The Secretary of the Faculty Board shall send to the Registrary, not later than the first day of the Easter Term in which the written examination is to be held, a list of candidates to whom the Faculty Board have granted exemption from the oral examination under this regulation.
27. (i) A year abroad project or dissertation offered under Regulation 24 shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions set out in sub-paragraphs (a)–(h) below.
(ii) (a) A project offered under Regulation 24(d)(ii) shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions set out for year abroad projects in sub-paragraphs (a) and (d)–(h) above.
(b) A student who is required to offer a project under Regulation 24(d) shall give notice to the Secretary of the Faculty Board of the subject of the proposed project and the general area within which it will fall by a date announced by the Faculty Board, which shall be not later than the third Friday of the Full Easter Term in the year next preceding the examination.
After giving notice as required above, a candidate shall submit the proposed title of the project to the Secretary of the Faculty Board, in accordance with any instructions issued by the Board and according to the timetable set out in Schedule E.
28. No student shall be a candidate for Part II under Regulation 4(a) unless evidence has been produced to the Secretary of the Faculty Board that during the academical year next before the year of the examination he or she has spent a period studying abroad under conditions approved by the Faculty Board in a country or countries relevant to the papers to be offered in the examination.93 Such evidence will normally consist of a certificate from a university or employer confirming dates of attendance. Every student shall submit a report on their year abroad to the Faculty Board in the manner prescribed from time to time by the Board. Students shall keep the Secretary of the Faculty Board informed of their address abroad at all times.
29. A candidate proposing to study abroad in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 28 shall apply to the Faculty Board for the approval of his or her plans, using a form issued by the Faculty Board and available in the Year Abroad Office. The application shall be submitted through the candidate's Director of Studies to the Secretary of the Faculty Board so as to arrive not later than the last day of Full Michaelmas Term in the academical year next preceding that which the candidate proposes to spend abroad, and shall indicate the country or countries that the student intends to visit and the way in which he or she will be occupied while abroad.93 If a student subsequently changes his or her plans, he or she must inform the Secretary of the Faculty Board and seek permission afresh.
30. The Faculty Board shall have power to grant permission to a candidate for any Part of the Tripos to offer in the examination a modern language other than those specified in Regulation 18(a), provided that the Faculty Board are satisfied
An application for such permission shall be made through the candidate's Tutor to the Secretary of the Faculty Board at the earliest possible date and in no circumstances later than 21 October next preceding the examination.
For a language offered under this regulation written papers shall be set and oral examinations shall be held as specified in Schedule A; the Faculty Board shall have power to determine the papers to be set relating to the literature, history, and culture of the country concerned or the history of the language.
31. Not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term each year the Secretary of the Faculty Board shall inform the Registrary of any language for which permission has been granted under Regulation 30, together with the names of the candidates to whom such permission has been granted.
In each language specified in Regulation 18(a) the following papers and other exercises shall be set:
|
Paper A1. |
Introduction to the foreign language, 1. |
|
Paper A2. |
Introduction to the foreign language, 2. (Two hours) |
|
Paper A3. |
Introduction to the foreign language, 3. |
|
Oral examination A. |
|
|
Paper B1. |
Use of the foreign language. |
|
Paper B2. |
Translation from the foreign language. (Two hours) |
|
Paper B3. |
Translation into the foreign language, and test in the foreign language through audio-visual media. |
|
Oral examination B. |
|
|
Paper C1. |
Translation from and into the foreign language. |
|
Paper C2. |
Essay in the foreign language. |
|
Oral examination C. |
|
|
Du. |
1. |
Introduction to Dutch literature. |
|
Du. |
2. |
The medieval and sixteenth-century literature and history of the Low Countries, c. 1170 to c. 1585. |
|
Du. |
3. |
The literature, history, and culture of the Republic of the United Netherlands, 1585 to 1700. |
|
Du. |
4. |
Literature, history, and culture of Belgium and the Netherlands from 1830 to the present day. |
|
Du. |
5. |
Introduction to the language and literature of the Low Countries. |
|
Fr. |
1. |
Introduction to the structure and varieties of modern French.94 |
|
Fr. |
2. |
French literary texts: an introduction. |
|
Fr. |
3. |
French literature, thought, and history, before 1300 (also serves as Paper 12 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos). |
|
Fr. |
4. |
Occitan literature, thought, and history, before 1356.95 |
|
Fr. |
5. |
French literature, thought, and history, from 1300 to 1510. |
|
Fr. |
6. |
French literature, thought, and history, from 1510 to 1622 (also serves as Paper 20 of Part II of the English Tripos).96 |
|
Fr. |
7. |
French literature, thought, and history, from 1594 to 1700 (also serves as Paper 21 of Part II of the English Tripos). |
|
Fr. |
8. |
French literature, thought, and history, from 1690 to 1799 (also serves as Paper 22 of Part II of the English Tripos). |
|
Fr. |
9. |
French literature, thought, and history, from 1789 to 1898 (also serves as Paper 23 of Part II of the English Tripos). |
|
Fr. |
10. |
French literature, visual culture, thought, and history, from 1890 to 1958 (also serves as Paper 24 of Part II of the English Tripos). |
|
Fr. |
11. |
Literature, visual culture, thought, and history in the French-speaking world, since 1945 (also serves as Paper 25 of Part II of the English Tripos). |
|
Fr. |
12. |
A special subject in French culture: early modern thought. |
|
Fr. |
13. |
The history of the French language (also serves as Paper 13 of the Linguistics Tripos).97 |
|
Ge. |
1. |
Structures and varieties of contemporary German. |
|
Ge. |
2. |
Introduction to German history and thought since 1750. |
|
Ge. |
3. |
Introduction to German literary texts. |
|
Ge. |
4. |
The making of German culture, I. |
|
Ge. |
5. |
Modern German culture, I. |
|
Ge. |
6. |
Modern German culture, II. |
|
Ge. |
7. |
Introduction to the history of the German language. |
|
Ge. |
8. |
German literature, thought, and history, from 1700 to 1815, including Goethe works to 1832. |
|
Ge. |
9. |
German literature, thought, and history, from 1815 to 1914. |
|
Ge. |
10. |
German literature, thought, and history, since 1910. |
|
Ge. |
11. |
Aspects of the history of the German language (also serves as Paper 12 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
|
Ge. |
12. |
A special period or subject in German literature, thought, or history (i). |
|
Ge. |
13. |
A special period or subject in German literature, thought, or history (ii). |
|
Ge. |
14. |
The making of German culture, II. |
|
Ge. |
15. |
Modern German cultures of performance. |
|
Gr. |
1. |
Greek literature, thought, and history, since 1880. |
|
Gr. |
2. |
Introduction to the Cretan Renaissance. |
|
Gr. |
3. |
Introduction to modern Greek language and culture (also serves as Paper O2 of Part II of the Classical Tripos). |
|
Gr. |
4. |
The literature, thought, and history of Crete and Cyprus in the Renaissance period. |
|
Gr. |
5. |
Greek literature, thought, and history, from 1700 to 1900. |
|
Gr. |
6. |
Greek literature, thought, and history, since 1900. |
|
Gr. |
7. |
The history and structure of modern Greek (also serves as Paper 15 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
|
It. |
1. |
Italian texts and contexts. |
|
It. |
2. |
Structure and varieties of Italian. |
|
It. |
3. |
Italian modernism. |
|
It. |
4. |
Autobiography and self-representation in Italian culture. |
|
It. |
5. |
Florentine culture, from 1321 to 1500. |
|
It. |
6. |
Topics in modern Italian culture. |
|
It. |
7. |
Dante and the culture of his age (also serves as Paper 26 of Part II of the English Tripos). |
|
It. |
8. |
Italian culture, from 1500 to 1600. |
|
It. |
9. |
A special subject in Italian culture. |
|
It. |
10. |
The language of Italy (also serves as Paper 10 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
|
ML |
1. |
Continuity and change in Latin literature, from 200 to 650.98 |
|
ML |
2. |
Medieval Latin literature, from 650 to 1300 (also serves as Paper 13 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos).98 |
|
NL |
1. |
Introduction to Neo-Latin literature, from 1350 to 1700 (also serves as Paper 27A of Part II of the English Tripos). |
|
NL |
2. |
A special subject in Neo-Latin literature: Marullus, Poliziano, Bèze, and Buchanan (also serves as Paper 07 of the Classical Tripos and as Paper 27B of Part II of the English Tripos). |
|
Pg. |
1. |
Introduction to the structure and varieties of modern Portuguese. |
|
Pg. |
2. |
Introduction to Lusophone literature. |
|
Pg. |
3. |
Introduction to the language and literature of Portugal, Brazil, and Portuguese-speaking Africa. |
|
Pg. |
4. |
Self, family, nation, and Empire in Lusophone culture. |
|
Pg. |
5. |
Literature and culture of Portugal and Brazil from 1595.99 |
|
Ru. |
1. |
Introduction to Russian literature, history, and culture, before 1861. |
|
Ru. |
2. |
Introduction to Russian literature, history, and culture, since 1855. |
|
Ru. |
3. |
The history and culture of Early Rus. |
|
Ru. |
4. |
Early modern Russia: literature, history, and visual culture, from 1300 to 1725. |
|
Ru. |
5. |
Russian literature and thought from the Enlightenment to realism. |
|
Ru. |
6. |
Russian culture after 1880. |
|
Ru. |
7. |
Russia in revolution, from 1861 to 1917. |
|
Ru. |
8. |
Socialist Russia, from 1917 to 1991. |
|
Ru. |
9. |
The history of the Russian language (also serves as Paper 14 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
|
Sp. |
1. |
Introduction to the structure and varieties of modern Spanish. |
|
Sp. |
2. |
Introduction to Hispanic texts. |
|
Sp. |
3. |
Topics in medieval Iberian and Spanish Golden Age culture. |
|
Sp. |
4. |
Topics in modern Spanish culture and history. |
|
Sp. |
5. |
Topics in Spanish-American culture and history. |
|
Sp. |
6. |
Topics in medieval Iberian culture.98 |
|
Sp. |
7. |
Spanish literature, thought, and history, from 1492 to 1700. |
|
Sp. |
8. |
Spanish cinema and television.99 |
|
Sp. |
9. |
Spanish literature, thought, and history, after 1820. |
|
Sp. |
10. |
Introduction to Catalan language and culture. |
|
Sp. |
11. |
The Hispanic languages (also serves as Paper 11 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
|
Sp. |
12. |
Latin-American culture. |
|
Sp. |
13. |
Contemporary Latin-American culture. |
|
Sp. |
14. |
Spanish literature, life, and history, before 1492. |
|
Uk. |
1. |
Introduction to the language, literature, and culture of Ukraine. |
|
〈Uk. |
2. |
Studies in twentieth-century Ukranian literature and film.〉100 |
|
Li. |
1. |
General linguistics (also serves as Paper 1 of the Preliminary Examination for the Linguistics Tripos, as Paper X.3 of the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos, and as Paper O1 of Part II of the Classical Tripos).101 |
|
Li. |
2. |
Language variation (also serves as Paper 2 of the Preliminary Examination for the Linguistics Tripos). |
|
Li. |
3. |
Phonetics (Paper 3 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
|
Li. |
4. |
Syntax (Paper 4 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
|
Li. |
5. |
Semantics and pragmatics (Paper 5 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
|
Li. |
6. |
Phonology and morphology (Paper 6 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
|
Li. |
7. |
Historical linguistics (Paper 7 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
|
Li. |
8. |
The structure of English (Paper 8 of the Linguistics Tripos).102 |
|
Li. |
9. |
Foundations of speech communication (Paper 9 of the Linguistics Tripos) (c).103 |
|
CS |
1. |
The Romance languages (also serves as Paper 16 of the Linguistics Tripos and as Paper O10 of Part II of the Classical Tripos). |
|
CS |
2. |
The Germanic languages.98 |
|
CS |
3. |
The Slavonic languages (also serves as Paper 17 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
|
CS |
4. |
A special subject in comparative literature (i) (also serves as part of Paper 28 of Part II of the English Tripos).98,104 |
|
CS |
5. |
A special subject in comparative literature (ii) (also serves as part of Paper 28 of Part II of the English Tripos).104 |
|
CS |
6. |
European film.104 |
Papers available in Part Ia
|
Dutch: |
Du. |
1. |
|
French: |
Fr. |
1, 2. |
|
German: |
Ge. |
1, 2, 3. |
|
Modern Greek: |
Gr. |
1. |
|
Italian: |
It. |
1. |
|
Portuguese: |
Pg. |
1, 2. |
|
Russian: |
Ru. |
1, 2. |
|
Spanish: |
Sp. |
1, 2. |
Papers available in Part Ib
|
Dutch |
Du. |
|
|
French |
Fr. |
|
|
German |
Ge. |
1*, 2*, 3*, 4†, 5†, 6†, 7, 12†. |
|
Modern Greek |
Gr. |
|
|
Italian |
It. |
2†, 3†, 4†, 5†. |
|
Medieval Latin |
ML |
|
|
Neo-Latin |
NL |
1†. |
|
Portuguese |
Pg. |
|
|
Russian |
Ru. |
1*, 2*, 3†, 4†, 5†, 6†, 7†, 8†, 9†. |
|
Spanish |
Sp. |
|
|
Ukrainian |
Uk. |
1108. |
|
Linguistics |
Li. |
1, 2. |
|
Comparative Studies |
CS |
1. |
Papers available in Part II
|
Dutch: |
Du. |
2, 3, 4. |
|
French: |
Fr. |
|
|
German: |
Ge. |
7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15. |
|
Modern Greek: |
Gr. |
4, 5, 6, 7. |
|
Italian: |
It. |
6, 7, 8, 9, 10. |
|
Medieval Latin: |
ML |
|
|
Neo-Latin: |
NL |
1, 2. |
|
Portuguese: |
Pg. |
|
|
Russian: |
Ru. |
3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9. |
|
Spanish: |
Sp. |
|
|
Ukrainian |
Uk. |
|
|
Linguistics: |
Li. |
|
|
Comparative Studies: |
CS |
|
GL 1. |
Greek translation (Paper 1 of Part Ia of the Classical Tripos). |
|
GL 2. |
Alternative Greek translation (Paper 2 of Part Ia of the Classical Tripos). |
|
GL 3. |
Latin translation (Paper 3 of Part Ia of the Classical Tripos). |
|
GL 5. |
Greek or Latin texts (a modified version of Paper 5 of Part Ia of the Classical Tripos). |
|
GL 6. |
Classical questions (a modified version of Paper 6 of Part Ia of the Classical Tripos). |
|
GL 7. |
Greek prose and verse composition (Paper 7 of Part Ia of the Classical Tripos). |
|
GL 8. |
Latin prose and verse composition (Paper 8 of Part Ia of the Classical Tripos). |
|
GL 11. |
Passages for translation from Greek authors (Paper 1 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos). |
|
GL 12. |
Alternative passages for translation from Greek authors (Paper 2 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos). |
|
GL 13. |
Passages for translation from Latin authors (Paper 3 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos). |
|
GL 15. |
Greek literature (Paper 5 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos). |
|
GL 16. |
Latin literature (Paper 6 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos). |
|
GL 17. |
Greek and Roman history (Paper 7 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos). |
|
GL 18. |
Greek and Roman philosophy (Paper 8 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos). |
|
GL 19. |
Greek and Roman art and archaeology (Paper 9 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos). |
|
GL 20. |
Greek and Latin philology and linguistics (Paper 10 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos). |
|
GL 21. |
Translation from English into Greek prose and verse (Paper 11 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos). |
|
GL 22. |
Translation from English into Latin prose and verse (Paper 12 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos). |
Subject to the provisions of Regulation 24, candidates for the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos who take any of the papers in this schedule may submit the alternative exercises permitted for those papers.
|
Paper 2. |
Scandinavian history in the Viking Age. |
|
Paper 5. |
Old English language and literature. |
|
Paper 6. |
Old Norse language and literature. |
|
Paper 7. |
Medieval Welsh language and literature. |
|
Paper 8. |
Medieval Irish language and literature. |
|
Paper 7. |
Advanced medieval Welsh language and literature. |
|
Paper 8. |
Advanced medieval Irish language and literature. |
|
Paper 11. |
Germanic philology. |
|
Paper 12. |
Celtic philology. |
|
Paper A1. |
A prescribed Greek author or authors, and a prescribed Latin author or authors. |
|
Paper A2. |
Prescribed Greek texts. |
|
Paper A3. |
Prescribed Latin texts. |
|
Paper B1. |
Plato. |
|
Paper B2. |
Aristotle. |
|
Paper C4. |
A subject in ancient or medieval European history. |
|
Paper D3. |
A topic within classical archaeology and/or art. |
|
Paper E2. |
The Greek language. |
|
Paper E3. |
The Latin language. |
|
Paper 2. |
Tragedy. |
|
Paper 3. |
Chaucer. |
|
Paper 10. |
Postcolonial and related literatures. |
|
Paper 12. |
Special subject II, Literature and visual culture (in any year in which the subject ‘Literature and visual culture’ has been prescribed as an option by the Faculty Board of English). |
|
Paper 13. |
History of the English language.98 |
|
Paper 18. |
European history, since 1890. |
|
Paper 4. |
History of political thought from c. 1700 to c. 1890. |
|
Paper 20. |
A subject in modern European history specified by the Faculty Board. |
|
Paper 22. |
A subject in English or European or English and European history in the modern period specified by the Faculty Board from time to time. |
|
Paper 28. |
A subject in extra-European history specified by the Faculty Board from time to time. |
Papers in the subject Experimental Psychology.
|
Paper Is. 13. |
Middle Eastern and Islamic culture. |
|
Paper Is. 21. |
Middle Eastern and Islamic history, 5. |
|
Paper Is. 22. |
Middle Eastern and Islamic history, 6. |
|
Paper 11. |
Aesthetics. |
|
Paper Int. 7. |
Society, politics, and culture in Latin America. |
|
|
Date by which titles are to be submitted |
Date by which approval is to be obtained |
Date by which projects and dissertations are to be submitted |
|
Projects |
Third Friday of Full Easter Term next preceding the examination |
End of Easter Term
|
Second Friday of Full Michaelmas Term
|
|
Optional dissertations |
Third Friday of Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination |
Last day of Full Michaelmas Term
|
Monday of the last week of Full Lent Term
|
These papers and the corresponding Oral Examination (Oral Examination A) will be of a standard of difficulty appropriate for candidates who had no knowledge, or relatively little knowledge, of the foreign language before entry to the University.
Papers A1 and A2 (two hours) will consist of exercises designed to test candidates’ knowledge of essential vocabulary and grammatical structures, their ability to comprehend (and in certain cases to translate) authentic material in the foreign language, and their skill in the active use of the foreign language. The exercises set for Papers A1 and A2 in each language will be specified by the Faculty Board from time to time; they will not necessarily be identical in all languages.
The maximum mark allocated to Paper A2 will be two-thirds of the maximum mark allocated to a three-hour paper.
Paper A3 may include questions on literary, cultural, or historical topics, some of which may be based on more extensive material in the foreign language, as specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
The examination will consist of (a) reading aloud a passage taken from a text chosen by the Examiners, and (b) a conversation based either on the subject-matter of the text or on a prescribed topic, as specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
A copy of the chosen text will be made available to each candidate not less than fifteen minutes before the beginning of his or her examination.
The maximum mark allocated to the oral examination will be one-third of the maximum mark allocated to a three-hour written paper.
This paper will consist of one or more passages in the foreign language. Exercises on the passage(s) may include questions of a grammatical and lexical nature, critical response, précis, and guided writing. Candidates will normally be required to answer in the foreign language. Candidates will not be required to translate a passage or passages of continuous prose into the foreign language, although brief grammatically testing extracts or sentences may be selected for translation from or into English.
This paper (two hours) will contain exercises in translation from the foreign language, of which one may be a commentary on a passage in the foreign language or a commentary on a translation or an exercise in comparative translation. In Portuguese and in Spanish four questions will be set, of which candidates will be required to attempt three; in all other languages three questions will be set, of which candidates will be required to attempt two. In Dutch, French, German, Italian, Portuguese, and Spanish the passages set will be chosen from material in the foreign language not earlier than 1500, in Russian from material not earlier than 1700, and in modern Greek, Hungarian, and Polish from material not earlier than 1800.
The maximum mark allocated to this paper will be two-thirds of the maximum mark allocated to a three-hour paper.
The examination for this paper will consist of two exercises, (a) translation from English into the foreign language (two hours), and (b) listening comprehension test (one and a half hours).
Section (a) will consist of one or more passages of English prose, amounting to not more than 400 words in total, for translation into the foreign language.
Section (b). In the listening comprehension test candidates will be required to listen to a passage of recorded material in the foreign language, of not less than five minutes and not more than ten minutes in length, during which they will be allowed to make notes; after an interval the passage will be repeated, and candidates will be required to answer in writing questions on the material presented. The questions will be posed, and answers will be required, in the foreign language.
The examination will consist of (a) reading aloud a passage taken from a text chosen by the Examiners, and (b) conversation on the subject-matter of the text. The examination may also include conversation on general topics.
A copy of the chosen text will be made available to each candidate not less than fifteen minutes before the beginning of his or her examination.
The maximum mark allocated to the oral examination will be one-third of the maximum mark allocated to a three-hour written paper.
The examination will consist of a twenty-minute conversation between the candidate and the Examiners on a topic of the candidate's own choice or one chosen by the candidate from a list of four topics specified for each language by the Faculty Board. The topics specified by the Faculty Board, which will be appropriate to the range of papers available in Schedule II, will be announced not later than the division of the Easter Term each year for the examination to be held in October of the following year.
The maximum mark allocated to the oral examination will be half the maximum mark allocated to each of Papers C1 and C2.
A candidate who offered one modern language and one classical language in Part Ia, choosing Option A in the modern language and Option B in the classical language, shall offer in Part Ib:
In Greek a candidate may additionally offer Paper GL 21; in Latin, Paper GL 22.
A candidate who offered one modern language and classical Greek in Part Ia, choosing Option A in classical Greek and Option B in the modern language, shall offer in Part Ib:
A candidate may additionally offer Paper GL 21.
A candidate who offered one modern language and one classical language in Part Ia, choosing Option B in both, shall offer in Part Ib:
In Greek a candidate may additionally offer Paper GL 21; in Latin, Paper GL 22.
1. The Music Tripos shall consist of three Parts: Part Ia, Part Ib, and Part II.
2. A student may be a candidate for honours in Part Ia if he or she has kept one term, provided that three complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
3. A student who has obtained honours in Part Ia of the Music Tripos or in another Honours Examination may be a candidate for honours in Part Ib117 in the year next after so obtaining honours, provided that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
4. A student who has obtained honours in Part Ib of the Music Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part II in the year next after so obtaining honours, provided that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
5. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for any Part and also for another Honours Examination or the Mus.B. Examination, in the same term.
6. No student who has been a candidate for honours in any Part shall again be a candidate for honours in the same Part.
7. Subject to the provisions of Regulation 5, a student who is not eligible to be a candidate for honours may be a candidate for any Part of the Tripos so as to qualify as a candidate for the Mus.B. Examination, provided that he or she has kept four terms at least.
8. There shall be three separate bodies of Examiners, one for Part Ia, one for Part Ib, and one for Part II. The Faculty Board of Music shall nominate such number of Examiners as they shall deem sufficient to conduct the examinations.
9. The Faculty Board shall have power to nominate one or more Assessors to assist the Examiners in any of the subjects of the Tripos. Assessors shall be responsible for setting the paper or papers or other tests in the subjects assigned to them, and shall present to the Examiners such written reports as the Examiners may require. Assessors may be summoned, for the purpose of consultation and advice, to meetings of the Examiners, but shall not be entitled to vote.
10. There shall be a separate class-list for each Part of the Tripos. In each list the names of the successful candidates shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in each of the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. In each class-list a mark of distinction may be awarded for special excellence.
11. The names of candidates who have satisfied the Examiners under Regulation 7 shall be placed in an alphabetical list headed ‘The following (who are not candidates for honours) have attained the honours standard’.
12. The scheme of examination for Part Ia shall be:
|
Paper 1. |
Harmony and counterpoint I. |
|
Paper 2. |
Harmony and counterpoint II. |
|
Paper 3. |
Historical subjects. |
|
Paper 4. |
Historical and cultural studies. |
|
Paper 5. |
Analysis. |
|
Paper 6. |
Practical musicianship. |
Papers 1 and 3–5 shall be of three hours’ duration. Paper 2 shall consist of a portfolio of written work; the arrangements for submission of the portfolio shall be prescribed by the Faculty Board. Paper 6 shall consist of an aural test of not more than three hours’ duration, together with a separate keyboard test. A candidate for Part Ia shall offer all the papers for that Part.
13. The scheme of examination for Part Ib shall be:
|
Paper 1. |
Portfolio of tonal compositions. |
|
Paper 2. |
Analysis. |
|
Paper 3. |
Portfolio of free compositions. |
|
Paper 4. |
Dissertation. |
|
Paper 5. |
Advanced keyboard skills. |
The Faculty Board shall have the power to prescribe, not later than the division of the Easter Term in the year next before the examination to which they apply, not more than seven additional papers, which will be divided into two sections: (A) Historical topics and (B) Other topics.
Each paper shall be of three hours’ duration, with the following exceptions:
14. A candidate for Part Ib shall offer five papers in all: Papers 1 and 2; and three other papers chosen from Papers 3–5 and from the additional papers prescribed by the Faculty Board, provided that at least one paper shall be from Section A of the additional papers. At least two of the papers must be from among those examined by a three-hour written examination.
15. A candidate for Part Ib shall be allowed to present a recital either on an instrument or of singing. Such a recital, if of sufficient merit, may be taken into account by the Examiners.
16. The scheme of the examination for Part II shall be:
|
Paper 1. |
Dissertation. |
|
Paper 2. |
Advanced tonal composition. |
|
Paper 3. |
Portfolio of free compositions. |
|
Paper 4. |
Analysis portfolio. |
|
Paper 5. |
Notation portfolio. |
|
Paper 6. |
Test of performance. |
|
Paper 7. |
Fugue. |
The Faculty Board shall have the power to prescribe, not later than the division of the Easter Term in the year next before the examination to which they apply, not more than ten additional papers.
Each paper shall be of three hours’ duration, with the following exceptions:
17. A candidate for Part II shall offer six papers in all: these shall include at least one and not more than four from Papers 1–5, and at least two from Papers 6–7 and the additional papers announced by the Faculty Board under Regulation 16. A candidate must offer a combination of papers that is examined by at least six hours of written examination.
18. A candidate who offers either Paper 1 or Paper 3 in Part Ib, or Papers 2–5 in Part II, shall submit a portfolio to the Chairman of Examiners so as to arrive not later than the following dates: for Paper 3 in Part Ib or Paper 3 in Part II, the fourth day of Full Easter Term in which the examination is held; for Paper 4 in Part II, the eleventh day of Full Easter Term in which the examination is held; for Paper 1 in Part Ib or Papers 2 and 5 in Part II, the fifteenth day of Full Easter Term in which the examination is held. The compositions, analyses, or transcriptions contained in such a portfolio shall be written by the candidate during the current academical year; each separate item shall be initialled by the teacher under whose direction it was written, as an indication that the teacher approves the submission. Candidates will be required to declare that the contents of the portfolio are their own work and that they do not contain material already used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose.
19. (a) The examination for Paper 4 in Part Ib and Paper 1 in Part II shall consist of a dissertation on a musical subject of the candidate's own choice approved by the Faculty Board which falls wholly or substantially outside the subject or subjects chosen by the candidate for any other papers. A candidate who wishes to offer such a dissertation shall submit the proposed title to the relevant Chairman of Examiners so as to arrive not later than the division of Michaelmas Term preceding the examination.
(b) Each candidate must obtain the approval of the proposed subject by the Teaching Committee of the Faculty Board not later than the division of the Lent Term.
(c) A dissertation for Part Ib shall be of not less than 5,000 words and not more than 7,000 words (excluding bibliography and appendices but including footnotes). A dissertation for Part II shall be of not less than 7,000 words and not more than 10,000 words (excluding bibliography and appendices but including footnotes). Dissertations shall be in typewritten form, unless previous permission has been obtained from the Chairman of Examiners to present the dissertation in manuscript.
(d) Each candidate shall submit two copies of her or his dissertation to the appropriate Chairman of Examiners so as to arrive not later than the eighth day of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held. The Examiners shall have power to request an electronic copy of the dissertation in addition.
20. Each candidate will be expected to sign a declaration indicating that the work submitted for Paper 2 of Part Ia, a dissertation under Regulation 19, or an essay for any other paper, is her or his own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration, and that it does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose.
21. For the purpose of drawing up the class-list the Examiners for Part II shall have the power to call a candidate for interview on matters arising from the examination, but they shall take account of such an interview only if it would be to the candidate's advantage.
22. The Faculty Board may issue from time to time supplementary regulations defining all or any of the subjects of the examination, and may modify or alter such supplementary regulations as occasion may require, due care being taken that sufficient notice is given of any alteration.
23. Before the division of the Easter Term in each year the Faculty Board shall give notice of the subjects to be set for Papers 3 and 4 of Part Ia for the examination to be held in the academical year next following, provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination is adversely affected.
Not less than two weeks before the start of the examination by written papers, the Board shall notify candidates of the works prescribed for Paper 5 of Part Ia and Paper 2 of Part Ib.
The paper will consist of an exercise on sixteenth-century counterpoint and the completion of a song accompaniment.
Candidates will be required to prepare a fugal exposition, a set of variations (either for piano or on a ground), and complete a passage for string quartet from a given opening. The paper will be made available between 10 a.m. and noon on the fourth Monday of Full Easter Term and is to be returned by noon on the following day (i.e. after a period of 24 hours).
The paper will be divided into two sections. The first will contain questions on a subject in Western music; candidates will be required to answer two questions. The second will include questions on the principles of editing, using materials related to the period or repertory prescribed for the first section; candidates will be required to answer one question.
The paper will be divided into two sections. The first will contain questions on a subject in Western music. The second will include questions on Western music, ethnomusicology, music and science, or notation. Candidates will be required to answer three questions, at least one from each section.
The paper will be divided into two sections. In the first section, compositions, or extracts from compositions, either from the period 1700–1780 or from the period 1780–1830 will be provided for analysis. A recording of the compositions or extracts will be played once to candidates at the beginning of the examination; candidates will be permitted to annotate their scores while listening. In the second section, compositions or extracts from compositions from the period not represented in the first section will be provided for analysis. The compositions or extracts examined in the second section will be drawn from a repertoire prescribed by the Faculty Board at the beginning of the academical year in which the examination takes place. Candidates will be required to answer two questions, one from each section.
Aural tests will include: a memorization test (rhythms); dictation exercises (melodies and three-part counterpoint); a mistake-spotting test; timbre recognition and scoring exercises; recognition of set pieces; and aural analysis.
Keyboard tests will include: reading the score of a string quartet; transposition of a chorale; harmonization of a melody (in a style from the period before 1830); realization of a figured bass at the keyboard; and reading three-part sixteenth-century counterpoint using C3, C4, and F4 clefs.
Candidates will be required to submit a portfolio comprising two tonal compositions and a fugue in three or four parts, together with a recording, on conventional instruments, of one of the two compositions. The compositions shall be in different forms chosen from the following: binary, ternary, scherzo and trio, ritornello, rondo, theme and variations, sonata. The fugue must demonstrate knowledge of invertible counterpoint, and may be scored for any traditional combination of instruments; it should not exceed seventy bars in length.
In place of one of the two compositions, candidates may submit a through-composed song or group of songs, each of which must possess a clear and appropriate formal structure, for solo voice and piano accompaniment, or for solo voice and accompaniment by a group of instruments. One of the two non-fugal compositions shall be of not more than about eight minutes’ duration, excluding repeats, and the other two compositions shall be of not more than about five minutes’ duration, excluding repeats. Each composition or group of songs shall be for an ensemble of not more than five players. One composition may be for solo keyboard (including organ) or other polyphonic instrument, but melody instruments may be used only in ensemble. The fugue may also be for a keyboard instrument. Candidates will be responsible for providing a recording of an acceptable quality, but the quality of recorded sound will not contribute to the final mark.
The paper will be divided into two sections. In the first, compositions, or extracts from compositions, either from the period 1830–1914 or from the period 1914 to the present day will be prescribed not less than two weeks before the start of the examination by written papers. The choice of period for the prescribed works will be at the Examiners’ discretion. Candidates will be permitted to bring unmarked copies of the relevant scores into the examination, and will be required to answer questions on the works. In the second section, compositions or extracts from compositions from the period not represented by the prescribed works will be provided for analysis. Candidates will be required to answer three questions, at least one from each section.
Candidates will be required to submit a portfolio of three compositions. One should be a setting of words, and one should include either fugal elements or incorporate the techniques of groundbass and/or chaconne. Normal staff notation will usually be expected, but electro-acoustic submissions are also acceptable. In addition, each candidate must submit a recording of at least one of the three pieces.
The examination will consist of five components. Three will be examined after a total of ten minutes’ preparation by the candidate: (i) harmonization of a melody; (ii) orchestral score-reading; and (iii) vocal score-reading (C1, C3, C4, and F4 clefs). The other two components – (iv) figured bass and (v) transposition of a song accompaniment – will be given out two days before the examination. The instrumentalist and singer with whom to perform, respectively, (iv) and (v) will be supplied by the Examiners.
The examination will consist of a recital of not more than ten minutes’ duration either on an instrument or of singing. Candidates should inform the Chairman of Examiners not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination of the instrument chosen or the type of voice (this information must be supplied in written form, and initialled by the candidate's Director of Studies). Candidates must provide an accompanist or page turner (or both) if required.
Candidates will be required to submit a portfolio comprising one substantial composition, which should be either an instrumental work in four movements or an extended song cycle. The tonal idiom should be that of the mid to late nineteenth century; the duration of the composition should be between thirty and forty-five minutes. Candidates will be required to submit a recording of the composition on conventional instruments. The composition should be scored for a maximum of five performers (including a singer, in the case of a song cycle). The instruments are to be chosen from the following: flute, oboe, clarinet, bassoon, French horn, piano, violin, viola, cello, double bass. Melody instruments may be used either in a duo with piano or in an ensemble of at least three instruments; the piano may be used on its own.
Candidates will be required to submit a portfolio of three compositions. One should be a setting of words, and one should include fugal elements and/or incorporate the techniques of ground bass and/or chaconne. One piece should be for orchestra (with or without voices) or ensemble of no fewer than ten players. One piece should be no shorter than eight minutes in duration. Normal staff notation will usually be expected, but electro-acoustic submissions are also acceptable. In addition, each candidate must submit a recording of at least one of the three pieces.
Candidates will be required to submit two essays involving the use of analytical techniques, to a maximum total length of 8,000 words.
Candidates will be required to submit three projects involving the study of notations and of original source material, to a maximum total length of 6,000 words in addition to transcriptions.
The examination for this paper will consist of a test of performance.
The test of performance, which may take place before an audience consisting of staff, students, and others, including External and Internal Examiners, will consist of a recital of not more than twenty-three minutes’ playing time, on an instrument or in accompaniment of an instrument or of singing. Details of the complete programme must be sent to the Secretary of the Faculty Board for approval by the Faculty Board, so as to arrive not later than the fourth day of Full Lent Term next preceding the examination. Candidates must provide an accompanist or page turner (or both) if required. Candidates must provide the Examiners with two copies of each piece they are performing, in the edition being used. In addition candidates should provide the Examiners with two copies of a programme setting out the pieces in the order in which they are to be performed.
Candidates will be required to compose a fugue in not more than four parts from a choice of subjects.
1. The Natural Sciences Tripos shall consist of four Parts: Part Ia, Part Ib, Part II, and Part III.
2. The following may present themselves as a candidate for honours in Part Ia:
3. A student who has obtained honours in another Honours Examination may be a candidate for honours in Part Ib in the year next after so obtaining honours, provided that the student has kept four terms and that six complete terms have not passed after her or his first term of residence.118
4. A student who not earlier than the fourth term after her or his first term of residence has obtained honours in an Honours Examination other than Part Ia of the Natural Sciences Tripos or Part Ia of the Medical and Veterinary Sciences Tripos, may be a candidate for honours in Part II in the year after or next but one after so obtaining honours; provided that the student has kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after her or his first term of residence.1
A student who, under arrangements approved by the Committee of Management for the Natural Sciences Tripos, has spent not less than three terms studying at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology and has been certified by the President of the Institute after consultation with the Chairman of Examiners for Part II of the Natural Sciences Tripos to have studied diligently during that period, shall be deemed thereby to have obtained honours in that Part of the Tripos. A list containing the names of persons so qualified shall be certified by the Chairman of the Committee of Management and published in the Reporter.
5. The following may present themselves as a candidate for honours in Part III, provided that he or she has not proceeded to the B.A. Degree:
6. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for any Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
7. No student who has been a candidate for any Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
8. The Committee of Management for the Natural Sciences Tripos in consultation with the Faculty Board or comparable authority concerned shall have power to issue from time to time supplementary regulations defining or limiting all or any of the subjects of the examination. Due care shall be taken that sufficient notice is given of any alteration of such supplementary regulations.
9. Faculty Boards or comparable authorities shall be identified as nominating bodies, as specified below, and shall be responsible for nominating a Senior Examiner and such number of Examiners and Assessors as they may deem sufficient. An Examiner may be appointed to examine in more than one Part of the Tripos in any year.
|
Nominating bodies |
Subjects |
|
Part Ia |
|
|
Faculty Board of Biology |
Biology of Cells Elementary Mathematics for Biologists Evolution and Behaviour Physiology of Organisms Mathematical Biology |
|
Faculty Board of Earth Sciences and Geography |
Geology |
|
Faculty Board of Mathematics |
Mathematics |
|
Faculty Board of Physics and Chemistry |
Chemistry Physics |
|
Faculty Boards of Earth Sciences and Geography, and Physics and Chemistry, jointly |
Materials and Mineral Sciences |
|
Faculty Board of Biology |
Animal Biology Biochemistry and Molecular Biology Cell and Developmental Biology Ecology Experimental Psychology Neurobiology Pathology Pharmacology Physiology Plant and Microbial Sciences |
|
Faculty Board of Earth Sciences and Geography |
Geological Sciences A Geological Sciences B Mineral Sciences |
|
Board of History and Philosophy of Science |
History and Philosophy of Science |
|
Faculty Board of Mathematics |
Mathematics |
|
Faculty Board of Physics and Chemistry |
Chemistry A Chemistry B Materials Science and Metallurgy Physics A Physics B |
|
Faculty Board of Biology |
Biochemistry Biological and Biomedical Sciences Genetics |
|
|
Neuroscience |
|
|
Pathology |
|
|
Pharmacology |
|
|
Physiology, Development, and Neuroscience |
|
|
Physiology and Psychology |
|
|
Plant Sciences Psychology Zoology |
|
Faculty Board of Earth Sciences and Geography |
Geological Sciences |
|
Board of History and Philosophy of Science |
History and Philosophy of Science |
|
Faculty Board of Physics and Chemistry |
Astrophysics |
|
|
Chemistry |
|
|
Experimental and Theoretical Physics |
|
|
Materials Science and Metallurgy |
|
Faculty Boards of Earth Sciences and Geography, and Physics and Chemistry, jointly |
Physical Sciences |
|
Faculty Board of Biology |
Biochemistry |
|
Faculty Board of Earth Sciences and Geography |
Geological Sciences |
|
Board of History and Philosophy of Science |
History and Philosophy of Science |
|
Faculty Board of Physics and Chemistry |
Astrophysics Chemistry Experimental and Theoretical Physics Materials Science and Metallurgy |
10. There shall be three bodies of Examiners, one for Part Ia, one for Part Ib, and one for Part II and Part III. For each of the three bodies there shall be a Chairman of Examiners, provided that the same person may be appointed Chairman for two or more of the bodies. For each body there may also be one or more Assistant Chairmen of Examiners. Chairmen and Assistant Chairmen of Examiners shall be appointed on the nomination of the Committee of Management for the Natural Sciences Tripos; nominations shall be made not later than the last day of Full Easter Term in the calendar year next preceding that in which the examination is to be held.
11. The Examiners in each subject shall be jointly responsible for all the questions set and for the marks awarded in that subject. At least two Examiners or one Examiner and one Assessor shall set and conduct every oral and practical examination.
12. The Examiners shall have regard to the style and method of candidates’ answers, and shall give credit for excellence in these respects.
13. The Assessors shall propose questions in the parts of the subjects assigned to them by the Examiners, shall look over the answers of the candidates to these questions, and shall report thereon to the Examiners. The Assessors may be required to assist the Examiners in setting and conducting every oral and practical examination. The Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
14. The Chairmen of Examiners shall communicate the marks of all candidates to the Registrary.
15. The subjects of examination in Part Ia, which shall be divided into two groups, A and B, shall be as follows:
Group A |
||
|
|
Biology of Cells |
Geology |
|
|
Chemistry |
Materials and Mineral Sciences |
|
Computer Science120 |
Physics |
|
|
|
Evolution and Behaviour |
Physiology of Organisms |
Group B |
||
|
|
Elementary Mathematics for Biologists Mathematics |
Mathematical Biology |
|
The maximum marks allocated to each subject shall be: |
||
|
|
Each subject in Group A |
100 |
|
|
Elementary Mathematics for Biologists |
70 |
|
|
Mathematics |
75 |
|
|
Mathematical Biology |
75 |
16. Each candidate shall offer three subjects from Group A and one subject from Group B providing that no candidate shall offer both Biology of Cells and Computer Science. A candidate taking the examination under the provisions of Regulation 2(b) shall not offer Biology of Cells, Evolution and Behaviour, or Physiology of Organisms, if he or she has previously obtained honours in the Medical and Veterinary Sciences Tripos.
17. (a) There shall be separate examinations set for each subject, as specified below:
|
|
Chemistry |
Materials and Mineral Sciences |
|
|
Computer Science120 |
Physics |
|
|
Elementary Mathematics for Biologists |
Physiology of Organisms |
|
|
Evolution and Behaviour |
Mathematical Biology |
|
|
Mathematics |
|
|
Biology of Cells |
Geology |
The practical examination (where such exists) may include a viva voce examination.
(b) In addition to the written and practical examinations, for all subjects except Biology of Cells, candidates shall be required to submit records of practical work and/or fieldwork for each subject. Such records shall be presented for inspection on the request of the Examiners as follows: in Computer Science, on a date or dates announced by the Head of the Computer Laboratory no later than the division of Michaelmas Term; in Materials and Mineral Sciences, on a date or dates announced by the Heads of the Departments of Earth Sciences and Materials Science and Metallurgy not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term; in Mathematics, on a date or dates to be announced by the Examiners not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term; in Physiology of Organisms, not later than the division of the Easter Term; in other subjects, on the day after the last written examination in that subject. The records shall bear the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was performed.
(c) In assigning marks for the examination in Geology, the Examiners may, at their discretion, take account of the note-books submitted by candidates. In assigning marks for the examination in all other subjects, except Biology of Cells, the Examiners shall take account of the records of practical work and/or fieldwork submitted by candidates. Assessment shall be undertaken by the Examiners or, for the following subjects, be provided to the Examiners from the following persons:
|
Subject |
Provider of assessment |
|
Chemistry |
Head of the Department of Chemistry |
|
Computer Science |
Head of the Computer Laboratory |
|
Elementary Mathematics for Biologists |
Chairman of the Faculty Board of Biology |
|
Evolution and Behaviour |
Chairman of the Faculty Board of Biology |
|
Materials and Mineral Sciences |
Heads of the Departments of Earth Sciences and of Materials Science and Metallurgy, jointly |
|
Physics |
Head of the Department of Physics |
|
Mathematical Biology |
Chairman of the Faculty Board of Biology |
18. The names of the candidates who obtain honours in Part Ia shall be arranged in three classes. The names in each class shall be arranged in alphabetical order.
19. In arranging the class-list the Examiners shall take into account the absolute number of aggregate marks obtained and may further take into account the standard obtained by candidates in each subject.121
20. The subjects of examination in Part Ib shall be as follows:
|
Animal Biology |
Materials Science and Metallurgy |
|
|
Biochemistry and Molecular Biology |
Mathematics |
|
|
Cell and Developmental Biology |
Mineral Sciences |
|
|
Chemistry A |
Neurobiology |
|
|
Chemistry B |
Pathology |
|
|
Ecology |
Pharmacology |
|
|
Experimental Psychology |
Physics A |
|
|
Geological Sciences A |
Physics B |
|
|
Geological Sciences B |
Physiology |
|
|
History and Philosophy of Science |
Plant and Microbial Sciences |
21. Each candidate shall offer three subjects, provided that:
22. No candidate shall offer Mathematics if he or she has previously obtained honours in Part Ib of the Mathematical Tripos, or unless he or she:
23. (a) There shall be separate examinations set for each subject, as specified below:
|
|
*Animal Biology |
*Materials Science and Metallurgy |
|
|
*Chemistry A |
*Mathematics |
|
|
*Chemistry B |
*Mineral Sciences |
|
|
*Ecology |
*Physics A |
|
*History and Philosophy of Science |
*Physics B |
|
|
Physiology |
|
|
|
Biochemistry and Molecular Biology |
*Geological Sciences A |
|
|
Cell and Developmental Biology |
*Geological Sciences B |
|
|
*Experimental Psychology |
*Plant and Microbial Sciences |
|
|
Neurobiology |
*Pharmacology |
|
|
Pathology |
The practical examination (where such exists) shall be as follows: in Experimental Psychology and Neurobiology, it shall be of one and a half hours’ duration; in Geological Sciences A and Geological Sciences B, it shall be in two parts, one of three hours’ duration and one of one and a half hours’ duration; in all other subjects, it shall be of three hours’ duration.
(b) A candidate who offers one or more of the subjects marked with an asterisk shall, in addition to the written and practical examinations, be required to submit records of practical work and/or fieldwork for each subject. Such records shall be presented for the inspection of the Examiners on a date or dates to be announced by the Head of the Department concerned; they shall bear the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was carried out.
(c) In assigning marks for the examinations in Geological Sciences A and Geological Sciences B, the Examiners may, at their discretion, take account of the records of practical work and/or fieldwork (where such exist) submitted by candidates. In assigning marks for the examination in all other subjects, the Examiners shall take account of the records submitted by candidates (where such exist). Assessment shall be undertaken by the Examiners or, for the following subjects, be provided to the Examiners from the following persons:
|
|
Subject |
Provider of assessment |
|
|
Animal Biology |
Head of the Department of Zoology |
|
|
Chemistry A |
Head of the Department of Chemistry |
|
|
Chemistry B |
Head of the Department of Chemistry |
|
|
Experimental Psychology |
Head of the Department of Experimental Psychology |
|
|
Materials Science and Metallurgy |
Head of the Department of Materials Science and Metallurgy |
|
|
Physics A |
Head of the Department of Physics |
|
Physics B |
Head of the Department of Physics |
24. The names of the candidates who obtain honours in Part Ib shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order.
25. In arranging the class-list the Examiners may take into account the standard attained by candidates in each subject as well as the aggregate of marks obtained by them.
26. The subjects of examination in Part II shall be as follows:
|
|
Astrophysics |
Neuroscience |
|
|
Biochemistry |
Pathology |
|
|
Biological and Biomedical Sciences |
Pharmacology |
|
|
Chemistry |
Physical Sciences |
|
|
Experimental and Theoretical Physics |
Physiology, Development, and Neuroscience |
|
|
Genetics |
Physiology and Psychology |
|
|
Geological Sciences |
Plant Sciences |
|
|
History and Philosophy of Science |
Psychology |
|
|
Materials Science and Metallurgy |
Zoology |
27. Each candidate for Part II shall offer one of these subjects, and shall satisfy the requirements set out in Regulation 30 for the subject offered.
28. Each candidate submitting a dissertation, essay, thesis, project report, or similar exercise under Regulation 30 shall be required to sign a declaration that the exercise submitted is her or his own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration, and that it does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose; if two or more candidates have undertaken work in collaboration, they shall each be required to indicate the extent of their contribution. The Examiners shall have power if they consider that a piece of work submitted for the examination is not sufficiently legible, to require that it be resubmitted in typescript.
29. For each subject in Part II the Examiners may, at their discretion, examine a candidate viva voce.
30. Examination requirements for the particular subjects shall be as follows:
The practical, project, or other work and their examination requirements shall be prescribed from time to time by the Director of the Institute of Astronomy, and shall be carried out in accordance with instructions which shall be announced not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination. As an indication of good faith, each candidate shall submit, with the records of her or his work, a declaration that these instructions have been observed. The records of practical, project, or other work shall be submitted to the Director of the Institute of Astronomy not later than a date announced by the Director not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
The Examiners shall be provided by the Director with assessments of the work submitted by the candidates, and shall take account of this work in drawing up the class list.
The essay shall be on a subject chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department of Biochemistry not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term. The essay shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the eighth day of Full Lent Term.
The thesis shall give an account of an investigation undertaken by the candidate, the subject of which shall be chosen by the candidate in consultation with staff of the Department of Biochemistry. Each candidate shall inform the Head of the Department of Biochemistry of the subject chosen before the end of Full Michaelmas Term. The thesis shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the ninth day of Full Easter Term.
In assigning marks for the examination the Examiners shall take account of candidates’ essays and theses.
The Major and Minor Subjects shall be announced by the Faculty Board of Biology not later than the division of the Lent Term in the year next preceding the examination. When giving notice of the Subjects to be offered, the Faculty Board of Biology shall have power, in consultation with the Board of Examinations, to announce restrictions on the combinations of subjects that any candidate may offer in the examination.
The subject of the dissertation shall be on a topic related to either the Major or Minor Subject offered by the candidate. The subject shall be either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Chairman of the Faculty Board of Biology, or chosen by the candidate from a list of subjects announced by the Chairman of the Faculty Board. Each candidate shall obtain the approval for her or his subject not later than the division of Michaelmas Term. Dissertations shall be prepared in accordance with guidelines which shall be issued by the Faculty Board of Biology not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term. The dissertation shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the first Friday of Full Easter Term.
The types of further work and their examination requirements shall be announced by the Head of the Department of Chemistry not later than the division of the Easter Term in the year next preceding the examination. The records of further work shall be submitted to the Head of the Department not later than the first Monday of Full Easter Term and shall bear the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was performed. The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department with assessments of the work submitted by candidates, and shall take these assessments into account in assigning marks for the examination.
In drawing up the class-list the Examiners shall take account of the standard attained by a candidate in each part of the examination as well as the aggregate of marks obtained.
A candidate who chooses option (A) shall offer
A candidate who chooses option (B) shall offer
Each paper shall be of three hours’ duration. Candidates shall be allowed one and a half hours for each half-paper.
The types of further work and their examination requirements shall be announced by the Head of the Department of Physics not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term. The records of further work shall be submitted to the Head of the Department not later than the fourth Monday of Full Easter Term and shall bear the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was performed. The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department with assessments of the work submitted by candidates, and shall take these assessments into account in assigning marks for the examination.
In drawing up the class-list the Examiners shall take account of the standard attained by a candidate in each part of the examination as well as the aggregate of marks obtained.
The subject of the essay shall be either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Examiners, or chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Examiners. Each candidate shall either obtain the approval of the Examiners for the subject proposed or notify the Examiners of the subject chosen from the list not later than the end of Full Michaelmas Term. The essay shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the first day of Full Lent Term and shall contain a critical review of an area of genetics or related to genetics.
The subject of the thesis shall be either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Examiners, or chosen by the candidate, subject to the approval of the Examiners, from a list of subjects announced by the Examiners. Each candidate shall obtain the approval of the Examiners for her or his subject not later than the end of Full Michaelmas Term. The thesis shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the seventh day after the last day of Full Lent Term.
In assigning marks for the examination the Examiners shall take account of the submitted essay and thesis.
A candidate who chooses option (A) shall offer
A candidate who chooses option (B) shall offer
The practical work and examination requirements associated with each paper shall be announced by the Head of the Department of Earth Sciences not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term. The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department with assessments of the continually assessed practicals; in assigning marks for the examination the Examiners shall take account of the assessments.
The literature report shall critically review the published literature in a selected field of the Geological Sciences and may be either proposed by the candidate, or chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department not later than the beginning of the Lent Term. Each candidate shall either obtain the approval of the Examiners for the subject proposed, or notify the Examiners of the subject chosen from the list, not later than the division of the Lent Term. The report shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the first Wednesday of Full Easter Term.
The report of a research project shall be on a subject which may be either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Head of the Department of Earth Sciences or chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department by the beginning of the Easter Term in the year next preceding the examination. Each candidate shall either obtain the approval of the Head of the Department for the subject proposed or notify the Head of the Department of the subject chosen from the list not later than 30 June in the year next preceding the examination. The report shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the second day of Full Lent Term.
The records of classwork and fieldwork shall be submitted to the Examiners through the Head of the Department of Earth Sciences not later than the last day of the written examinations and shall bear the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was performed. The types of classwork and fieldwork shall be announced by the Head of the Department not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term.
A candidate who chooses option (A) shall offer
A candidate who chooses option (B) shall offer
The two essays shall each be on a source chosen from a list of prescribed sources which shall be published by the Board of History and Philosophy of Science not later than the end of Full Easter Term in the year next preceding the examination. A candidate shall obtain the approval of the Board for the subjects proposed for the essays not later than the last day of Full Michaelmas Term. The essays shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the division of the Lent Term.
The dissertation shall be on a topic proposed by the candidate and approved by the Board of History and Philosophy of Science not later than the division of the Lent Term. The dissertation shall show evidence of reading, judgement, criticism, and power of exposition, and shall give full references to sources used. The dissertation shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the first Monday of Full Easter Term.
The further work and its examination requirements and submission arrangements shall be announced by the Head of the Department of Materials Science and Metallurgy not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term and shall comprise of course-work and practical work. Records of further work shall be submitted to the Examiners through the Head of the Department and shall bear the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was performed.
The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department with assessments of the work submitted by candidates, and shall take the assessments into account in assigning marks for the examination.
The critical review shall be on a published scientific paper chosen from a list of papers announced by the Chairman of the Faculty Board of Biology not later than the second Friday of Full Michaelmas Term. Each candidate shall notify the Chairman of the paper that he or she has chosen for review not later than the end of Full Michaelmas Term. The review shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the second Friday of Full Lent Term.
The report of a research project shall be on a subject either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Chairman of the Faculty Board of Biology, or chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Chairman, not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term. Each candidate shall either obtain the approval of the Chairman for the subject proposed, or notify the Chairman of the subject chosen from the list, not later than the end of Full Michaelmas Term. The report shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the fifth day of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held.
During Full Easter Term, on a day specified by the Chairman of the Faculty Board of Biology, each candidate shall be required to give a brief oral presentation of her or his project to an audience consisting of staff and students and including internal Examiners.
In assigning marks for the examination the Examiners shall take account of the candidates’ research projects (both the report and the presentation).
The project report shall be on a subject either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Head of the Department of Pathology, or chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term. Each candidate shall either obtain the approval of the Head of the Department for the subject proposed, or notify the Head of the Department of the subject chosen from the list, not later than the second Friday of Full Michaelmas Term. The report or essay shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the end of Full Lent Term, in a format specified by the Head of the Department not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term.
The report of the research project shall be on a subject chosen from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department of Pharmacology not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term. Each candidate shall notify the Head of the Department of the subject chosen from the list not later than the end of Full Michaelmas Term. The report shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the tenth day of Full Easter Term.
During the second or third week of Full Easter Term, each candidate is required to give a brief oral communication to an audience consisting of staff and students of the Department and including the internal Examiners.
In assigning marks for the examination the Examiners shall take account of the written and oral reports of the research projects.
(i) The examination requirements for Half Subject Chemistry shall consist of three written papers, each of one and a half hours’ duration, and the submission of note-books of further work. The types of further work and their examination requirements shall be announced by the Head of the Department of Chemistry not later than the division of the Easter Term in the year next preceding the examination. The records of further work shall be submitted to the Head of the Department not later than the first Monday of Full Easter Term and shall bear the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was performed. The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department with assessments of the work submitted by candidates, and shall take these assessments into account in assigning marks for the examination.
Half Subject Chemistry may not be offered unless the candidate has previously offered either Chemistry A or Chemistry B in Part Ib of the Tripos.
(ii) The examination requirements for the Half Subject Experimental and Theoretical Physics shall consist of:
Each paper shall be of three hours’ duration. Candidates shall be allowed one and a half hours for each half-paper.
The types of further work and their examination requirements shall be announced by the Head of the Department of Physics not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term. Records of further work shall be submitted to the Head of the Department not later than the fourth Monday of Full Easter Term and shall bear the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was performed. The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department with assessments of the work submitted by candidates, and shall take these assessments into account in assigning marks for the examination.
Half Subject Experimental and Theoretical Physics may not be offered unless the candidate has previously offered Physics A or Physics B in Part Ib of the Tripos.
(iii) The examination requirements for Half Subject Geological Sciences shall consist of:
The practical work and examination requirements associated with each paper shall be announced by the Head of the Department of Earth Sciences not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term. The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department with assessments of the continually assessed practicals; in assigning marks for the examination the Examiners shall take account of the assessments.
The submitted literature report shall critically review the published literature in a selected field of the Geological Sciences and may be either proposed by the candidate, or chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department not later than the beginning of the Lent Term. Each candidate shall either obtain the approval of the Examiners for the subject proposed, or notify the Examiners of the subject chosen from the list, not later than the division of the Lent Term. The report shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the first Wednesday of Full Easter Term.
The records of classwork and fieldwork shall be submitted to the Examiners through the Head of the Department of Earth Sciences not later than the last day of the written examinations and shall bear the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was performed. The types of classwork and fieldwork shall be announced by the Head of the Department not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term.
Half Subject Geological Sciences may not be offered unless the candidate has previously offered either Geological Sciences A or Geological Sciences B in Part Ib of the Tripos.
(iv) The examination requirements for Half Subject Materials Science and Metallurgy shall consist of four written papers of one and a half hours’ duration and specified further work. The further work and its examination requirements and submission arrangements shall be announced by the Head of the Department of Materials Science and Metallurgy not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term and shall comprise of course-work and practical work. Records of further work shall be submitted to the Examiners through the Head of the Department and shall bear the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was performed. The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department with assessments of the work submitted by candidates, and shall take the assessments into account in assigning marks for the examination.
Half Subject Materials Science and Metallurgy may not be offered unless the candidate has previously offered Materials Science and Metallurgy in Part Ib of the Tripos.
The report of a research project shall be on a subject which may be either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Head of the Department of Physiology, Development, and Neuroscience or chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department not later than the end of the Easter Term in the year preceding the examination. Each candidate shall either obtain the approval of the Head of Department for the subject proposed, or notify the Head of the Department of the subject chosen from the list, not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term. The report shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the third day of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held.
The types of practical work in Physiology shall be announced by the Head of the Department of Physiology, Development, and Neuroscience not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term. The record of practical work shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the tenth day of Full Lent Term and shall bear the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was performed.
A candidate who offers a project in the field of Physiology shall submit a report on a subject which may be either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Head of the Department of Physiology, Development, and Neuroscience or chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department by the beginning of the Michaelmas Term. Each candidate shall either obtain the approval of the Head of the Department for the subject proposed or notify the Head of the Department of the subject chosen from the list not later than the end of the Michaelmas Term. The three copies of the report shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the third day of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held.
A candidate who offers a project in the field of Psychology shall submit a report on a subject chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department of Experimental Psychology by the beginning of the Michaelmas Term. Each candidate shall obtain the approval of the Head of the Department for the subject chosen from the list not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term. The three copies of the report shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the tenth day of Full Easter Term.
The essay shall be on a subject chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department of Plant Sciences and shall be submitted to the Examiners. The dates of announcement of subjects and submission of essays shall be announced by the Head of the Department not later than the second Friday of Full Michaelmas Term.
The report of a research subject shall be on a subject chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department of Plant Sciences and shall be submitted to the Examiners. The dates of announcement of subjects and submission of essays shall be announced by the Head of the Department not later than the second Friday of Full Michaelmas Term.
The title of the dissertation shall be on a subject chosen by the candidate and approved by the Senior Examiner not later than the division of the Lent Term next preceding the examination. Two copies of the original dissertation, if it is offered, shall be submitted to the Senior Examiner not later than the first Monday of Full Easter Term.
The report of a research project shall be on a subject either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Head of Department of Experimental Psychology or chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department at the beginning of the Michaelmas Term. Each candidate shall obtain the approval of the Head of the Department for the subject chosen not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term. The report shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the tenth day of Full Easter Term.
If a candidate offers four papers and a dissertation, the Examiners shall assess her or his performance on (i) Papers 1, 2, 3 and (ii) either Paper 4 or the dissertation, discounting the one component out of the two in which they judge the candidate's work to be least good.
The essay shall be on a subject chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department of Zoology not later than the end of the first quarter of the Michaelmas Term. The essay shall be submitted to the Examiners on a date which the Head of the Department shall announce not later than the end of the first quarter of the Michaelmas Term.
The records of project work, or practical work, or both may be either chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department of Zoology not later than the end of the first quarter of the Michaelmas Term, or proposed by the candidate and approved by the Head of the Department by not later than the end of the first quarter of the Michaelmas Term. The records shall be submitted to the Examiners on the first day of the written examination and shall bear the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was performed.
The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department of Zoology with assessments of the work submitted by candidates under (c) and (d), and shall take the assessments into account in assigning marks for the examination.
31. For each subject in Part II there shall be published a separate class-list, which shall be signed by the Examiners in that subject, provided that the class-list for the subject Physiology and Psychology shall be signed by the Examiners in both those subjects.
The names of the candidates who obtain honours in each subject or combination of subjects shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order.
In the class-list for the subjects Chemistry, Experimental and Theoretical Physics, and Geological Sciences, a mark (A) shall be attached to the names of those candidates who have taken option A and a mark (B) shall be attached to the names of those candidates who have taken option B. In addition, in the class-list for the subject Geological Sciences, a mark (m) shall be attached to the name of any candidate who has offered two or more papers relating to one or both of the subject areas Mineralogy and Mineral Physics, and whose research project has been approved by the Head of the Department of Earth Sciences as one whose subject falls within the field of mineral sciences.
In the class-list for the subject Psychology, a mark (cn) shall be attached to the name of any candidate who has offered four papers relating to the subject area Psychology (Cognitive Neuroscience), and whose research project and dissertation has been approved by the Head of the Department of Experimental Psychology as one whose subject falls within the field of cognitive neuroscience.
32. The subjects of examination in Part III shall be as follows:
|
|
Astrophysics |
Geological Sciences |
|
|
Biochemistry |
History and Philosophy of Science |
|
|
Chemistry |
Materials Science and Metallurgy |
|
Experimental and Theoretical Physics |
33. Every candidate for Part III shall offer one of these subjects, and shall satisfy the requirements set out in Regulation 36 for the subject offered. In addition to the requirements set out in Regulation 36, the Committee of Management for the Natural Sciences Tripos may authorize no more than ten additional interdisciplinary papers which shall be included in the examination requirements of one or more subjects. Public notice of the interdisciplinary papers shall be given not later than the end of the Easter Term in the year next preceding the examination, provided that the Committee of Management shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no candidate’s preparation for the examination is adversely affected. The Committee of Management shall have power:
34. Every candidate submitting a dissertation, essay, thesis, project report, or similar exercise under Regulation 36 shall be required to sign a declaration that the exercise submitted is her or his own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration, and that it does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose; if two or more candidates have undertaken work in collaboration, they shall each be required to indicate the extent of their contribution. The Examiners shall have power if they consider that a piece of work submitted for the examination is not sufficiently legible, to require that it be resubmitted in typescript.
35. For each subject in Part III the Examiners may, at their discretion, examine a candidate viva voce.
36. Examination requirements for the particular subjects shall be as follows:
The number of written papers to be set and the subject and duration of each paper shall be announced by the Director of the Institute of Astronomy not later than 1 November next preceding the examination.
The subject of the research project shall be chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Director of the Institute of Astronomy not later than the end of the Easter Term in the year next preceding the examination. Each candidate shall notify the Director of the subject chosen from the list not later than the second Friday of Full Michaelmas Term. The report of a research project shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the second Monday of Full Easter Term.
The subject of the research project may be either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Head of the Department of Biochemistry, or chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects, which shall be announced by the Head of the Department not later than the end of the Easter Term in the year next preceding the examination. Each candidate shall either obtain the approval of the Head of the Department for the subject proposed, or notify the Head of the Department of the subject chosen from the list, not later than 31 August next preceding the examination. The report of a research project shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the ninth day of Full Easter Term.
In assigning marks for the examination the Examiners shall take account of candidates’ research reports.
The subject of the research project may be either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Head of the Department of Chemistry, or chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department not later than the division of the Easter Term in the year next preceding the examination. Each candidate shall either obtain the approval of the Head of the Department for the subject proposed, or notify the Head of the Department of the subject chosen from the list, not later than the end of the Full Easter Term in the academical year preceding the examination. The report of a research project shall be submitted to the Examiners through the Head of the Department not later than the Friday following the last day of Full Lent Term.
In assigning marks for the examination the Examiners shall take account of the written reports of the research projects.
The Head of the Department of Physics shall announce not less than five major topics and ten minor topics, and the types of further work for the examination, including the form of assessment for each topic or piece of further work, not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term.
Records of further work shall be submitted to the Examiners through the Head of Department not later than the fifth Monday of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held: they shall bear the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was performed.
The report of a project undertaken in the Long Vacation, if it is offered, shall be submitted not later than the first Monday of Full Michaelmas Term. Such a project shall be on a subject proposed by the candidate and approved by the Head of the Department of Physics; candidates shall submit proposals to the Head of the Department during the preceding Easter Term, and shall obtain the approval of the Head of the Department for the subject proposed not later than the last day of that term.
The subject of the research project may be either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Head of the Department of Physics, or chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term. Each candidate shall either obtain the approval of the Head of the Department for the subject proposed, or notify the Head of the Department of the subject chosen from the list, not later than the end of Full Michaelmas Term. The report of a research project shall be submitted to the Head of the Department not later than the third Monday of Full Easter Term.
The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department of Physics with assessments of the reports or further work submitted by candidates under (b) and (c), and shall take the assessments into account in assigning marks for the examination.
The practical work and examination requirements associated with each paper shall be announced by the Head of the Department of Earth Sciences not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term. The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department of Earth Sciences with assessments of the continually assessed practicals; in assigning marks for the examination the Examiners shall take account of the assessments.
The report of a research project shall be on a subject which may be either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Head of the Department of Earth Sciences or chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department by the beginning of the Lent Term in the year next preceding the examination. Each candidate shall either obtain the approval of the Head of the Department for the subject proposed or notify the Head of the Department of the subject chosen from the list not later than the division of the Lent Term next preceding the examination. The report shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the first Friday of Full Lent Term.
The records of classwork and fieldwork shall be submitted to the Examiners through the Head of the Department of Earth Sciences not later than the last day of the written examinations and shall bear the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was performed. The types of classwork and fieldwork shall be announced by the Head of the Department not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term.
All pieces of work must be approved by the Board of History and Philosophy of Science.
The literature review shall be submitted on the last day of Michaelmas Full Term. The list of short essay titles, from which candidates will choose two titles from four, shall be issued by the Head of the Department of History and Philosophy of Science shortly after the division of Lent Term and students will have one week in which to prepare the two essays for submission to the Examiners. The title of each candidate’s research paper, which must be on a different topic from all other pieces of work, shall be approved by the Board of History and Philosophy of Science at its meeting in the second half of Lent Term. The research paper shall be submitted on the last day of Lent Full Term. The title of the dissertation and supervisor shall be approved by the Board of History and Philosophy of Science at its meeting in the second half of Lent Term. The dissertation shall be submitted at the beginning of the final week of Easter Full Term.
The subject of the research project may be either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Head of the Department of Materials Science and Metallurgy, or chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department not later than the division of Michaelmas Term. Each candidate shall either obtain the approval of the Head of the Department for the subject proposed, or notify the Head of the Department of the subject chosen from the list, not later than the end of the Michaelmas Term. The report of a research project shall be submitted to the Examiners through the Head of the Department on a date to be announced by the Head of the Department not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term.
Details of the course-work and other exercises and their examination requirements shall be announced by the Head of the Department not later than the beginning of Michaelmas Term. The records of course-work and associated exercises shall be submitted to the Examiners through the Head of the Department on a date to be announced by the Head of the Department not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term.
The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department with assessments of the course-work and other exercises, and shall take the assessments into account in assigning marks for the examination.
37. For each subject in Part III there shall be published a separate class-list, which shall be signed by the Examiners in that subject. The names of the candidates who obtain honours in each subject shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order. In arranging the class-list the Examiners for the subject Chemistry in Part III shall take into account the candidate's performance in Part II, where that candidate has been classed in that examination. In the class-list for the subject Geological Sciences, a mark (m) shall be attached to the name of any candidate who has offered two or more papers relating to one or both of the subject areas Mineralogy and Mineral Physics, and whose research project has been approved by the Head of the Department of Earth Sciences as one whose subject falls within the field of mineral sciences.
Unless otherwise stated, the written papers and practical examinations in a subject shall cover all aspects of the course.
This paper is appropriate for candidates who do not have an advanced qualification in Mathematics before entry to the University.
All candidates will offer Paper 1. Paper 2A is to be offered by candidates not offering Mathematics in Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos. Paper 2B is to be taken by candidates offering Mathematics in Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos.
The examination requirements, unless specified differently by Notice not later than the division of the Lent Term in the year next preceding the examination, shall be as follows:
|
Major Subject |
four written papers of three hours’ duration each |
|
Minor Subject |
one written paper of three hours’ duration |
The maximum marks allocated to each component shall be as follows:
|
Major Subject |
65 |
|
Minor Subject |
15 |
|
Dissertation |
20 |
The examination will comprise two alternative options, (A) and (B). Option (A) is for students intending to graduate after taking Part II; option (B) is for those who plan to proceed to Part III. All candidates shall offer Paper 2. Candidates who have previously offered Chemistry A and Chemistry B in Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos shall also offer Paper 1A and Paper 4A; candidates who have previously offered only one out of Chemistry A and Chemistry B in that examination may also offer either Paper 1A and Paper 4A or Paper 1B and Paper 4B. In addition, candidates choosing option A must offer Paper 3A and candidates choosing option B must offer Paper 3B.
The examination will comprise two alternative options, (A) and (B). Option (A) is for students intending to graduate after taking Part II; option (B) is for those who plan to proceed to Part III.
The examination will comprise two alternative options, (A) and (B). Option (A) is for students intending to graduate after taking Part II; option (B) is for those who plan to proceed to Part III.
The examination will comprise two alternate options, (A) and (B). Option (A) is for students intending to graduate after taking Part II; option (B) is for those who plan to proceed to Part III.
The following papers will be set:
|
Paper 1. |
Classical traditions in the sciences (also serves as Paper O11 of Part II of the Classical Tripos) |
|
Paper 2. |
Natural philosophies: Renaissance to Enlightenment |
|
Paper 3. |
Science, industry, and Empire |
|
Paper 4. |
Metaphysics, epistemology, and the sciences |
|
Paper 5. |
Science in society |
|
Paper 6. |
History and philosophy of mind |
|
Paper 7. |
Medicine from antiquity to the Enlightenment |
|
Paper 8. |
Modern medicine and biomedical sciences |
|
Paper 9. |
Images of the sciences |
|
Paper 10. |
Science and technology from the First World War122 |
The examination will comprise two alternative options, (A) and (B). Option (A) is for students intending to graduate after taking Part II; option (B) is for those who plan to proceed to Part III.
The papers set for the Half Subjects shall either be those set for the Part II subject of the same name, or contain a subset of questions from those papers. The maximum marks allocated to each component shall be as follows:
|
Half Subject |
200 |
|
Part Ib Subject |
100 |
The two psychology papers will include the same questions as are contained in two of the Papers 2–4 taken by candidates offering the subject Psychology.
The examination shall comprise two alternative options, (A) and (B). Option (A) is for students wishing to obtain accreditation with the British Psychological Society, and will be known as Psychology (Psychology); option (B) is for students who do not require accreditation with the Society, and will be known as Psychology (Cognitive Neuroscience).
1. The Oriental Studies Tripos shall consist of two Parts.
2. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part I:
3. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part II,124 provided that they have kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after their first term of residence:
4. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for either Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
5. No student who has been a candidate for either Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
6. The Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners for each Part as they shall deem sufficient. The Examiners shall set, and shall be responsible for marking, all written papers except papers from another Tripos, and shall also mark dissertations submitted under Regulation 17 and shall conduct the practical examinations in archaeology and the oral examinations.
The Faculty Board shall also have power to nominate one or more Assessors to assist the Examiners in either Part of the Tripos. If required to do so, Assessors shall propose questions in the subject or subjects assigned to them, shall look over the answers of candidates to those questions, shall set and conduct oral and practical examinations, and shall report as required to the Examiners. An Assessor may be summoned, for the purpose of consultation and advice, to meetings of the relevant body of Examiners, but shall not be entitled to vote.
7. In each Part of the Tripos the questions proposed by each Examiner or Assessor shall be submitted to the whole body of Examiners for approval.
8. The Examiners shall have regard to the style and method of candidates’ answers and shall give credit for excellence in these respects. They shall give due credit for the performance of candidates in the oral examinations.
The Examiners shall be empowered to examine any candidate viva voce.
9. (a) A candidate shall be deemed to have obtained honours in Part I if he or she has reached the standard for honours either in one of the options specified in Schedule Ia (whole subjects) of Regulation 14 or in two of the options specified in Schedules Ib and Ic (half-subjects) of that regulation.
(b) A candidate shall be deemed to have obtained honours in Part II if he or she has reached the standard for honours as follows:
(c) For the purposes of this regulation a candidate may substitute for any of the options specified in Regulations 14, 15, or 16 a combination of papers (and oral and practical examinations, if appropriate) authorized by the Faculty Board in a subject approved by the Board under Regulation 18.
10. The names of those candidates who deserve honours in each Part shall be placed in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. The class-list shall also indicate the subject or subjects which each candidate has offered in the examination. In Part II a mark of distinction may be awarded for special excellence.
11. (a) The following papers shall be set if candidates desire to present themselves therein:
|
Aramaic |
|||
|
|
Am. |
1. |
Aramaic specified and unspecified texts, 1. |
|
|
Am. |
2. |
Aramaic specified texts and composition.126 |
|
|
Am. |
3. |
Aramaic literature and its historical background.126 |
|
|
Am. |
11. |
Aramaic specified and unspecified texts, 2. |
|
|
Am. |
12. |
Aramaic specified texts.126 |
|
|
Am. |
13. |
Aramaic unspecified texts and composition.126 |
|
|
Am. |
14. |
Special subject.126 |
|
Assyriology |
|||
|
|
As. |
1. |
Akkadian specified texts. |
|
|
As. |
2. |
Akkadian unspecified texts and composition. |
|
|
As. |
3. |
Introduction to Mesopotamian civilization. |
|
|
As. |
4. |
Elementary Akkadian. |
|
|
As. |
11. |
Mesopotamian literary texts. |
|
|
As. |
12. |
Mesopotamian documentary texts. |
|
|
As. |
13. |
History of Mesopotamia. |
|
|
As. |
14. |
Mesopotamian literature and civilization. |
|
|
As. |
15. |
Mesopotamian special subject. |
|
|
As. |
16. |
Historical archaeology of Mesopotamia. |
|
|
As. |
17. |
Prehistory of the Near East. |
|
|
As. |
18. |
Practical examination in Mesopotamian archaeology. |
|
Chinese Studies |
|||
|
|
C. |
1. |
Literary Chinese texts, 1. |
|
|
C. |
2. |
Literary Chinese texts, 2. |
|
|
C. |
3. |
Modern Chinese texts, 1. |
|
|
C. |
4. |
Modern Chinese texts, 2. |
|
|
C. |
5. |
Modern Chinese translation and composition, 1. |
|
|
C. |
6. |
Chinese history: specified subject, 1. |
|
|
C. |
7. |
Chinese history: specified subject, 2. |
|
|
C. |
11 |
Literary Chinese texts, 3. |
|
|
C. |
12. |
Aspects of traditional Chinese culture. |
|
|
C. |
13. |
Modern Chinese texts, 3. |
|
|
C. |
14. |
Modern Chinese translation and composition, 2. |
|
|
C. |
15. |
Dynastic China: specified subject. |
|
|
C. |
16. |
Dynastic China: readings. |
|
|
C. |
17. |
Modern China: specified subject. |
|
|
C. |
18. |
Modern China: readings. |
|
Egyptology |
|||
|
|
E. |
1. |
Middle Egyptian specified texts. |
|
|
E. |
2. |
Middle Egyptian unspecified texts. |
|
|
E. |
3. |
Coptic specified texts, 1 (Sa‘idic dialect). |
|
|
E. |
4. |
Coptic unspecified texts, 1 (Sa‘idic dialect). |
|
|
E. |
5. |
The development of human society (Paper 1 of Part I of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos). |
|
|
E. |
6. |
Human societies: the comparative perspective (Paper 3 of Part I of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos). |
|
|
E. |
7. |
Introduction to Egyptian civilization. |
|
|
E. |
11. |
Old, Middle, and Late Egyptian specified texts. |
|
|
E. |
12. |
Old, Middle, and Late Egyptian unspecified texts. |
|
|
E. |
13. |
Specified texts in hieratic book hands of the Middle and New Kingdom. |
|
|
E. |
14. |
Coptic specified texts, 2. |
|
|
E. |
15. |
Coptic unspecified texts, 2. |
|
|
E. |
16. |
Coptic language and literary history. |
|
|
E. |
17. |
Early history of the Coptic church, monasticism, and art. |
|
|
E. |
18. |
Ancient Egypt, 1. |
|
|
E. |
19. |
Ancient Egypt, 2. |
|
|
E. |
20. |
Ancient Egypt, 3. |
|
|
E. |
21. |
Ancient Egypt, 4. |
|
Early civilizations of the Aegean and Near East |
|||
|
|
N. |
1. |
Greek translation (Paper 1 of Part Ia of the Classical Tripos). |
|
|
N. |
2. |
Alternative Greek translation (Paper 2 of Part Ia of the Classical Tripos). |
|
|
N. |
3. |
Classical questions (Paper 6 of Part Ia of the Classical Tripos). |
|
|
N. |
4. |
The development of human society (Paper 1 of Part I of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos). |
|
|
N. |
5. |
Human societies: the comparative perspective (Paper 3 of Part I of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos). |
|
|
N. |
6. |
Early civilizations: comparative and theoretical issues. |
|
|
N. |
7. |
Aegean prehistory (Paper D1 of Part II of the Classical Tripos). |
|
|
N. |
8. |
A topic within classical archaeology and/or art (Paper D2 of Part II of the Classical Tripos in any year in which the subject announced by the Faculty Board of Classics has been approved for the purpose of this regulation by the Faculty Board of Asian and Middle Eastern Studies). |
|
|
N. |
9. |
A prescribed period or subject of Greek history (Paper C1 of Part II of the Classical Tripos in any year in which the subject announced by the Faculty Board of Classics has been approved for the purpose of this regulation by the Faculty Board of Asian and Middle Eastern Studies). |
|
|
N. |
10. |
A prescribed subject taken from ancient history (Paper C3 of Part II of the Classical Tripos in any year in which the subject announced by the Faculty Board of Classics has been approved for the purpose of this regulation by the Faculty Board of Asian and Middle Eastern Studies). |
|
|
N. |
11. |
Practical examination in Greek archaeology. |
|
|
N. |
12. |
Special subject in Classics. |
|
Hebrew Studies |
|||
|
|
H. |
1. |
Hebrew texts, 1. |
|
|
H. |
2. |
Hebrew unspecified texts and composition. |
|
|
H. |
3. |
Israelite and Jewish history and literature. |
|
|
H. |
4. |
Modern Hebrew, 1. |
|
|
H. |
5. |
Modern Hebrew, 2. |
|
|
H. |
6. |
Mishnaic and medieval Hebrew. |
|
|
H. |
11. |
Hebrew texts, 2. |
|
|
H. |
12. |
Hebrew language. |
|
|
H. |
13. |
General paper. |
|
|
H. |
14. |
Post-biblical Jewish texts. |
|
|
H. |
15. |
Modern Hebrew, 3. |
|
|
H. |
16. |
Modern Hebrew, 4. |
|
|
H. |
17. |
Semitic specified texts. |
|
|
H. |
18. |
Special subject. |
|
|
H. |
19. |
Judaism II (Paper C8 of the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos). |
|
Japanese Studies |
|||
|
|
J. |
1. |
Modern Japanese, 1. |
|
|
J. |
2. |
Modern Japanese texts, 1. |
|
|
J. |
3. |
Modern Japanese texts, 2. |
|
|
J. |
4. |
Modern Japanese history. |
|
|
J. |
5. |
Classical Japanese. |
|
|
J. |
6. |
Japanese culture. |
|
|
J. |
7. |
Modern Japan, 1. |
|
|
J. |
8. |
Modern Japan, 2. |
|
|
J. |
10. |
Modern Japanese, 2. |
|
|
J. |
11. |
Modern Japanese unspecified texts.127 |
|
|
J. |
12. |
Japanese texts, 1. |
|
|
J. |
13. |
Japanese texts, 2. |
|
|
J. |
14. |
Classical studies: specified subject. |
|
|
J. |
15. |
Japanese culture: specified subject. |
|
|
J. |
16. |
Japanese history: specified subject. |
|
|
J. |
17. |
Japanese society: specified subject. |
|
|
J. |
18. |
Japanese politics and international relations: specified subject. |
|
Korean Studies |
|||
|
|
K. |
1. |
Elementary Korean. |
|
Middle Eastern and Islamic Studies |
|||
|
|
Is. |
1. |
Arabic language, 1. |
|
|
Is. |
2. |
Arabic language, 2. |
|
|
Is. |
3. |
Middle Eastern and Islamic literatures. |
|
|
Is. |
4. |
Arabic literature, 1. |
|
|
Is. |
5. |
Persian language, 1. |
|
|
Is. |
6. |
Persian literary texts. |
|
|
Is. |
7. |
Persian literature, 1. |
|
|
Is. |
8. |
Middle Eastern and Islamic history, 1. |
|
|
Is. |
9. |
Middle Eastern and Islamic history, 2. |
|
|
Is. |
10. |
Middle Eastern and Islamic history, 3. |
|
|
Is. |
11. |
Arabic language, 3. |
|
|
Is. |
12. |
Arabic language, 4. |
|
|
Is. |
13. |
Middle Eastern and Islamic culture.128 |
|
|
Is. |
14. |
Arabic literature, 2. |
|
|
Is. |
15. |
Arabic literature, 3. |
|
|
Is. |
16. |
Persian language, 2. |
|
|
Is. |
17. |
Persian language, 3. |
|
|
Is. |
18. |
Persian literature, 2. |
|
|
Is. |
19. |
Persian literature, 3. |
|
|
Is. |
20. |
Middle Eastern and Islamic history, 4. |
|
|
Is. |
21. |
Middle Eastern and Islamic history, 5.128 |
|
|
Is. |
22. |
Middle Eastern and Islamic history, 6.128 |
|
|
Is. |
23. |
Middle Eastern and Islamic history, 7. |
|
Oriental Studies |
|||
|
|
OS. |
1. |
Cinema East: an introduction to the film traditions of Asia and the Middle East |
|
South Asian Studies |
|||
|
|
Sa. |
1. |
Sanskrit specified and unspecified texts, 1.127 |
|
|
Sa. |
2. |
Sanskrit specified and unspecified texts, 2.127 |
|
|
Sa. |
3. |
Hindi texts, 1. |
|
|
Sa. |
4. |
Hindi texts, 2. |
|
|
Sa. |
5. |
Composition, and grammar or essay, in an Indian language. |
|
|
Sa. |
6. |
Indian literature. |
|
|
Sa. |
7. |
Indian religion and philosophy, 1. |
|
|
Sa. |
8. |
Indian cultural history. |
|
|
Sa. |
9. |
Society, politics, and media in South Asia. |
|
|
Sa. |
11. |
Sanskrit specified texts, 1. |
|
|
Sa. |
12. |
Sanskrit specified texts, 2. |
|
|
Sa. |
13. |
Sanskrit specified texts, 3. |
|
|
Sa. |
14. |
Pali and Prakrit specified texts. |
|
|
Sa. |
15. |
Sanskrit unspecified texts. |
|
|
Sa. |
16. |
Hindi texts, 3. |
|
|
Sa. |
17. |
Hindi texts, 4. |
|
|
Sa. |
18. |
Hindi texts, 5. |
|
|
Sa. |
19. |
Selected readings in a North Indian language. |
|
|
Sa. |
20. |
Indian epics. |
|
|
Sa. |
21. |
Special subject in South Asian history. |
|
|
Sa. |
22. |
The Mughal Empire. |
|
|
Sa. |
23. |
Women and literature in India. |
|
|
Sa. |
24. |
Special subject in South Asian religion and philosophy. |
|
|
Sa. |
25. |
Special subject in South Asian literature. |
|
|
Sa. |
26. |
Special subject in nineteenth-century or twentieth-century Indian history.129 |
|
|
Sa. |
27. |
Specified subject in South Asian Studies (may also serve as one of the subjects for Paper 17 of Part IIb of the Economics Tripos, and as Paper Int. 8 of the Social and Political Sciences Tripos). |
|
|
Sa. |
28. |
|
|
|
Sa. |
29. |
|
(b) In addition to the written papers, oral examinations shall be held in the modern spoken form of Arabic, Chinese, Hebrew, Hindi, Japanese, and Persian, and of any language approved by the Faculty Board under Regulation 18.
(c) Papers from the Classical Tripos and the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos shall also be available, as follows: papers from Part Ib of the Classical Tripos and from Part Ib of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos, as specified in options (15) and (11) of Regulation 14; papers from Part II of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos, as specified in option (12) of Regulation 15 and in option (6) of Regulation 16.
(d) Papers from other Triposes shall also be available, as follows:
|
S2. |
Foundations of social anthropology II. |
|
19. |
History of political thought to c. 1700. |
|
20. |
History of political thought from c. 1700 to c. 1890. |
|
21. |
Empires and world history from the fifteenth century to the First World War. |
|
23. |
A subject in any aspect of history specified by the Faculty Board from time to time (in any year in which the subject specified has been approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board of Asian and Middle Eastern Studies). |
|
Li. 1. |
General linguistics. |
|
Pol. 11. |
A subject in modern politics V (in any year in which the subject specified has been approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board of Asian and Middle Eastern Studies). |
|
B15. |
Introduction to Islam. |
|
C9. |
Islam II. |
12. The Faculty Board shall give notice before the end of the Easter Term each year of the specified texts and variable subjects selected for the examinations to be held in the academical year next but one following, provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for so doing and if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination is adversely affected.
13. The Faculty Board shall have the power of issuing from time to time supplementary regulations to define or limit all or any of the subjects of the examination, due care being taken that sufficient notice is given of any change, and of modifying or altering such supplementary regulations as occasion may require; and of marking out the lines of study that are to be pursued by candidates.
14. Except as provided in Regulation 18, a candidate for Part I shall offer either one of the whole subjects or two of the half-subjects listed below, and shall take the written papers or other alternative exercises and oral examinations specified; provided that
15. Except as provided in Regulation 18, a candidate for Part II who takes the examination under Regulation 3(a)133 shall offer either one of the whole subjects or two of the half-subjects listed below, and shall take the written papers or other alternative exercises and oral examinations specified, provided that
16. Except as provided in Regulation 18, a candidate for Part II who takes the examination under Regulation 3(b)135 shall offer either one of the whole subjects or two of the half-subjects listed below, and shall take the written papers and oral examinations specified; provided that
17. A candidate who wishes, or is required, to submit a dissertation in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 15 or Regulation 16 shall submit the proposed title, together with a statement of the papers to be offered in the examination, to the Secretary of the Faculty Board so as to arrive not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination. Each candidate must obtain the approval of the proposed title by the Board not later than the end of that term. A dissertation, which shall be of not more than 12,000 words in length (inclusive of notes and appendices), should show evidence of reading, judgement, and power of exposition, but not necessarily evidence of original research, and must give full references to the sources used. One electronic and two paper copies of each dissertation, marked with the candidate’s examination number, shall be submitted to the Secretary of the Faculty Board so as to arrive not later than the third day of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held. Each candidate will be required to sign a declaration that the dissertation is his or her own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration, and that it does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose. Each copy of the dissertation shall be accompanied by a summary of not more than 300 words in English, except that a candidate in Chinese Studies shall furnish instead a summary in Chinese of not less than 600 characters. The maximum marks allocated to the dissertation shall be one quarter of the maximum marks for the examination as a whole.
18. The Faculty Board shall have power to grant permission to a candidate for either Part of the Tripos to offer in the examination an Oriental subject or language other than those specified in Regulations 14, 15, and 16, provided that the Board are satisfied
Applications for such permission shall be made through the candidate's Tutor to the Secretary of the Faculty Board at the earliest possible date and in no circumstances later than the following dates:
the division of the Easter Term in the year next preceding the examination, for a candidate taking Part I or a candidate taking Part II under Regulation 16;
the division of the Easter Term in the year next but one preceding the examination, for a candidate taking Part II under Regulation 15.
For subjects offered under this regulation the Faculty Board shall have power (i) to determine the papers to be set, in general conformity with the provisions of Regulations 14, 15, and 16, and (ii) to specify whether such a subject is to be taken as a whole subject or as a half-subject.
19. Not later than the division of Full Michaelmas Term each year the Secretary of the Faculty Board shall inform the Registrary of any subjects for which permission has been granted under Regulation 18, together with the names of the candidates to whom such permission has been granted.
20. The examinations for the Oriental Studies Tripos shall be offered for the last time:
for Part I in 2009
for Part II in 2011
The examination for this paper will consist of the submission of records of such course-work undertaken during the courses leading to the examination as shall be determined from time to time by the Faculty Board; such records shall bear as an indication of good faith the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was performed.
The examination for this paper will consist of the submission of records of such practical work done during the courses leading to the examination as shall be determined from time to time by the Faculty Board; such records shall bear as an indication of good faith the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was performed.
The paper will examine the history of the globalization of China from c. 1850 to c. 1950. The examination for this paper will consist of the submission of an essay, of not more than 8,000 words based on relevant primary and secondary sources, before the first day of the Full Easter Term in which the examination takes place.
This paper will be examined by (a) a written paper and (b) the submission of records of such course-work undertaken during the courses leading to the examination as shall be determined from time to time by the Faculty Board. Parts (a) and (b) will carry equal weight.
The examination for this paper will consist of either (a) a three-hour written examination or (b) the submission of a portfolio containing the translation into English of a passage of Arabic, together with such supplementary material as may be determined from time to time by the Faculty Board. The portfolio shall bear a declaration that the project represents the candidate's own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration.
The examination for this paper will consist of the submission of records of such practical work done during the courses leading to the examination as shall be determined from time to time by the Faculty Board; such records shall bear as an indication of good faith the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was performed.
The course will consist of lectures and seminars, in which students will be expected to give presentations. The course comprises a significant film element; copies of the films will be available with the teaching officers for students to watch at home in their own time. Apart from presentations, students will be expected to write at least two essays per term.
This paper will, until further notice, be entitled The sociology and politics of South Asia. The paper will deal with the social institutions of South Asia, broadly defined; the impact of towns, industrialization and the development of agriculture, the growth of literacy, and modern religious and cultural movements. In the study of politics some attention will be given to the closing decade of imperial rule, but the main emphasis will be on the development of politics in India since 1947. The political system, and the operation of parties within it, the problems of ‘one party dominance’ and of factionalism will receive special attention. The politics of Pakistan, Bangladesh, and Sri Lanka will also fall within the scope of the paper.
1. The Philosophy Tripos shall consist of three Parts: Part Ia, Part Ib, and Part II. A separate class-list shall be published for each Part.
2. The Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners as they may deem sufficient to examine in each Part of the Tripos. The Faculty Board may also nominate one or more Assessors for each Part of the Tripos. Assessors shall be responsible for setting the questions in the subjects assigned to them by the Examiners, and for advising the Examiners on the performance of candidates in those questions. An Assessor may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
3. The questions proposed for each Part by each Examiner or Assessor for that Part shall be submitted to and approved by the Examiners for that Part collectively; and the answers to each question shall be examined, as far as possible, by two at least of the Examiners or Assessors. The Examiners and Assessors shall take account of the style and method of the candidates’ answers and shall give credit for excellence in these respects.
4. The papers for Part Ia shall be as follows:
|
Paper 1. |
Metaphysics and philosophy of mind. |
|
Paper 2. |
Ethics. |
|
Paper 3. |
Logic. |
|
Paper 4. |
Set text or texts. |
|
Paper 5. |
Essay. |
Every candidate shall offer Papers 1–5.
5. (a) The papers for Part Ib shall be as follows:
|
Paper 1. |
Metaphysics and the philosophy of mind (also serves as Paper O5 of Part II of the Classical Tripos). |
|
Paper 2. |
Logic. |
|
Paper 3. |
Ethics. |
|
Paper 4. |
History of ancient philosophy. |
|
Paper 5. |
History of modern philosophy. |
|
Paper 6. |
Philosophy of science. |
|
Paper 7. |
Political philosophy. |
|
Paper 8. |
Experimental psychology (the subject Experimental Psychology in Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos). |
|
Paper 9. |
Essay. |
(b) Subject to the provisions of sub-paragraphs (c) and (d) of this regulation, a candidate for Part Ib shall offer papers as follows:
The weighting of Paper 8 for those who offer it, shall be double that of other papers.
(c) No candidate who has previously offered Experimental psychology in Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos shall offer Paper 8.
(d) In place of any one of Papers 1–7 a candidate for Part Ib who has previously obtained honours in Part Ia of the Philosophy Tripos may submit two essays, each of not less than 3,000 words and not more than 4,000 words in length, including footnotes and appendices but excluding bibliography, on two topics approved by the Chairman of Examiners, which shall both fall within the syllabus of that paper; provided that a candidate who chooses to submit essays under the provisions of this sub-paragraph shall not write in Paper 9 an essay on a subject that overlaps significantly with either of the submitted essays.
6. The papers for Part II shall be as follows:
|
Paper 1. |
Metaphysics. |
|
Paper 2. |
Philosophy of mind. |
|
Paper 3. |
Ethics. |
|
Paper 4. |
History of modern philosophy. |
|
Paper 5. |
History of ancient philosophy.137 |
|
Paper 6. |
Philosophy of science.138 |
|
Paper 7. |
Mathematical logic. |
|
Paper 8. |
Philosophical logic. |
|
Paper 9. |
Special subject specified by the Faculty Board from time to time. |
|
Paper 10. |
Political philosophy. |
|
Paper 11. |
Aesthetics.139 |
|
Paper 12. |
Essay. |
7. Except as provided in Regulation 8 below, a candidate for Part II shall offer papers as follows:
provided that a candidate who has previously obtained honours in Part II of the Classical Tripos shall not offer any paper that he or she offered in that examination.
8. In place of any one of Papers 1–11 and the papers specified in the Schedule to these regulations, a candidate who has previously obtained honours in Part Ib of the Philosophy Tripos may submit two essays, each of not less than 3,000 words and not more than 4,000 words in length, including footnotes and appendices but excluding bibliography, on two topics approved by the Chairman of Examiners, which shall both fall within the scope of that paper, provided that
9. (a) A candidate for Part Ib who chooses to offer two submitted essays under the provisions of Regulation 5(d), or a candidate for Part II who chooses to offer a dissertation under the provisions of Regulation 7 or two submitted essays under the provisions of Regulation 8 shall submit the proposed title of the dissertation or the proposed titles of the essays, together with a statement of the papers to be offered in the examination, and in the case of essays a statement of the paper which they are intended to replace, to the Chairman of Examiners so as to arrive not later than one week before the last day of Full Michaelmas Term. A candidate must obtain the approval of the Chairman of Examiners for the proposed title or titles not later than the last day of Full Michaelmas Term. Dissertations and essays shall be submitted to the Chairman of Examiners, in accordance with detailed arrangements approved by the Faculty Board, so as to arrive not later than the last day of the Lent Term next preceding the examination. Every candidate submitting a dissertation or a pair of essays will be required to sign a declaration that the work submitted is his or her own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration, and that it does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose. The Examiners shall have power to examine any candidate viva voce on her or his dissertation or essays.
(b) A dissertation, which shall be on a topic of philosophical interest approved by the Chairman of Examiners, shall be of not more than 8,000 words and (except with the permission of the Chairman of Examiners) not less than 6,000 words in length, including footnotes and appendices but excluding bibliography. For a candidate who offers both Paper 12 and a dissertation, the topic of the dissertation shall not fall within the broad scope of any of the papers chosen from Papers 1 to 11, and the candidate shall not write in Paper 12 an essay on a subject that overlaps significantly with the dissertation.
10. The Faculty Board shall have power to publish supplementary regulations for the topics included in the several subjects before mentioned, and to issue a list of books in relation to which questions shall be set. They shall also have power to modify or alter the supplementary regulations and the list from time to time as they see fit, due care being taken that sufficient notice is given of any change. Public notice of all the variable subjects and texts prescribed for special study shall be given by the Faculty Board before the end of the Easter Term in the year next preceding the examination to which they apply; provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination is adversely affected.
11. A student may be a candidate for honours in Part Ia if at the time of the examination he or she has kept one term, provided that three complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
12. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part Ib:
13. A student who has obtained honours in Part Ib or in any Honours Examination other than Part Ia of the Philosophy Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part II in the year next after or next but one after so obtaining honours; provided that at the time of the examination the student has kept seven terms, and that fifteen complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.140
14. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part in the same year. No student who has been a candidate for any Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
15. In each Part, the names of the candidates who obtain honours shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order. Each class-list may show, by some convenient mark, whether a candidate has passed with special distinction.
Papers from Part II of the Classical Tripos that may be taken in Part II
A candidate for Part II of the Philosophy Tripos may take one or two of the following papers:
|
Group B (Philosophy) |
|
|
B1. |
Plato |
|
B2. |
Aristotle |
|
B3. |
A prescribed subject or period in Greek and Roman philosophy |
1. The Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos (Social and Political Sciences Tripos)141 shall consist of three Parts: Part I, Part IIa, and Part IIb. A separate class-list shall be published for each Part.
2. A student may be a candidate for honours in Part I if at the time of the examination he or she has kept one term, provided that three complete terms have not passed after the student's first term of residence.
3. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part IIa;
4. A student who has obtained honours in any other Honours Examination other than Part I of the Politics, Psychology, and Sociology (Social and Political Sciences) Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part IIb in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that the student has kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.140
5. No student shall be a candidate for any Part and also for another Honours Examination in the same term.
6. No student shall be a candidate for any Part on more than one occasion.
7. The Faculty Board of Politics, Psychology, Sociology, and International Studies shall have power to issue from time to time supplementary regulations defining or limiting all or any of the subjects of examination. Due care shall be taken that sufficient notice is given of any alteration of such supplementary regulations. The Faculty Board shall also have power to publish from time to time lists of books recommended to the candidates.
8. The Faculty Board shall give notice of any variable subjects for Parts IIa and IIb of the Tripos, before the division of the Easter Term of the year next but one preceding the examination concerned, provided that the Faculty Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for so doing and if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination is adversely affected.
9. The Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners as they deem sufficient for each Part of the Tripos. The Faculty Board shall also have power to nominate one or more Assessors to assist the Examiners in any Part of the Tripos. The Assessors shall propose questions in the parts of the examination assigned to them by the Examiners, shall look over the answers of the candidates to these questions, and shall report thereon to the Examiners. The Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purposes of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
10. In each Part of the Tripos, the questions proposed by each Examiner and Assessor shall be submitted for approval to the whole body of Examiners.
11. A candidate shall not offer in any Part of the Tripos a paper that he or she has previously offered in another University examination.
[12. The scheme of examination for Part I shall be as follows:
Section A
|
Paper 1. |
Introduction to politics: the analysis of modern politics I (also serves as Paper 4C of Part I of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos). |
|
Paper 2. |
Introduction to sociology: modern societies (also serves as Paper 4B of Part I of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos and as Paper 5 of Part IIa of the Economics Tripos). |
|
Paper 3. |
Introduction to psychology: society, interaction, and the individual (also serves as Paper 4D of Part I of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos). |
Section B
|
Paper 4. |
The development of human society (Paper 1 of Part I of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos). |
|
Paper 5. |
Humans in biological perspective (Paper 2 of Part I of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos). |
|
Paper 6. |
Human societies: the comparative perspective (Paper 3 of Part I of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos). |
|
Paper 7. |
Introduction to computer science (Paper 1 of Part Ia of the Computer Science Tripos). |
|
Paper 8. |
British economic history (Paper 5 of Part I of the Economics Tripos). |
|
Paper 9. |
Language, communication, and literacy (Paper 2 of the Preliminary Examination for Part I of the Education Tripos). |
A candidate for Part I shall be required to offer four papers as follows:
〈12. The scheme of examination for Part I shall be as follows:
Section A
|
Paper 1. |
Analysis of politics I (also serves as Paper 4C of Part I of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos). |
|
Paper 2. |
Introduction to psychology (also serves both as Paper 4D of Part I of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos and as a paper in Part I of the Computer Science Tripos). |
|
Paper 3. |
Introduction to sociology: Modern societies I (also serves as Paper 4B of Part I of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos and as Paper 5 of Part IIa of the Economics Tripos) |
Section B
|
Paper 4. |
Introduction to research methods and statistics for social scientists. |
|
Paper 5. |
International relations I. |
|
Paper 6. |
The development of human society (Paper 1 of Part I of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos). |
|
Paper 8. |
Human societies: the comparative perspective (Paper 3 of Part I of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos). |
|
Paper 9. |
Computer Science 1: Introduction to computer science (Paper 1 of Part Ia of the Computer Science Tripos). |
|
Paper 10. |
British economic history (Paper 5 of Part I of the Economics Tripos). |
|
Paper 11. |
Language, communication, and literacy (Paper 2 of the preliminary examination for Part I of the Education Tripos). |
|
Paper 12. |
Human geography I: People, space, and geographies of difference (Paper 1 of Part Ia of the Geographical Tripos). |
|
Paper 13. |
Human geography II: Historical geography (Paper 2 of Part Ia of the Geographical Tripos). |
|
Paper 14. |
Human geography III: Society, environment, and development (Paper 3 of Part Ia of the Geographical Tripos). |
A candidate for Part I shall be required to offer four papers as follows:
13. The names of the candidates who obtain honours in Part I shall be placed by the Examiners in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order.
14. The scheme of examination for Parts IIa and IIb shall be as follows:
|
Pol. 1. |
The history of political thought to c. 1700 (Paper 19 of Part I of the Historical Tripos). |
|
Pol. 2. |
The history of political thought from c. 1700 to c. 1890 (Paper 20 of Part I of the Historical Tripos). |
|
Pol. 3. |
The analysis of modern politics II.143 |
|
Pol. 4. |
The analysis of modern politics III.144 |
|
Pol. 5. |
Conceptual issues in modern politics. |
|
Pol. 6. |
Political philosophy and the history of political thought since c. 1890 (Paper 5 of Part II of the Historical Tripos). |
|
Pol. 7. |
A subject in modern politics II. |
|
Pol. 8. |
A subject in modern politics III. |
|
Pol. 9. |
A subject in modern politics IV.144 |
|
Pol. 10. |
Japanese politics (Paper J.10 of the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos). |
|
Pol. 11. |
A subject in modern politics V.145 |
|
Pol. 12. |
A subject in modern politics VI. |
|
Pol. 13. |
Conceptual issues and texts in politics. |
|
Pol. 14 |
The history of political thought to c. 1700 (Paper 3 of Part II of the Historical Tripos). |
|
Pol. 15. |
The history of political thought from c. 1700 to c. 1890 (Paper 4 of Part II of the Historical Tripos).146]147 |
|
Pol. 1. |
The history of political thought to c. 1700 (Paper 19 of Part I of the Historical Tripos). |
|
Pol. 2. |
The history of political thought from c. 1700 to c. 1890 (Paper 20 of Part I of the Historical Tripos). |
|
Pol. 3. |
The analysis of modern politics II.143 |
|
Pol. 4. |
The analysis of modern politics III. |
|
Pol. 6. |
Political philosophy and the history of political thought since c. 1890 (Paper 5 of Part II of the Historical Tripos). |
|
Pol. 7. |
A subject in politics and international studies II. |
|
Pol. 8. |
A subject in politics and international studies III. |
|
Pol. 9. |
A subject in politics and international studies IV. |
|
Pol. 10. |
Japanese politics (Paper J.10 of the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos). |
|
Pol. 11. |
A subject in politics and international studies V.146 |
|
Pol. 12. |
A subject in politics and international studies VI. |
|
Pol. 13. |
Conceptual issues and texts in politics and international studies. |
|
Pol. 14. |
The history of political thought to c. 1700 (Paper 3 of Part II of the Historical Tripos). |
|
Pol. 15. |
The history of political thought from c. 1700 to c. 1890 (Paper 4 of Part II of the Historical Tripos).〉147 |
|
Psy. 1. |
Social psychology.143 |
|
Psy. 2. |
Experimental psychology (the subject Experimental Psychology in Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos). |
|
〈Psy. 3. |
Biological and cognitive psychology.〉148 |
|
Psy. [3.]〈4.〉149 |
Development and psychopathology. |
|
Psy. [4.]〈5.〉149 |
A subject in psychology I. |
|
Psy. [5.]〈6.〉149 |
A subject in psychology II. |
|
Psy. [6.]〈7.〉149 |
A subject in psychology III. |
|
Soc. 1. |
Social theory.143 |
|
Soc. 2. |
Contemporary societies and global transformations.143 |
|
Soc. 3. |
Concepts and arguments in sociology. |
|
Soc. 4. |
A subject in sociology I. |
|
Soc. 5. |
A subject in sociology II.150 |
|
Soc. 6. |
A subject in sociology III. |
|
Soc. 7. |
A subject in sociology IV.150 |
|
Soc. 8. |
The sociology of education (Paper 3 of Part II of the Education Tripos). |
|
Soc. 9. |
A subject in sociology V. |
|
Soc. 10. |
A subject in sociology VI. |
|
Int. 1A. |
Inquiry and analysis I. |
|
Int. 1B. |
Inquiry and analysis I. |
|
Int. 2. |
Inquiry and analysis II. |
|
Int. 3. |
An interdisciplinary subject I.144 |
|
Int. 4. |
An interdisciplinary subject II.144 |
|
Int. 5. |
An interdisciplinary subject III.150 |
|
Int. 6. |
Criminology, sentencing, and the penal system (Paper 23 of the Law Tripos). |
|
Int. 7. |
Society, politics, and culture in Latin America.151 |
|
Int. 8. |
A specified subject in South Asian Studies (Paper Sa. 27 of the Oriental Studies Tripos). |
|
Int. 9. |
An interdisciplinary subject IV.144 |
|
Int. 10. |
An interdisciplinary subject V. |
Not more than one subject shall be specified for each of Pol. 4, 7–9, 11, 12, [Psy. 4–6]〈Psy. 5–7〉152, Soc. 4–7, 9, 10, and Int. 3–5, 9, 10.
15. (a) Each paper shall be of three hours’ duration, except [Pol. 5,]153 Psy. 2, Soc. 3, and Int. 1A and Int. 1B, provided that Pol. 7–9, 11, Soc. 4–7, 9, 10, and Int. 3–9 may be examined by an alternative mode of assessment, which shall consist of the submission of two essays, each of not more than 5,000 words. The examination for [Pol. 5 and]153 Soc. 3 shall [each]153 consist of the submission of two essays, each of not more than 5,000 words. The examination for Int. 1A shall consist of the submission of a research project, a statistical assignment, and one essay, and the examination for Int. 1B shall consist of the submission of a research project and either a statistical assignment and one essay or two essays; candidates who offer a statistical assignment and one essay may offer either a methodological essay or a philosophical essay and a candidate who offers two essays shall offer both a methodological essay and a philosophical essay.
(b) The Faculty Board shall publish by notice in each Department of the Faculty of Politics, Psychology, Sociology, and International Studies prescribed titles or subjects for essays by the division of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination concerned. The work to be undertaken for the research project shall be prescribed from time to time by the Faculty Board.
(c) The essays, the statistical assignment, and the report of the research project, shall be submitted in printed or typewritten form to the Secretary of the Faculty Board as follows: essays for all papers except Int. 1A and Int. 1B (that is, [Pol. 5,]153 Pol. 7–9, Pol. 11, Soc. 3–7, Soc. 9–10, Int. 3–9), one essay no later than the end of the first week of Full Lent Term, and one essay no later than the end of the first week of Full Easter Term; for Int. 1A and Int. 1B the philosophical essay shall be submitted by the end of Full Michaelmas Term, the statistical assignment shall be submitted before the division of the Lent Term, the methodological essay before the end of the Lent Term, and the report before the division of the Easter Term. Each essay, the assignment, and the report shall bear the candidate's examination number but not the candidate's name. Candidates may be called for viva voce examination in connection with their essays, statistical assignment, or research project.
16. Subject to the provisions of Regulation 11 a candidate for Part IIa shall offer one of the following options:
17. Subject to the provision of Regulation 11, a candidate for Part IIb who has taken option (a) in Part IIa shall offer:
A candidate who chooses any of Papers Pol. 7–9, 11, Soc. 4, 5, 7, 9, Int. 3–9 under (a) or (c) option (i), and who does not include Int. 1B among the papers offered, may offer two essays in place of one of those papers, in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 15.
18. Subject to the provisions of Regulation 11 a candidate for Part IIb who has taken option (b) in Part IIa shall offer:
Candidates may not offer extended essays in place of any of these papers.
19. Subject to the provisions of Regulation 11 a candidate for Part IIb who has taken option (c) in Part IIa shall offer:
A candidate who chooses any of Papers Soc. 4–7, 9, 10, Pol. 7, 8, 11, Int. 3–9 under (a) or (b) option (i) may offer two essays in place of one of those papers, in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 15.
20. Subject to the provisions of Regulation 11 a candidate for Part IIb who has taken option (d) in Part IIa shall offer:
A candidate who chooses any of Papers Soc. 4–7, 9, 10, Int. 3–9 under (a) or (b) option (i) may offer two essays in place of one of those papers, in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 15.
21. Subject to the provisions of Regulation 11 a candidate for Part IIb who has not previously obtained honours in Part IIa shall offer, with the approval of the Faculty Board, on application by the candidate's Tutor not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination, four papers chosen from the papers available in Part IIa and Part IIb; provided that a candidate who does not include Int. 1 among the papers chosen may offer two essays of not more than 5,000 words in place of one of Pol. 7–9, 11, Soc. 4–7, 9–10, Int. 3–9 in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 15.
22. (a) A candidate who wishes to offer a dissertation under Regulations 17–20 shall submit an application, including the topic of the proposed dissertation, a brief account of its scope, and a statement of the scheme of papers to be offered in the examination. A candidate may not choose for the dissertation a topic in the same field as that of Pol. 1 or Pol. 2, or Pol. 14 or Pol. 15. Applications shall be submitted to the Secretary of the Faculty Board, in accordance with any instructions issued by the Faculty Board, so as to arrive not later than the second Friday of Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
(b) Each candidate must obtain the approval of the Faculty Board for the proposed topic not later than the last day of the Michaelmas Term. After the Faculty Board have approved a topic no substantial change may be made in it without the further approval of the Faculty Board.
(c) A dissertation shall contain full references to any sources used in its composition, and shall be of not less than 6,000 words and not more than 10,000 words in length, including footnotes and appendices but excluding any bibliography.
(d) A dissertation shall be submitted in printed or typewritten form to the Secretary of the Faculty Board not later than the end of the second week of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held. Each dissertation shall bear the candidate's examination number but not the candidate's name and shall be accompanied by (i) a brief synopsis on a separate sheet of paper of the contents of the dissertation, and (ii) a certificate signed by the candidate that it is his or her own original work, and that it does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose .
(e) The Examiners shall have power to examine a candidate viva voce on the subject of the dissertation and in the general field of knowledge within which it falls.
23. There shall be separate class-lists for Parts IIa and IIb of the Tripos. The names of the candidates in each class-list shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order. In each class-list a mark of distinction may be attached to the name of any candidate whose work in the examination shows special merit.
The course for this paper provides an introduction to some central questions about the nature of modern politics through an examination of a set of political thinkers and some consideration of their work in relation to a range of examples from practical politics.
An introduction, through the work of Marx, Weber, and Durkheim, to key concepts and theories in sociology. An examination of core institutions and characteristics of modern societies including power and the modern state; the rise of nationalism; citizenship and social welfare; culture and the media; class and inequality; gender and the family; globalization and social change.
The scope of social psychology. Methods and levels of analysis. Selected topics from the following:
The self in social context. Personality and personality traits. Nature-nurture issues in socialization. Cognitive and affective bases of social behaviour. Parent–child relationships. The family, marriage, and divorce. Gender and gender roles. Social interaction processes. Small group processes. Attitudes and ideologies. Learning about society. The social psychology of work. Social aspects of mental illness. Cross-cultural variations in perception, thinking, and social behaviour.
The paper examines a range of issues in understanding empirical politics.
The paper examines a range of issues, substantive, and methodological, in comparative politics, with particular reference to the United Kingdom and Western Europe.
Conceptual questions that arise in the study of modern politics. This paper is examined by two 5,000-word essays.
The course for this paper explores the central texts and key ideas of twentieth-century political thought, looking at both analytical concepts and historical context. It is divided into two parts, Section A covering authors and their texts, and Section B which covers a variety of themes in contemporary political philosophy.
A subject in modern politics specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
A subject in modern politics specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
A subject in modern politics specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
A subject in international affairs specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
A subject in modern politics specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
General issues, theoretical, conceptual and practical, in modern politics.
The scope of this paper will include all those aspects of psychology which are relevant to an understanding of human social behaviour and its development. In any single year the paper will offer students the opportunity to study a number of individual and interpersonal processes from within this range (e.g. aggression, altruism, applied social psychology, attitudes, attribution theory, communication, conflict, conformity, co-operation, emotion, group processes, identity, impression formation, inter-group relations, interpersonal attraction, personality, prejudice, pro-social behaviour, relationships, social cognition, social influence, social psychiatry, stereotyping, trust), and alternative frameworks within which the study of human social behaviour has been conceptualized (e.g. discursive psychology, experimental social psychology, psychoanalysis, social representations theory). The relationship between social psychology and other parts of psychology will also be addressed.
The paper is assessed by two three-hour papers, a written practical of an hour-and-a-half, and practical reports.
The course for this paper considers children’s development from infancy to adolescence, with a focus on the interface between typical and atypical development. Topics considered include infancy, prematurity, early theory of mind and autism, early executive function and conduct disorder, the transition to school, adolescence and associated problems (e.g. self-harming), parenthood, and abuse.
A subject in psychology specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
A subject in psychology specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
A subject in psychology specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
This paper provides an account of the main intellectual traditions and key contributions of contemporary social theory. The time period extends from c. 1920 to the present day, but the paper concentrates on recent (post-1960) literature and developments. A limited number of traditions and orientations are selected for detailed discussion; these traditions and orientations are situated in their social and intellectual contexts, and the writings of key thinkers are examined in some depth.
Theories of global scale, political and economic transformation: Marxist theories of capitalism and imperialism; world systems theory; development theory; modernity; globalization. The evolution of a global economy: Fordism and post-Fordism; multi- and trans-national corporations: the information and knowledge economy; convergence and diversity in capitalism; global finance. The development of the modern state: the interstate system and new forms of ‘geo-governance’; economic globalization and state power. Post-communist societies and the problem of ‘transition’. Global communication and information networks: communication and development; cultural identity and the information age. Globalization and social change: health, the family.
Conceptual and explanatory issues that arise in the study of modern societies. The paper is examined by two 5,000-word essays.
A subject in sociology specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
A subject in sociology specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
A subject in sociology specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
A subject in sociology specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
A subject in sociology specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
A subject in sociology specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
This paper introduces candidates to the concepts and methods of social research. It will give candidates the conceptual and methodological knowledge to evaluate different styles of social inquiry and provide the necessary skills to design and implement an empirical inquiry. Candidates will be introduced to the basic philosophical ideas that underpin social research and will be instructed in the appropriate use of basic descriptive and inferential statistical techniques. The paper will be examined by one 2,500-word methodological essay, one 2,500 statistical assignment, and a project report of 5,000 words.
This course extends students’ understanding of the theory and practice of social inquiry and analysis. Students will be encouraged to tackle the challenges posed by combining quantitative and qualitative approaches. Students will also be introduced to the various approaches used in studies of social and individual change, including advanced multivariate techniques and longitudinal design and analysis.
An interdisciplinary subject specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
An interdisciplinary subject specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
An interdisciplinary subject specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
A key aim of this paper is to allow students to gain a critical and informed understanding of patterns of crime, pathways into and out of crime, and critical issues regarding law, policy and practice in relation to criminal justice and sentencing. The first section will look at the social construction of criminal statistics and the influence of the media in shaping popular understandings of crime, individual, family and situational factors in relation to pathways into crime as well as resilience and desistance and offender rehabilitation in regard to pathways out of crime. The second section involves a focus on theories of punishment and the part that different forms of punishment can play in reducing crime. The third part turns to sentencing issues, the legal framework, and dilemmas in theory and practice, whilst the fourth part concentrates on specific groups of offenders: young offenders, sex offenders, dangerous offenders, and women, for example, and the particular challenges in dealing with those groups of offenders. The final element turns to community penalties, prisons, parole, and to the broad issues of fairness, discretion, gender, and race in late modern criminal justice. The paper will be examined by either (a) a three-hour paper consisting of 4 questions, or (b) two long essays of 5,000 words each.
Using a range of approaches drawn from sociology, political science, political economy, social anthropology, and cultural studies, the course for this paper covers the history of Latin America in the period since the Second World War. Particular attention is paid to structural change in the region's economy and its relationship with the international economy, to the resulting transition from a state-led inward-looking model of development to the more outward-looking neo-liberal model adopted at the end of the century, and to variations in the concomitant process of democratization. The consequences and corollaries of these changes are traced in the fields of culture and religion, in the changing patterns of popular mobilization, and in the proliferation of ‘informal’ economic activities.
An interdisciplinary subject specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
An interdisciplinary subject specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
1. The Theological and Religious Studies Tripos shall consist of three Parts, Part I, Part IIa, and Part IIb.
2. In any year in which candidates for honours in the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos and candidates for honours in some other Tripos desire to offer papers common to both Triposes, the timetables for the examinations shall be arranged accordingly.
3. Public notice of all the variable subjects selected for the examinations in any year shall be given by the Faculty Board of Divinity before the end of the Easter Term of the year next preceding the examination concerned; provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination is adversely affected.
4. The Faculty Board of Divinity shall have power to issue supplementary regulations defining or limiting all or any of the subjects of the examinations and to publish lists of books or of documents. Such lists of books or documents and other reading lists for papers shall be made available in the Faculty Library by the end of the Full Easter Term of the year next preceding the examination. The Faculty Board shall also have power to alter such supplementary regulations and such lists, due care being taken that sufficient notice is given of any change.
5. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part I:
6. A student who has obtained honours in another Honours Examination may be a candidate for honours in Part IIa,159 in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she has kept four terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
7. A student who has obtained honours in any Honours Examination other than Part I of the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part IIb,159 in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she has kept seven terms and that fifteen terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
8. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for one Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
9. No student who has been a candidate for any Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
10. A candidate shall not offer in any Part of the Tripos a paper that he or she has previously offered in another University Examination.
11. The Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners as they may deem sufficient for each Part of the Tripos.
12. The Faculty Board may also nominate such number of Assessors as they may deem necessary for either Part of the Tripos. Assessors shall be responsible for setting the paper or papers in the subjects assigned to them by the Examiners, for looking over the work of the candidates therein, and for presenting such reports to the Examiners as may be required by them. Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
13. The questions proposed by each Examiner and Assessor shall be submitted to the whole body of Examiners for approval.
14. The Examiners and Assessors shall have regard to the style and method of a candidate's answers, and shall give credit for excellence in these respects.
15. The Examiners shall take account of a candidate's performance in an additional paper, or in the weaker of two papers either of which may be deemed to have been taken as an additional paper, only in so far as it is to the candidate's advantage. They shall not exclude a candidate from any class on the ground that he or she has not offered an additional paper.
16. (a) A candidate who, in accordance with Regulation 26(b) or Regulation 27(b), wishes to offer a dissertation shall apply, giving the title of the proposed topic, to the Secretary of the Faculty Board not earlier than the beginning of the Easter Term and not later than the first Monday of the Full Michaelmas Term in the calendar year next preceding the examination. A dissertation may be on any topic relating to the subject of any paper in the Tripos, but the Board may, when giving approval for a particular topic, impose the condition that a candidate who offers a dissertation on that topic may not offer a particular paper or a particular prescribed subject in a paper. The Secretary shall inform the candidate as soon as possible, and in any case before the end of Full Michaelmas Term, whether the topic has been approved by the Faculty Board.
(b) No change shall be made in the topic of a candidate's dissertation after the end of Full Michaelmas Term, but the Faculty Board shall have power to approve minor changes of wording in the title which clarify or define more precisely the scope of a topic previously approved, provided that such changes are submitted to the Secretary of the Faculty Board by the division of the Lent Term.
(c) A dissertation, which shall be of not more than 10,000 words (inclusive of notes but exclusive of bibliography), shall be sent to the Secretary of the Faculty Board so as to arrive not later than the third Monday of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held, together with a written declaration that it is the candidate's own original work and that it does not contain material already used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose. A dissertation should show evidence of reading, judgement, and criticism, and of a power of exposition, but not necessarily of original research, and should give full references to sources used. It must be written in English unless the candidate has received permission from the Board to use some other specified language; a request for such permission must be made when the original application is submitted.
(d) The dissertation shall be submitted under detailed arrangements approved by the Faculty Board. The Examiners shall have power to examine a candidate viva voce on his or her dissertation and on the general field of knowledge in which it falls.
17. There shall be separate class-lists for each Part. In each list the names of the candidates who obtain honours shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. The Examiners may affix a special mark to the names of those candidates whose work is in their opinion of special distinction.
18. The papers for the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos, which shall be divided into Groups A–D, shall be as follows:
|
Paper A1. |
Scriptural languages and texts: |
|
A. Hebrew I (Elementary Hebrew); B. New Testament Greek; C. Sanskrit; D. Qur’anic Arabic. |
|
|
Paper A2. |
One God? Hearing the Old Testament. |
|
Paper A3. |
[From Bethlehem to Rome: Luke – Acts and the origins of Christianity] 〈Jesus and the origins of the Gospel.〉160. |
|
Paper A4. |
Christianity and the transformation of culture. |
|
Paper A5. |
Who is Jesus Christ? |
|
Paper A6. |
Understanding contemporary religion. |
|
Paper A7. |
World religions in comparative perspective. |
|
Paper A8. |
Philosophy of religion and ethics. |
|
Paper B1. |
Intermediate languages and texts: |
|
A. Hebrew; B. New Testament Greek; C. Sanskrit; D. Qur’anic Arabic. |
|
|
Paper B2. |
The literature, history, and theology of the exilic age. |
|
Paper B3. |
Judaism in the Greek and Roman periods. |
|
Paper B4. |
The letters of Paul. |
|
Paper B5. |
The Johannine tradition. |
|
Paper B6. |
Belief and practice in the Early Church. |
|
Paper B7. |
Reform and renewal in Christian history.161 |
|
Paper B8. |
Study of theology I. |
|
Paper B9. |
Christian culture in the western world. |
|
Paper B10. |
Philosophy of religion: God, freedom, and the soul. |
|
Paper B11. |
Ethics and faith. |
|
Paper B12. |
Psychology and religion. |
|
Paper B13. |
Religious themes in literature. |
|
Paper B14. |
Life, thought, and worship of modern Judaism (also serves as Paper X.4 of the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos). |
|
Paper B15. |
Introduction to Islam (also serves as Paper X.5 of the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos).162 |
|
Paper B16. |
Life and thought of religious Hinduism and of Buddhism. |
|
Paper C1. |
Advanced language and texts: |
|
A Hebrew; B. Greek; C. Sanskrit; D. Arabic.163 |
|
|
Paper C2. |
Poets, prophets, storytellers, and sages. |
|
Paper C3. |
New Testament Christology. |
|
Paper C4. |
Religion, power, and political society. |
|
Paper C5. |
Study of theology II. |
|
Paper C6. |
Disputed questions in the Christian tradition. |
|
Paper C7. |
Topics in the study of religion. |
|
Paper C8. |
Judaism II (also serves as Paper H. 19 of the Oriental Studies Tripos). |
|
Paper C9. |
Islam II.162 |
|
Paper C10. |
Hinduism and Buddhism II. |
|
Paper C11. |
Metaphysics. |
|
Paper C12. |
Theology and science. |
|
Paper D1. |
Special subjects, specified by the Faculty Board. |
|
Paper D2. |
Interdisciplinary subjects, specified by the Faculty Board. |
19. Each paper shall be of three hours’ duration, provided that the Faculty Board shall have power to specify by supplementary regulation a paper or papers from any group which shall be examined by an alternative mode of assessment, in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 20.
20. The alternative mode of assessment for any paper specified by the Faculty Board under Regulation 19 shall consist of either (a) the submission of two essays or (b) the submission of a portfolio of six essays on topics chosen by the candidate from a list of topics published by the Faculty Board not later than the first Friday of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination. Where two essays are submitted under (a), the length of each essay shall be, for a candidate in Part I, not more than 3,000 words in length and, for candidates in Parts IIa and IIb, not more than 5,000 words in length (in each case, inclusive of notes but exclusive of bibliography). Where a portfolio of six essays is submitted under (b), the length of each essay shall be not fewer than 1,500 words and not more than 2,000 words in length. Candidates shall be required to declare that the essays are their own work. The essays shall be typewritten, in English, and shall be submitted through the candidate’s Director of Studies to the Secretary of the Faculty Board in accordance with detailed arrangements approved by the Board, so that the first essay submitted under (a) or the portfolio of essays submitted under (b) arrive not later than 1 p.m. on the first Monday of Full Easter Term and the second essay under (a) not later than 1 p.m. on the third Monday of Full Easter Term.
21. (a) Every candidate who offers a paper in which there is a choice of subject shall take only one of these question papers (except as provided for in Regulations 23(i), 24(i), 24(ii), 26(i), and 27(ii)); the candidate's examination entry shall state which subject he or she intends to offer.
(b) For Papers D1 and D2 the Faculty Board shall from time to time prescribe subjects as follows:
For Paper D1, not more than seven subjects.
For Paper D2, not more than seven subjects.
A separate question paper shall be set for each subject so prescribed for which there is a candidate.
(c) The Board may also prescribe that a candidate who offers a particular subject in one of Papers D1 and D2 may not also offer another particular paper.
22. A candidate for Part I shall offer:
provided that
23. A student who is a candidate for Part IIa in the year next after obtaining honours in Part I of the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos shall offer four papers chosen from Group B, provided that
24. A student who is a candidate for Part IIa in the year next after obtaining honours in an Honours Examination other than Part I of the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos or who is an Affiliated Student164 shall offer four papers, including:
provided that
25. A student who is a candidate for Part IIa in the year next after obtaining honours in an Honours Examination other than Part I of the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos and who has kept seven terms shall offer four papers chosen from Group B, provided that
26. A student who is a candidate for Part IIb in the year next after obtaining honours in Part IIa under Regulations 23 or 24 shall offer:
provided that
27. A student who is a candidate for Part IIb in the year next after obtaining honours in an Honours Examination other than Part I or Part IIa of the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos or who is an Affiliated Student164 shall offer:
provided that
28. The Faculty Board shall have power to exempt from the requirement to offer a language from Paper A1 any candidate for Part IIa under Regulation 24 who produces evidence that he or she has done work of a satisfactory standard in Greek or in Hebrew or in Sanskrit or in Arabic, whether in Cambridge or elsewhere. Such a candidate shall not offer in Part IIa Paper A1 in the language in which he or she has gained exemption. Any application for exemption shall be sent through the candidate's Director of Studies to the Secretary of the Faculty Board so as to arrive not later than the first Monday of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination, and shall include details of the applicant's qualifications. The Secretary shall inform the candidate's Director of Studies as soon as possible, and in any case by the division of the Michaelmas Term, whether the application has been approved.
This paper will comprise four sections, Section A, Hebrew I (Elementary Hebrew), Section B, New Testament Greek, Section C, Sanskrit, and Section D, Qur’anic Arabic; candidates will be required to confine their answers to a single section. Section A will contain (i) questions on Hebrew grammar, and (ii) passages for translation, linguistic comment, pointing, and retranslation from a portion or portions of the Old Testament prescribed by the Faculty Board. Section B will contain passages for translation, and for exegetical and grammatical comment, from one or more portions of the New Testament which the Board shall from time to time prescribe. Copies of a Greek lexicon will be available in the examination for those who wish to make use of them. Section C will contain (i) questions on Sanskrit grammar, and (ii) passages for translation, linguistic and exegetical comment, from a portion or portions of the Hindu and Buddhist scriptures prescribed by the Board. Section D will contain (i) questions on Arabic grammar, and (ii) passages for translation, linguistic and exegetical comment from a portion or portions of the Qur’an, the Hadith, and early Islamic theological literature prescribed by the Board.
This paper will provide an introduction to critical study of Old Testament literature and religion, focusing on the development of monotheism in a predominantly polytheistic setting. Texts for special study will be prescribed by the Faculty Board.
This paper introduces students to two significant New Testament writings. It will focus on Luke's presentation of the life of Jesus and of the early decades of the church. These writings include varied material, the study of which raises central historical, theological, and literary issues.]
This paper will, until further notice, be entitled ‘Jesus and the origins of the Gospel’. It will be concerned with central issues (arising from the primary sources and critical scholarship) in the study of the Gospels and the Historical Jesus. The Board may also prescribe a particular text or texts for special study.〉165
This paper will introduce students to the history of Christianity by considering key periods and issues in the interaction of Christianity with the culture in which it is set. The topic of the paper will be announced annually by the Faculty Board.
This paper will introduce some of the major themes and disciplines of Christian theology through a focus on Jesus Christ. The Faculty Board may from time to time prescribe texts for special study.
This paper will offer a broad introduction to the sociological study of religion with a particular focus on understanding developments in Britain since 1945 including secularization, charismatic religion, the New Age, new religious movements, and multiculturalism.
This paper will approach at least two religions through the study of a topic or topics specified annually by the Faculty Board, in the context of the history, beliefs, and practices of the main religions of the world. This paper shall be examined by the submission of two essays in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 20.
This paper will introduce students to the philosophy of religion and to ethics. The Faculty Board may from time to time prescribe texts for special study.
This paper will contain (i) passages for translation, linguistic, and exegetical comment, and retranslation from portions of text which the Faculty Board will from time to time prescribe, and (ii) essay questions on literary and theological aspects of the prescribed texts. Candidates may not offer in this paper any prescribed text which they have previously offered in Paper A1.
This paper will contain passages for translation, textual, exegetical, and theological comment from such portions of text as the Faculty Board will from time to time prescribe.
This paper will contain passages for translation from a number of texts which the Faculty Board shall from time to time prescribe, together with questions on the language and content of those texts.
This paper will contain passages for pointing, for translation, and for linguistic and exegetical comment from portions of the Qur’an, Qur’anic commentaries, and other Islamic literature which the Faculty Board shall from time to time prescribe. The paper will also contain a passage for translation from English into Arabic.
This paper will be concerned with Old Testament history from the reign of Hezekiah to the conquest of Babylon by Cyrus and with theological and literary responses to the Babylonian invasions and their consequences in the literature of the time, with particular reference to relevant sections of Genesis-Numbers; Deuteronomy; Joshua-2 Kings; Job; exilic elements in the Psalter; Isaiah 40–55; Jeremiah; Lamentations; Ezekiel. The Faculty Board will prescribe a portion of the Old Testament for special study.
This paper will be concerned with an essential period for our understanding of the formation of Judaism (and of nascent Christianity). It will examine the social, historical, and political contexts in which ancient Jews shaped their identity from the rise, after Persian rule, of Alexander the Great (332 bce) up to and including the series of Roman revolts that culminated in the one named after Bar-Kokhba (132–5 ce).
This paper will study the Pauline ‘corpus’, including Ephesians and the Pastoral epistles. There will be questions on historical, literary, and critical problems, but the emphasis will be on the theological thought and practice of the apostle Paul. The Faculty Board may also prescribe a particular text or texts for special study.
This paper will be concerned with central issues (arising from the primary sources and critical scholarship) in the study of the Fourth Gospel and Johannine Epistles. Although students will be expected to read the full text of the Gospels and Epistles, specific texts for more detailed study will be announced by the Faculty Board.
The paper will examine belief and practice in the patristic period to the sixth century, with particular emphasis on the development of Christology and the doctrine of the Trinity.
This paper is concerned with the themes of reform and renewal in the Christian tradition. The course aims to introduce students to the persistence, recurrence, and transformation of Christian aspirations for institutional, doctrinal, or spiritual and moral renewal, and thereby to assist understanding of the impact of different eras, regions, and societies on Christian identity and self-understanding. Candidates will study two topics prescribed from time to time by the Faculty Board.
This paper is concerned with the Christian understanding of God and humanity. The course aims to study this through classic texts from different periods, understood in the context of their time and in relation to current theological discussions. The Faculty Board may from time to time prescribe topics and texts for special study.
This paper will be concerned with the study of an aspect of the cultural formation and impact of Christian belief and practice, specified from time to time by the Faculty Board. This paper shall be examined by the submission of two essays in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 20.
This paper will explore some classical themes in the philosophy of religion. These will include attributes of God, issues of the relationships between God and the world, and issues of God and ‘the soul’.
The paper will study questions concerning the nature and form of moral judgment, as treated in the history of Western philosophy.
The paper will cover topics in the empirical psychology of religion such as religious development, religion and mental health, religious experience, conversion, charismatic and fundamentalist religion, and human spiritual qualities. The paper will also cover theoretical and methodological issues including the dialogue between psychology and theology, religion and psychoanalysis, the relationship of psychology to the study of religion in the social sciences, and contemporary critiques of the psychology of religion.
This paper will consider religious themes in literature connected to a set topic, to be announced by the Faculty Board at the end of the Easter Term preceding the year in which the paper is taught. This paper shall be examined by the submission of a portfolio of six essays in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 20.
This paper will be concerned with the life, thought, and worship of modern Judaism. The Faculty Board may from time to time prescribe texts for special study.
This paper will cover the origins, development, and contemporary situation of the theology, law, and mysticism of Islam. It will deal with literary-critical and interpretative problems relating to the founding documents of the religion, and with contemporary methodologies in philosophy of religion, gender studies, and comparative jurisprudence as applied to Islam. References to Christianity may be included. The Faculty Board may from time to time prescribe texts for special study.
The paper will consider the origins and development up to contemporary times of the beliefs and practices of the Hindu and Buddhist traditions. It will deal with problems of interpretation relating to the formation and understanding of founding texts, and with relevant issues in such areas as gender studies and the functioning of élite and colonial influences. The Faculty Board may from time to time prescribe texts for special study.
This paper will be concerned with the exegesis of prescribed text or texts in Hebrew. It will involve translation from and linguistic, text-critical, and exegetical comment on texts which the Faculty Board will from time to time prescribe, including some parts of the prophetic and poetic books of the Old Testament; passages for unseen translation from Hebrew into English; a passage for translation from English into Hebrew; and essay questions on literary and theological aspects of the prescribed texts.
This paper will contain (i) passages for translation, textual, grammatical, exegetical, and theological comment from such portions of text as the Faculty Board will from time to time prescribe, and (ii) essay questions on historical, literary, and theological aspects of the prescribed texts.
This paper will contain passages for translation and comment from a number of texts which the Faculty Board shall from time to time prescribe, together with questions on the language and content of those texts.
This paper will be concerned with the translation of, and linguistic and exegetical comment on portions of the Qur’an, Qur’anic commentaries, and other Islamic literature which the Faculty Board shall from time to time prescribe.
This paper will be concerned with the history of the Old Testament period and with developments in its literature, theology, and religion, including, for those who wish, some study of Jewish literature up to circa ad 100. Particular attention will be given to such topics as literary studies of Genesis and the books of Samuel; the Exodus narrative; the development of law in Exodus 20–23, Leviticus, and Deuteronomy; Psalms, Proverbs, and Ecclesiastes; prophecy to the end of the eighth century (especially Amos, Hosea, and Isaiah 1–39); Haggai, Zechariah, and Isaiah 56–66; the books of Chronicles and Ezra–Nehemiah; the Song of Songs; other ancient Near Eastern law, prophecy, and wisdom; and Ecclesiasticus, Tobit, and 2 Esdras. The Faculty Board may from time to time prescribe texts for special study.
This paper will be concerned with central issues, arising from the primary sources and critical scholarship, in the study of Christology within the New Testament.
This paper is concerned with the relationship between the churches, government, and the wider society. The aim is to introduce students to the web of relationships between ecclesiastical structures, secular legal authority, political aspirations, and popular religious movements, in order to elucidate the theological and ecclesiological issues involved. Candidates will study two topics prescribed by the Faculty Board.
This paper will be concerned with an advanced topic in the study of theology. The topic will be prescribed by the Faculty Board.
The paper will examine theological problems arising within ‘classical’ Christian theology, in the context of major theological loci. The Faculty Board may from time to time prescribe topics and texts for special study.
This paper will be concerned with an aspect of the study of religion, as specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
This paper will consider the life, thought, and worship of medieval and modern Judaism. The Faculty Board may from time to time prescribe subjects and texts for special study.
This paper will deal with two advanced topics in Islamic studies specified from time to time by the Faculty Board. The Board may also from time to time prescribe texts for special study.
This paper will be concerned with two advanced topics in the Hindu and Buddhist traditions prescribed from time to time by the Faculty Board. The Board may also from time to time prescribe texts for special study.
This paper will study issues raised in contemporary philosophies and theologies, but drawing also on classical, medieval, and modern materials, concerning the relations between metaphysics and theology. The purpose of this paper is to encourage debate on core contemporary issues, including the questions of ‘foundationalism’ and ‘anti-foundationalism’; God and ‘being’; God, time, and history; language, analogy, and metaphor; construction and de-construction in theology; and other issues as appropriate.
The paper will cover (a) topics in theology where there is a substantive engagement with contemporary science (b) historical, philosophical, and methodological perspectives on the dialogue between theology and science.
Papers in this group except D1(a), (b), and (f) shall be examined by the submission of two essays in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 20.
A specified topic will be studied in a series of seminars dealing with literary, historical, and theological aspects of a text or texts prescribed by the Faculty Board, ancient Near Eastern parallels, and early Jewish and Christian understandings and uses of the texts.
This paper will explore in detail a topic of particular interest to students of Christianity in the first two centuries. The topic will be prescribed by the Faculty Board.
This paper will study in detail a topic in the history of Christianity. The topic will be prescribed by the Faculty Board.
This paper will study the doctrine of God through classic texts from several periods. The Faculty Board may from time to time prescribe topics and texts for special study.
The paper will consider religion and theology in the light of evolutionary biology, including such topics as (a) the history of religious responses to the theory of evolution, (b) current issues in evolutionary science, (c) the philosophy of evolutionary biology, including evolutionary ethics and epistemology, (d) reformulations of Christian doctrine in the light of evolutionary thinking, and (e) evolutionary theories of religion.
This topic will be studied from a comparative point of view. The Faculty Board may from time to time prescribe texts for special study.
Papers in this group except D2(c) shall be examined by the submission of two essays in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 20.
This paper is concerned with the Christian doctrine of human nature. It is studied in relation to a dossier of primary texts from the patristic to the Renaissance period, arranged round four topics.
This paper will provide an introduction to diverse forms of biblical interpretation, both Jewish and Christian, which have been used from the patristic period to the present day. Special emphasis will be laid upon elucidating the historical context out of which individual interpretative strategies emerged and upon showing how these different strategies manifested themselves in the interpretation of particular biblical texts.
This paper is concerned with the study of both Jewish and Christian responses to the Holocaust. The Faculty Board may from time to time prescribe texts for special study.
This paper will be concerned with the interaction between Jewish and Hellenistic traditions from the time of Alexander the Great until the early rabbis. It will examine the conceptual problems of ‘Hebraism and Hellenism’ through an examination of the literature, history, and religious life of Jews in the period.
This paper will be concerned with both the common themes and the diversity of contemporary Christianity in its global setting. Particular emphasis will be given to the dialogical character of Christian theological reflection outside Europe since 1914 in relation both to indigenous cultures and to structures of global political and economic power.
This paper is concerned with topics in applied Christian ethics, as specified from time to time by the Faculty Board.